Konica 8050 SM

Return to SubMenu
8050
SERVICE HANDBOOK
FIELD SERVICE
Jul. 2003 Ver. 1.0

KONICA CORPORATION
TECHNOLOGY SUPPORT CENTER
TOKYO JAPAN
KCS805010
PRINTED IN JAPAN N65AF1110
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2 SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
ADJUSTMENT
1.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 4. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 4.1 5.1 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Checking method of theP function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 List of adjustment items for 25 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.6 6.7 Standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Non-standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Wide paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Count reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 6. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Change setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Parts counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 6.7.1 6.7.2 Count of special parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Count of each parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
6.8 6.9
Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
6.10 M/C serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 6.11 Indication of ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 6.12 KRDS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 6.14 Setting date input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47 6.15 Board change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
VI DIAGRAMS
6.13 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
V ERROR CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST
III SERVICE
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS FOR 8050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
II SERVICE TOOL
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
I ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
7. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
I ADJUSTMENT
7.1 7.2
Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 Drum peculiarity adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 Sensor output check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55 Exclusive paper setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56 Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57 Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63 RADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 Centring adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76 Scanner gamma adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77 Printer gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78 Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83 Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84 Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84 ACS adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86 Density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87 Tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
7.3
Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6
II SERVICE TOOL
7.4
Image quality adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 7.4.8 7.4.9
III SERVICE
7.5
Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91 7.5.1 Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92 Test pattern density setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96 Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96 7.8.1 7.8.2 7.8.3 7.8.4 7.8.5 7.8.6 7.8.7 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FS-215 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97 Fold stopper adjustment (FS-215 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (PI-110 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98 Trimming stopper adjustment (TU-109 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98 Punch adjustment (PK-120 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99 Three-folding adjustment (FS-215 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101 2 positions staple pitch adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102
IV JAM CODE LIST
7.6 7.7 7.8
V ERROR CODE LIST
7.9 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4
List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102 47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103 Adjustment data display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104 Hard disk check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104 Input check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106 Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117 Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129 Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130 ii
8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103
VI DIAGRAMS
8.5 9.1 9.2
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9
CONTENTS
Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132 Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134 FNS adjustment of the by-pass conveyance guide plate magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-136 FNS adjustment of the by-pass gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137 FNS adjustment of the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139 FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142 9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144 9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-148 9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150 9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FS-215) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-154 9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FS-215) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-156 9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FS-215) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158 9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only for FS-215) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159 9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160 9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164 9.22 LCT skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167 9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-169 9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170 9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171 9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-172 9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174 9.21 LCT tray mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165 9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L (only for FS-215) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146
1. ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Description of the ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Installing the USB driver for ISWTrns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Board used for the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Instances of ISW transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 ISW transfer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2. INTERNET ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 What is the Internet ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Main features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Initial setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.6 Setting on Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Setting on Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Transmitting E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Internet ISW using Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 iii
VI DIAGRAMS
V ERROR CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST
II
SERVICE TOOL
III SERVICE
II SERVICE TOOL
I ADJUSTMENT
Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
CONTENTS 2.6.1
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Prior announcement to administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 If power failure occurs during data rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 ISW of multiple programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 If ISW fails in low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 What is a proxy server? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Authentication of proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
I ADJUSTMENT
2.6.2 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.8 2.8.1
Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4
II SERVICE TOOL
3. MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 What is the Mail remote notification system?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Operation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 How to use the Mail remote notification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Disabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
III SERVICE
III SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Periodic check items (main body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Periodic check items (DF-319). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Periodic check items (LT-211) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Periodic check items (FS-115/215) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Periodic check items (PI-110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Periodic check items (TU-109). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
IV JAM CODE LIST
1.10 Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 2. COPY MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 2.1 Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 PM parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 2.2 2.3
V ERROR CODE LIST
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
IV JAM CODE LIST

1. JAM CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
V
VI DIAGRAMS
ERROR CODE LIST
1. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 2. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
iv
CONTENTS
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 8050 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 DF-319 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 LT-211 parts layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 FS-115/FS-215 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 TU-109 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 8050 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 DF-319 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 LT-211 connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 FS-115/FS-215 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 TU-109 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 8050 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 DF-319 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 LT-211 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 FS-115/215 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 DF-319 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 LT-211 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 FS-115/215 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 TU-109 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-3 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-5 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-7 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (5/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-9 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (6/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-11 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (7/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-13 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (8/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-15 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-17
5. APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1
5.10 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-19
VI DIAGRAMS
V ERROR CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST
III SERVICE
TU-109 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
II SERVICE TOOL
I ADJUSTMENT
VI DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
V ERROR CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST
III SERVICE
II SERVICE TOOL I ADJUSTMENT
Blank page
vi
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to the copier, Konica Corporation strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by Konica-trained service technicians. Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Handbook was printed. Accordingly, Konica Corporation does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service Handbook is complete and accurate. The user of this Service Handbook must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service Handbook is intended. Therefore, this Service Handbook must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly. Keep this Service Handbook also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

In this Service Handbook, each of three expressions DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning. When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier. :Prohibition when using the copier. :Direction when using the copier.
General precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General prohibition
Do not touch with wet hand
Do not disassemble
General instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA
Konica copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network. Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

Using any cables or power cord not specified by Konica.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by Konica. Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by Konica
Using parts not specified by Konica
S-2
2.
CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Konica copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks. 2.1 Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet

Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
kw
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely. Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the risk of fire. Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is damaged. If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Konica. Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock. When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to observe the following precautions: a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket on the rear panel of the copier. Secure the cord with a fixture properly. b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Konica. If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire. Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
S-3
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

Do not bundle or tie the power cord. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet. Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire. Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand. The risk of electric shock exists.
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable. The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists. When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may result in fire. Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may result.
WARNING: Ground Lead

Check whether the copier is grounded properly. If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the following points: a. Ground terminal of wall outlet b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-4
WARNING: Ground Lead

Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected. Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock: a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.) b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.) c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case of lightning.) d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.) 2.2. Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile materials that may catch fire. A risk of fire exists. Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water. A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling

When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power cord. Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat source such as a heater. A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists. Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind. Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows: Temperature: 10C to 30C Humidity: 10% to 80% (no dew condensation) Avoid other environments as much as possible.
CAUTION: Ventilation
Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette smoke, or ammonia gas. Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems and image faults.
S-5
CAUTION: Ventilation
The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room b. When taking a lot of copies c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to install the copier in a level and sturdy place. Constant vibration will cause problems. Be sure to lock the caster stoppers. In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service handbook, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation. If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a risk of injury or fire exists. Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the copier and options. When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists.
The area around the fixing unit is hot. You may get burnt.
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the copier powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
S-6
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached. High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages. The user or CE may be injured. Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the copier. They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire. Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable. (Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts) Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit. Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire. Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mounting position. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authority. Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state. A risk of fire exists. Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly. If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other pointed parts. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative. If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire. You may be burned due to dust explosion.
S-8
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated. A risk of fire exists. Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists.
When using any solvent, ventilate the room well. Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
3.

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and Konica Corporation must be notified. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by Konica Corporation. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in Serious Accident Report/ Follow-up Procedures.
4.

CONCLUSION
Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration. Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer engineer. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
S-9
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. This copier is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious accidents. Overall protection circuit Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit
These safety circuits are described below to provide the service engineer with a renewed awareness of them in order to prevent servicing errors that may impair their functions.
1.
Overall protection circuit

CBR1
NF CBR2 8050sf001
1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in the AC line. CAUTION: The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
2.
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit
PRCB TH1 TH3 Control section AC driver section ACDB L2 L3 TS1
FHCB
TH2 TH4
TS2 L4 RL1
RL1
8050sf002e
2.1 Protection by software The output voltage from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is read by the CPU. If this voltage is abnormal, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening main relay (RL1). CAUTION: The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the specified clearances. The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit The output voltages from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2), fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3), and fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) are compared with the abnormality judgment reference value in the comparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1, TH2, TH3, or TH4 exceeds the reference value, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening RL1. CAUTION: The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the specified clearances. Periodically check the contact between the fixing upper roller and TH3 and the contact between the fixing lower roller and TH4, and replace them if any abnormality is detected. The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2) When the temperature of the fixing upper roller exceeds the specified value, TS1 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L2 and L3 directly. When the temperature of the fixing lower roller exceeds the specified value, TS2 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L4 directly. CAUTION: Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2.
S-12
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
8050sf003e
CAUTION You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our Service Office.
S-13
8050sf004e
S-14
8050sf005e
S-15
8050sf006e
S-16
8050sf007e
S-17
PS
Unplug the machine before removing platen glass. Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d'exposition. Desenchufe la maquina antes de quitar el vidrio.
~ Desconecte a unidade da tomada antes de remover o vidro de exposicao.
8050sf008e
S-18
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION off. So, be sure to unplug the power cord from machine with the power supplied, be careful of
ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION

1.1 Composition
the scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to get caught by the gear. 2. The fixing section may be very hot. Be careful not to get burnt when handling it. 3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be careful not to bring a watch and instrument near to the unit. 4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool. 5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare hands.
This part "Adjustment" describes items to be adjusted and their method of adjustment that are required by this machine and gives detailed explanations. A. Checking before starting work When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary to check in advance the following: 1. Are the power source and voltage secured in accordance with the specifications? 2. Is the power source properly grounded? 3. Is any equipment that consumes repeatedly a lot of electricity connected to the same power source? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as elevator and air conditioner) 4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the machine? High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc. Levelness of the location on which the machine is installed. 5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original itself? 6. Is density selected properly? 7. Is the original glass stained? 8. Is proper paper used for copy? 9. Are copy materials replaced with new ones at their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning blade, etc.) 10. Is toner filled? B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site service Due attention should be paid to the following when repairing the machine. 1. In this machine, when the reset switch (SW1) is turned off, only one side of the AC line is shut 1-1
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS

Adjustments and setting are required when there occurs a claim for poor image qulaity. However, these adjustments (including checking) and setting are also required when a part is replaced with a new one. [How to use the tables] Each item represents the following: 1. Mode Shows which mode is used for adjustments. "25": 25 mode "36": 36 mode "47": 47 mode 2. A circle " " in the table , ................. : Shows that the order of priority has been specified for adjustments (including checking) and setting. (Empty circle) : Shows that adjustments (including checking) and setting can be done independently.
I ADJUSTMENT
the power outlet. Also, when operating the
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS FOR 8050
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS FOR 8050

I ADJUSTMENT
This table shows the list of adjustment items when replacing a part. Items are numbered in " ority if there is any. " by the priDrum cartridge (drum) /Y, M, C, K 4 1 2 3
Replacement parts
Adjustment items
PM count Parts counter
PM counter resetting PM cycle set Count of special parts
1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K Fixing cleaning unit Developer /Y, M, C, K Decurler roller
ISW Board change mode Process adjustment
Drum peculiarity adjustment
Image adjustment
Magnification adjustment
Timing adjustment
Blade setting mode LD bias adjustment Automatic gamma adjustment (0) Automatic developer charge L detection initial auto. adjustment Initial drum rotation Printer vertical mag. adjustment Printer horizontal mag. adjustment Belt line speed adjustment Fixing line speed adjustment Printer lead edge timing adj. Writing unit skew initial adj. Auto. color registration adj. Color registration manual adjustment Printer gamma offset adj. Printer gamma sensor adj. Printer screen gradation adj. Dot detect adjustment Color text adjustment Dot/Text area adjustment
Image quality adjustment
Scanner gamma adjustment Printer gamma adjustment
Sharpness adjustment Image judge adjustment
Other adjustment
ACS adjustment FNS stapler position adjustment
*1 *2 *3
After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first performed the L detection adjustment. When replacing memory board (MB), be sure to replace the developer, 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K, and fixing cleaning unit. When adjust the belt line speed adjustment, be sure to adjust the fixing line speed adjustment.
When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, the memory board (MB) that was installed on the damaged OACB should be used on the new OACB. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor if it is considered that the MB is also damaged. Never perform the 47 mode - 92 (output).
1-2
Mode 25 36
Developer *1 Transfer belt Belt cleaning blade 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K Image correction unit Charging corona /Y, M, C, K Fixing roller /U, L Fixing cleaning unit Decurler roller Write unit /K Write unit /Y, M, C Dust-proof glass /Y, M, C, K CCD unit Each scanner mirror Exposure lamp (L1) Original glass Overall control board (OACB) 1 2 Printer control board (PRCB) 1 2 Image processing board (IPB) Operation board /1 (OB1) 1 2 Memory board (MB) *2 1 Registration roller 1
3 1 2
2*3 3
4 5 6 2 1
4 3 2 3*3 3*3 4 4 5 6 1 7 1 5 6 2 7
1 2
1-3
2 3 7 6 5 1 4 1 2 6 5 4 3 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 3 1
RADF control board (DFCB) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler unit
I ADJUSTMENT
MODE CHANGE MENU
4. MODE CHANGE MENU

I ADJUSTMENT
4.1
Setting method
5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION

The P function is a function that allows you to confirm the following various numeric values by using the P button. [1] Total counter [2] Full color counter [3] Mono color counter [4] Monochrome counter [5] Copier counter [6] Printer counter
From this screen, the following modes can be selected without turning off/on the power. "1 Basic screen" "2 36 mode" "3 25 mode" "4 Key operator mode" "5 47 mode" A. Procedure 1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main switch (SW2). 2. Press the P button and wait until "Enter 4-digit password to change mode" appears. 3. Input 9272 as the password and press the START button. (The password is fixed and cannot be changed.) "Mode changing menu screen" is displayed. 4. Press any desired key. 5. To return to the "Mode changing menu screen," press the P button and wait until the "Mode changing menu screen" appears. 6. After completion of adjustment, press the [Exit] key to return to the basic screen.
5.1
Checking method of the P function
A. Procedure 1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main switch (SW2). 2. Press the P button. 3. "Counter list screen" appears. 4. Press the ! button in "Counter list screen," and the PM counter is displayed. 5. To output the counter value list, press the [Counter list output] key. 6. Pressing the [Exit] key, or the stop or clear button returns to the basic screen.
1-4
25 MODE
6. 25 MODE
6.1 List of adjustment items for 25 mode
Adjustment item menu 1. Software SW setting 2. Paper size setting 3. PM count 4. Data collection 1. Count reset 2. Change setting 1. Total count of each paper setting 2. Copy count of each paper size 3. Print count of each paper size 4. RADF count 5. Page fill of each section 6. JAM data of time series 7. JAM count 8. Count of each copy mode 9. SC count 10. JAM count of each section 11. SC count of each section 5. Parts counter 6. Password setting 1. Count of special parts 2. Count of each parts 1. Key operator password 2. EKC master key code 3. Weekly timer password 7. Telephone number setting 8. M/C serial number setting 1. Service centre Telephone number 2. Service centre FAX number 1. Main body 2. Option tray 3. RADF 4. Finisher 9. Indication of ROM version 10. KRDS setting 11. ISW 12. Setting date input 13. Board change mode See the KRDS manual provided separately 4 digits 8 digits 4 digits 16 digits 16 digits Remarks See the "List of software DIPSW". LCT paper size setting
1-5
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.2
I ADJUSTMENT
Setting method
6.3
Setting software DIPSW
This machine is provided with the 25 mode as an adjustment method. This mode is used when the memory board (MB) is rewritten or various settings are made.
A. Setting method The software DIPSW is set on "Software SW setting screen." Note:
A. Procedure 1. Turn OFF the main switch (SW2) with the reset switch (SW1) left ON. 2. While pressing the numeric keys 2 and 5 at the same time, turn on the SW2. the "25 mode menu screen" appears. At this point, the machine enters the 25 mode with normal copy operations unavailable. 3. Press the item keys on the liquid crystal display (LCD). A setting screen corresponding to each item appears. 4. Confirm the input data on the setting screen of each item. 5. Turn off the SW2 to release the 25 mode. 6. New data will be effective after restarting.
Please note that DIPSW bits are written into the memory board (MB) each time a change is made. B. Meaning of the values displayed on the screen
[1]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050fs1026e
DIPSW number Bit number (0 to 7) Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF 8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.
C. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Software SW setting] key. 3. "Software SW setting screen" Select a DIPSW number by using the arrow key on the left. 4. Select a bit number of the DIPSW by using the arrow key on the right. 5. Select the ON (1) or OFF (0) of the DIPSW by using the [ON] or [OFF] key. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "25 mode menu screen". For each function of the DIPSW, see "List of software DIPSW." 1-6
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 List of software DIPSW Note: Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function. DIPSW No. Bit DIPSW1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Print stop method after toner supply or waste toner full display Prohibition of printing when the PM count is reached Print number setting until printing is prohibited after PM is displayed Hard disk connection Control of the LT paper feed assist fan Switchover of the rotational speed of the polygon motor SC latch (SC34/35/36) Password request for 25, 36, 47 mode (password: 9272) 47 mode 15-01, 02 counter clear Disabled Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 *2 *2 *2 Disconnected *3 *3 *4 *4 Unlatched Not requested *2 *2 *2 Connected *3 *3 *4 *4 Latched Requested 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Not prohibited Prohibited 0 0 Functions 0 *1 *1 1 *1 *1
25 MODE
Default values Japan 1 0 1 0 Inch 1 0 1 0 Metric 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1-7
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE DIPSW No. Bit Functions Recovery from removal of the key counter 5 6 APS when change magnification Change of fixed magnifications setting in key operator mode 7 Large size paper counting method (Other than PM counter) DIPSW5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Change of the size of the large size paper Enabled Enabled 0 Disabled
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 1 Enabled Disabled Disabled Default values Japan Inch 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Metric 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW4
0 1 2 3 4
Count as 1
Count as 2
A3, 11 x 17 or larger
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B4, 8.5 x 14 or larger
1-8
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 DIPSW No. Bit DIPSW8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW10 0 Page memory reservation at power on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Filter for jagged edges on slanting lines Jam code display Disabled Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled Copy quantity limit selection Large size paper PM counting method Operation when the key counter is removed (copier) Operation when the key counter is removed (IP) Message switchover *5 *5 *6 *6 *6 *6 No reservation Same as the stop button Ignored Immediate stop jam Same as DIPSW9-0 *5 *5 *6 *6 *6 *6 94MB (177MB when MU-412 is installed) Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Functions 0 Count as 1 1 Count as 2
25 MODE Default values 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1-9
I ADJUSTMENT
Japan
Inch
Metric
25 MODE DIPSW No. Bit Functions Adjustment of the image quality in the key operator mode 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW13 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW14 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 KRDS connection Selection of the KRDS type FNS alarm stop method Size detection switchover 5 (main body) Size detection switchover 5 (by-pass) Size detection switchover 5 (platen) Size detection switchover 5 (ADF) Size detection switchover 5 (PI) F4 size setting Black text screen with overlay function Size detection switchover 1 Size detection switchover 2 Size detection switchover 3 Size detection switchover 4 A5, A4R A6R 8.5 x 14 *8 *8 *9 *9 *7 Screen 0 Disabled
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 1 Enabled *7 Nonscreen 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5x11R Post card F4 *8 *8 *9 *9 Default values Japan Inch 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Telephone line *10 *10 Disconnected E-mail *10 *10 Connected 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW12
0 1
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11 / B5R 8.5 x 11 / B5R B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11/B5R B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K/16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11 / B5R B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11 / B5R
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR
1-10
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 DIPSW No. Bit DIPSW16 0 1 Recognizing the copy reservation function/coin vendor 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW17 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW18 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW19 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PK faulty part isolation Default resolution of the IP scanner Tray 1 faulty part isolation Tray 2 faulty part isolation Tray 3 faulty part isolation Tray 4 (LCT) faulty part isolation Folding, stich & folding, tri-fold, trimmer faulty part isolation PI faulty part isolation HDD faulty part isolation Fixing temperature selection Normal Normal *13 *13 *13 Normal *14 *14 Unavailable Unavailable *13 *13 *13 Unavailable *14 *14 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Density selection at scanning the tabed paper Coin vendor type Counting of the key counter in the printer mode (IP) Display of the total count start date (P function) NIC selection for E-Mail KRDS Summer time setting *11 *11 *11 *11 *12 *12 *12 Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal *11 *11 *11 *11 *12 *12 *12 Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IP NIC Copier NIC 0 0 0 0 0 0 Displayed Not displayed 0 0 Functions 0 1
25 MODE Default values 0 0 0 0 0 0
Copy reservation Copy reservation function enabled function prohibited Coin vendor disabled Coin vendor enabled Parallel Not counted Serial Counted
0 0
0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
communication communication
1-11
I ADJUSTMENT
Japan
Inch
Metric
25 MODE DIPSW No. Bit Functions Group stapling mode Image scanning area with shift function 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW22 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Image reference position for the non-standard size original Function of the power save button Operation when FNS runs out of staple 7 Selection of the stamped page number Keyboard layout LCT size setting in the key operator mode Display of the original count Selection of the index paper with APS IP address setting Number of punch holes Disabled *16 *16 selection Enabled Displayed Disabled Based on original 0 Disabled
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 1 Enabled * 15 Original priority Based on transfer paper QWERTY layout Enabled Not displayed Enabled Enabled *16 *16 ADF Disabled Selecting between staple supply or staple release 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Default values Japan Inch 0 0 0 Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW20
0 1
*15 Normal
ABC layout Disabled
Based on user Based on APS at
Staple supply request
1-12
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 DIPSW No. Bit DIPSW23 0 1 2 3 4 Output when EKC (ECM) user ID is unmatched (IP) Precision of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction) Control of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction) Main scan correction of the color registration automatic correction (periodic correction) 5 6 7 DIPSW24 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW25 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW26 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IP gamma correction Job memory registration of the special paper setting on the by-pass tray Vs/Vp switch control Image stabilization control timing Color registration correction control Color registration fine correction De-humid heater *21 Disabled *22 *22 *23 *23 Yes ON *21 Enabled *22 *22 *23 *23 No OFF 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 *20 Enabled Disabled *20 Disabled Enabled 0 0 0 0 *19 Enabled *19 Disabled 0 0 *18 Enabled *18 Disabled 0 0 Functions 0 Enabled (counted as the other user) *17 Normal 1 Disabled (registered in JOB list) *17 Fine 0 0
25 MODE Default values 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1-13
I ADJUSTMENT
Japan
Inch
Metric
25 MODE DIPSW No. Bit Functions Toner refresh mode (at job end) Toner refresh mode (periodical) Printer gamma offset adjustment 5 6 7 DIPSW29 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW31 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PK punch mode restriction Toner refresh mode switchover Include of proof copy to the set copy quantity Restriction of the display of the 25 mode data correction Restricted 0
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 1 *24 Enabled *24 Enabled *25 Whole area Disabled *26 M,C Included Not restricted Default values Japan Inch 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW27
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIPSW28
0 1 2 3 4
*24 Disabled *24 Disabled *25 Only high light Enabled *26 Y,M,C,K Not included
1-14
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 *1 Print stop method after toner supply or waste toner full display Mode Stops after ejecting paper in the machine Stops at a break between copy set Stops at the end of the current job Does not stop 1 1 *6 Copy quantity limit selection Mode No limit 1 sheet 1-7 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1-6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1-5 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 3 sheets 5 sheets 9 sheets 10 sheets 20 sheets 30 sheets 50 sheets 99 sheets No limit No limit *3 Control of the LT paper feed assist fan Mode ON for coated paper only ON for all types of paper ON for all types of paper OFF at all times 0 1 1 1 0 1 2-5 0 2-4 0 *7 No limit No limit No limit 9-7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9-6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1-3 0 1-2 0 counter Please insert copy card Please insert coin Please insert key counter 0 1 1 *5 Message switchover 0
25 MODE
Please insert key
0 1 0 1
*2
Print number setting until printing is prohibited after PM is displayed Mode
9-5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
9-4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
1,000 prints 2,000 prints 3,000 prints 4,000 prints 5,000 prints 1,000 prints 1,000 prints 1,000 prints
Black text screen with overlay function When using the overlay of the applied function, the image creation method of black characters is switched between the error diffusion and the screen. Mode 12-6 0 1
*4
Switchover of the rotational speed of the polygon motor Mode 2-7 0 0 1 1 2-6 0 1 0 1 A5R B6R 5.5 x 8.5R *8 Screen Error diffusion
1/1 speed 1/1 speed 2/3 speed 1/2 speed
Size detection switchover 4 Mode 13-4 0 0 1 1 13-3 0 1 0 1
1-15
I ADJUSTMENT
Mode
9-3
9-2
25 MODE *9 F4 size setting Mode 8 x 13 8.25 x 13 8.125 x 13.25 8.5 x 13 13-6 0 0 1 1 13-5 0 1 0 1 80
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 *12 Density selection when scanning the tabed paper Mode 40 (most lighter) 60 100 120 160 200 255 (most darker) 17-6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 17-5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 17-4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
I ADJUSTMENT
*10 FNS alarm stop method This setting is used to determine when to stop if a FNS full alarm is detected. Functions detected are; Lower limit of the FNS tray, the number of the FNS trays, FNS booklet tray, PK punch scraps, TU scraps and TU stacker Mode Stops immediately after detection Stops at a break between copy set after detection Does not stop while in printing Does not stop while in printing 1 1 1 0 0 1 15-4 0 15-3 0
*13 Fixing temperature selection Temperature up: Decrease a insufficient fixing or fixing winding jam Temperature down: Decrease paper exit curling or waving Mode Upper roller, lower roller: -30C Upper roller, lower roller: -20C Upper roller, lower roller: -10C Standard Upper roller, lower roller: 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 19-3 0 19-2 0 19-1 0
*11
Summer time setting Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
+10C Upper roller: +10C Lower roller: +20C Stanard
0 minute 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 40 minutes 50 minutes 60 minutes 70 minutes 80 minutes 90 minutes 100 minutes 110 minutes 120 minutes 130 minutes 140 minutes 150 minutes
*14 Default resolution of the IP scanner Mode 400dpi 600 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 19-7 0 0 1 1 19-6 0 1 0 1
1-16
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 *15 Image scanning area with shift function Normal: Compare the original size and the transfer paper size and the smaller one is to be the image area. Original priority: Original size is to be the image area. Mode Normal Original priority 20-1 0 1 Enabled *16 Number of punch holes Mode 2 holes (for Japan) 3 holes (for inch area) 4 holes (for metric area) 22-2 0 0 1 1 22-1 0 1 0 1 Disabled *19
25 MODE Main scan correction of the color registration The color registration corrections, in the main scanning direction that are periodically performed can be omitted. This is used temporarily when there is a registration error along the main scan as a result of a trouble around the transfer belt unit, or when separating faulty points. Mode 23-4 0 1
*20
IP gamma correction In order to separate difective items when there is poor images sent from IP. The gamma correction can be omitted. The gamma correction table is stored in the IP. Mode 23-5 0 1
*17
Precision of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction) "Fine" is used when the precision of the color registration correction that is periodically conducted is increased with the amount of error reduced. However, it takes about 2 minutes longer for correction. Mode 23-2 0 1
Enabled Disabled
*21
Vs/Vp switch control This Vs/Vp switch control is used when there is an image erasure around a solid image in the half-tone section in early stage after the change of developer. Mode 24-1 0 1
Normal Fine
Disabled *18 Color registration auto correction control (periodical correction) Down time while in the continuous printing is reduced with the color registration correction omitted that is periodically performed (color registration correction at power ON is not omitted). Mode Enabled Disabled 23-3 0 1 Enabled
1-17
I ADJUSTMENT
auto correction (periodical correction)
25 MODE *22 Image stabilization control timing
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 *24 Toner refresh mode (at Job end) Toner refresh mode (periodical) When printing coverage is low (5% or less of each color), rough image, white spot or toner spillage tend to occur due to toner deterioration. The effective measure against these are as follows. Toner refresh mode in key operator mode It is performed by a user's decision when a problem occurs. Amount of toner equivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid is developed for all Y, M, C, K. (It needs to change setting by DIPSW 287) 24-2 0 1 0 1 DIPSW 28-2 For the colors of which print coverage of the previous job is 5% or less (convert into A4), solid toner of the difference amount from the 5% is developed to consume toner. PIPSW 28-3 Check the average print coverage for each color at prescribed distance of developing sleeve drive developes the toner amount equivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid for the color of which the average print coverage is 5% or less (convert into A4). time when the Mode Disabled Enabled 28-2 0 1 time when the
I ADJUSTMENT
Correction made: Correction is performed by suspending print at specified print. No correction made: Correction is omitted temporarily to reduce down machine cannot be used with SC due to the malfunction of the drum potential sensor or gamma sensor. No correction while in printing: Correction that is performed by suspending print at every specified print is performed after the print job to reduce down time. Mode Correction made Correction not made No correction while in printing 1 24-3 0 0 1
*23 Color registration correction control Correction made: Correction is performed by suspending print at specified print. No correction made: Correction is omitted temporarily to reduce down machine cannot be used with SC due to malfunctions around the color registration sensor. No correction while in printing: Correction that is performed by suspending print at every specified print is performed after the print job to reduce down time. Mode Correction made Correction not made No correction while in printing 1 1 25-4 0 0 1 25-3 0 1 0
Mode Disabled Enabled
28-3 0 1
1-18
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 *25 Printer gamma offset adjustment offset of the 36 mode can be adjusted. 0: 1: High light area only Possible in whole area Mode High light area only Possible in whole area 28-4 0 1
25 MODE
*26
Toner refresh mode switchover Switch over the toner refresh mode function in the key operator mode. 0: Amount of toner equivalent of 8 sheets A3 solid is developed for all Y, M, C and K to consume toner. 1: This setting is effective for rough image, white spot and toner spillage. This setting is not so effective for white line (paper feeding direction). Amount of toner equivalent of 10 sheets A3 half-tone is developed for M and C to consume toner. This setting is effective for white line (paper feeding direction). This setting is effective for rough image, white spot and toner spillage for magenta and cyan only. (It has no effect for yellow and black.) Mode 28-7 0 1
Y,M,C,K M,C
1-19
I ADJUSTMENT
Change the area in which the printer gamma
25 MODE
6.4
I ADJUSTMENT
Paper size setting
6.4.3 Wide paper setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Paper size setting] key. 3. "Paper size setting screen"
Conduct this setting when changing the paper size of the LCT. The paper size is available in the standard size, non-standard size and wide paper. 6.4.1 Standard size setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Paper size setting] key. 3. "Paper size setting screen" Press the [Standard size] key. 4. Press the arrow key to select the paper size. 5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [Cancel ] key and return to "25 mode menu screen."
Press the [Wide paper] key. 4. Press the arrow keys and select the standard size of the wide paper. 5. Press the [Enter size] key. 6. Press the main scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys. 7. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys. 8. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return to "25 mode menu screen."
6.4.2 Non-standard size setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Paper size setting] key. 3. "Paper size setting screen" Press the [Non-standard size] key. 4. Press the main scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys. 5. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys. 6. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return to "25 mode menu screen."
1-20
25 MODE 6.5.2 Change setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [3. PM count] key. 3. "PM count/cycle screen" Press the [Page] or [Distance] key.
6.5
PM count setting
Reset the PM count after implementation of the PM and set and/or change the PM cycle. The selection of the PM cycle is available in the total count and the distance in operation of the developing unit /K. In default, the total count is set. 6.5.1 Count reset A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [3. PM count] key. 3. "PM count/cycle screen" Press the [Count reset] key. 4. "PM count reset confirmation screen" Press the [YES] key when resetting the PM count. The PM count is reset and the starting date of the PM count is automatically entered. When the [NO] key is pressed, the PM count is not reset and return to "PM count/cycle screen."
4. Enter a cycle value through the numeric keys. Only the upper three digits can be entered. 5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return to "25 mode menu screen."
1-21
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.6
I ADJUSTMENT
Data collection
B. Data collection confirmation method (1) Procedure
It is possible to confirm various data held in the machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data by the KRDS, list output and the mail remote notification system. A. Data that can be confirmed 1. Total count of each paper size 2. Copy count of each paper size 3. Print count of each paper size 4. RADF count 5. Page fill of each section 6. JAM data of time series 7. JAM count 8. Count of each copy mode Count of each copy mode (1) Count of each copy mode (2)
1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [4. Data collection] key. 3. "Data collection menu screen" Press the key of a data collection item that you want to confirm. To select any succeeding key to the key 11, press the arrow key. 4. "Individual data confirmation screen" Press the arrow key to scroll the screen. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to "25 mode menu screen."
9. SC count 10. JAM count of each section 11. SC count of each section Note: When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 6 to 11 can be confirmed. Note: The [Count reset] key is shown in the individual data confirmation screen of the [10. JAM count of each section] and the [11. SC count of each section]. When pressing the [COUNT RESET] key, "Count reset confirmation screen" is shown, and when pressing the [YES] key, the section data is reset. Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Individual data confirmation screen" with the interval data not reset. Reset these data while in the PM implementation to confirm the jam or SC occurrence count after it was visited last time.
1-22
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 C. Details of the data collection printer counts of each paper size NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 KRDS parameter (B1, B6, B8, BD, BE, BF) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Japan A2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11 Special For Inch 17 x 22 11 x 17 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11 5.5 x 8.5 A4 Special Metric A2 A3 B4 (8K) A4 B5 (16K) A5 F4 Special
25 MODE
Remark Not used
Maximum count: 99,999,999 1 count is made for paper of All types regardless of the paper size. All sheets of paper that do not come under the size of No. 1 to No. 9 are counted as special. However, SEL and LEF are counted as the same size. The non-standard and the wide paper are counted as special.
1-23
I ADJUSTMENT
(1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and
25 MODE (2) Data collection No. 4: RADF count
I ADJUSTMENT
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
KRDS parameter (F0) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D
Item No. of originals fed in ADF mode No. of originals fed in RADF mode No. of originals fed in RDH mode No. of originals fed in RRDH mode No. of originals fed in LDH mode No. of originals fed in CFF mode No. of 1 sided SDF original fed No. of mix originals fed in ADF mode No. of mix originals fed in RADF mode No. of originals fed in 2 in 1 mode No. of 1 sided z-folded original fed No. of 2 sided z-folded original fed No. of 2 sided SDF original fed
Remark
Not used
Not used
Not used
Maximum count: 99,999,999 (3) Data collection No. 5: Page fill of each section It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of 5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y, M, C and K. This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the dot area of pixels and the transfer paper area, and is different from the print ratio when actually printed. (4) Data collection No. 6: series With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm originating jam code, total count, date of occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size and magnification. JAM date of time
1-24
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (5) Data collection No. 7: Jam count / No. 10. JAM count of each section NO KRDS Parameter (J0) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F Jam code is shown on the LCD display when DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 J10-01 J10-02 J10-03 J11-01 J12-01 J13-01 J14-01 J17-01 J17-02 J17-03 J17-04 J17-05 J17-06 J17-07 J17-08 J17-09 J31-02 J32-08 J32-04 J32-01 J32-05 J32-07 J32-02 J32-03 J92-01 J93-01 J94-02 J19-01 J19-02 J51-01 J71-01 J71-02 Vertical conveyance LCT Main body FNS TU ADU Reversed paper exit Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 LCT Paper feed Section 33 34 By-pass 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 NO KRDS Parameter (J0) 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Jam code is shown on the LCD display when DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 J72-16 J72-17 J72-18 J72-19 J72-20 J72-21 J72-22 J72-23 J72-24 J72-25 J72-26 J72-28 J72-29 J72-30 J72-32 J72-33 J72-34 J72-35 J72-38 J72-39 J72-40 J72-41 J72-42 J72-43 J72-44 J72-45 J72-46 J72-47 J72-48 J72-49 J72-50 J72-51 J72-60 J72-61 J72-62 J72-63 J72-64 J72-80 J72-81 J72-82 J72-83 J72-90
25 MODE Section
FNS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
TU
PI Not used
PK Not used
FNS PI
Not used
PK FNS
1-25
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (J0) 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Jam code is shown on the LCD display when DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 J61-01 J61-02 J61-03 J62-01 J62-02 J62-03 J62-04 J62-05 J62-06 J62-07 J17-10 LCT Not used Section
I ADJUSTMENT
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
DF
Maximum count: 99,999,999
1-26
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (6) Data collection No. 8-1: Count of each copy mode (1)
25 MODE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A
1-1 mode 1-2 mode 2-1 mode 2-2 mode ADF 1-1 mode ADF 1-2 mode Mixed original mode Tab original mode Z-folded original mode LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Reg.) LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Reg.) LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Rev.) LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Rev.) Enhance Mode: text/photo Enhance Mode: Text Enhance Mode: Photo Enhance Mode: Map Non STD size 1 oblique staple(Upper left) 1 oblique staple(Upper right) 2 parallel staples(Left binding) 2 parallel staples(Upper binding) Left binding Right binding Upper binding Three-Folding Stapling & Folding Folding Main tray: Group Main tray: Sort Main tray: Non sort Subtray: Group (FACE DOWN) Subtray: Group (FACE UP) Subtray: Sort (FACE DOWN) Subtray: Sort (FACE UP) Subtray: Non sort (FACE DOWN) Subtray: Non sort (FACE UP) Cover sheet Trimmer Real size copy Preset magnification E4 Preset magnification E3 Preset magnification E2 1-27
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
KRDS Parameter (F1)
Item
Count conditions
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Item
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Count conditions
I ADJUSTMENT
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87
Preset magnification E1 Preset magnification R4 Preset magnification R3 Preset magnification R2 Preset magnification R1 User lens mode 1 User lens mode 2 User lens mode 3 Zoom Vertical/Hrizontal zoom Maximum zoom Minimum zoom APS AMS AE (AES) User density level 1 (Not used) User density level 2 (Not used) Interrupted copy Auto image rotaion cancellation Sheet insertion Chapter control Combination Booklet copy OHP interleave (copy) (Not used) OHP interleave (blank) (Not used) Image insert Book copy Program job Non-image area erase Reverse image Auto repeat Manual repeat STD size repeat Frame erasure Fold erasure Auto layout All-image area (Not used) Image Shift Reduction shift Overlay Water mark Stamp Date/Time Page
1-28
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Numbering Set quantity 1 Set quantity 2-5 Set quantity 6-10 Set quantity 11 or more Time while power remote 1 is ON Time while power remote 2 is ON Time while power remote 3 is ON Time while power remote 4 is ON Time during Low Power mode Time during warm up time Time during front door open Ope. Time in 1side straight exit Ope. Time in 1side reverse exit Operation time in 2 side print Operation time in ADF mode Morning Correction count (Not used) Time during APS sensor ON N of main tray used jobs N of subtray used jobs N of stapling & folding used jobs N of folding used jobs N of ADF NF occurred N of ADF special error1 occurred N of ADF special error2 occurred N of ADF special error3 occurred N of scanner scanned N of electrode cleaned (Not used) N of memory overflow N of fixing alarm occurred (Not used) N of no toner stop occurred (Not used) N of AGC retry (Not used) N of sub scan beam correct error (Not used) N of mis-centering correct error (Not used) Wrong detection of original size Next original information error Item Count conditions
25 MODE
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121
Accumulation of time during which the overall control board is powered Accumulation of time during which the remote power 1 is on (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the remote power 2 is on (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the built-in controller operates (in minutes) Accumulation of time in the low power mode (1 count for each minute) Accumulation of warm-up time (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the front door is open (in minutes) Accumulation of time from the start of print to the end of print (in minutes) Down time due to jam omitted Accumulation of time during which ADF operates (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the APS sensor is on (in minutes)
Error in size for which mixed paper is not allowed No. of scans in platen mode
1-29
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F Item
I ADJUSTMENT
122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160
N of distortion adjust error (Not used) N of ADF distortion data error (Not used) Compression memory overflow Page memory overflow (scan) Page memory overflow (print) FNS alarm (tray/trimming) FNS alarm (staple) N ofADF special error4 occurred (Not used) Store for HDD (Sync. With Copying) (Not used) Store for HDD (SRVmode Scan HDD) (Not used) Store for PC (SRVmode Scan PC) (Not used) Store for PC (SRVmode HDD PC) (Not used) Recall from HDD (SRVmode HDD) (Not used) Recall from PC (SRVmode PC) (Not used) Image edit count by SRV Wide paper count (A3W) or (11 x 17R) Wide paper count (A4W) or (8.5 x 11W) Wide paper count (A4WR) or (8.5 x 11RW) Wide paper count (A5W) or (5.5 x 8.5W) Wide paper count (Others) Punch Z-Folding (Not used) ADF original-thick MixPlex (1 side) MixPlex (2 side) ADF original-thin
Maximum count: 99,999,999 1-30
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (7) Data collection No. 8-2: Count of each copy mode (2)
25 MODE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A
ACS Full color Monochrome Mono color (Y) Mono color (M) Mono color (C) Mono color (R) Mono color (G) Mono color (B) DF thick paper DF thin paper Original type: Printed paper Original type: Photo paper Original type: Copied paper Original type: Inkjet paper Original type: Pencil Original type: Newspaper Screen : Line screen/Smooth tone Screen : Line screen/High resolution Screen : Dot screen/Smooth tone Screen : Dot screen/High resolution Screen : High compression Gloss mode Density shift Background adjustment Red adjust Green adjust Blue adjust Hue adjustment Saturation adjustment Brightness adjustment Color balance adjustment Sharpness adjustment Contrast adjustment Image judge adjustment Paper Type: Normal paper Paper Type: Recycle paper Paper Type: Color paper Paper Type: High quality paper Paper Type: Coated paper Paper Type: Tab paper Paper Type: Color specific paper Paper Type: Exclusive paper A 1-31
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
KRDS Parameter (F1)
Item
Count conditions
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F Item
I ADJUSTMENT
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Paper Type: Exclusive paper B Paper Type: Exclusive paper C Paper Type: Exclusive paper D Paper Weight: 1 Paper Weight: 2 Paper Weight: 3 Paper Weight: 4 Paper Weight: 5 Paper Weight: 6 Multi page enlargement Main Tray: Face up N of no toner stop occurred (Y) N of no toner stop occurred (M) N of no toner stop occurred (C) N of no toner stop occurred (K) N of toner recovery box is full N of color regist. auto. adj. N of auto stability control OFF mode time ON time of heater (Main body) ON time of heater (tray 4) Polygon motor operation time Develop motor ope. time (color) Develop motor ope. time (black) ON time of PCL (color) ON time of PCL (black) Operation time in Scanner motor Time while power (ADF) Sum of the OFF mode time (unit: minute) Sum of the time the heater is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the LCT heater is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the polygon motor is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the developing motor (color) operates (unit: minute) Sum of the time the developing motor (black) operates (unit: minute) Sum of the time the PCL (color) is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the PCL (black) is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the scanner motor operates (unit: minute) Sum of the time the 24V is applied to the ADF (unit: minute) Counts 1 per every correction operation Counts 1 per every correction operation
Maximum count: 99,999,999 1-32
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (8) Data collection No. 9: SC occurrence count/ No. 11: Sectional SC occurrence count NO KRDS Parameter (E0) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 SC code Section 36 37 SC10-10 SC13-01 SC13-02 SC18-01 SC18-02 SC18-03 SC18-04 SC18-50 SC18-51 SC18-60 SC18-61 SC18-70 SC18-71 SC20-10 SC20-11 SC20-12 SC21-01 SC21-02 SC21-03 SC21-04 SC23-01 SC23-02 SC23-03 SC23-04 SC23-05 SC23-06 SC23-07 SC23-08 SC23-09 SC23-10 SC23-11 SC27-01 SC27-02 SC27-03 SC27-04 Transfer belt section abnormality Toner supply abonormality L-detection abnormality L-detection abnormality 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 SC32-01 SC32-02 SC32-03 SC32-04 SC32-05 SC32-06 SC33-01 SC33-02 SC33-03 SC33-04 Drum motor abnormality Developing motor abnormality PCL abnormality Communication abnormality LT abnormality Communication abnormality Paper feed motor abnormality Paper feed tray abnormality 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 NO KRDS Parameter (E0) 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F SC code
25 MODE Section
SC28-01 SC28-02 SC28-03 SC28-04 SC29-01 SC29-02 SC29-03 SC29-04 SC29-06 SC29-07 SC29-08 SC29-09 SC29-10 SC29-11 SC29-12 SC29-13 SC29-14 SC29-15 SC29-16 SC29-17 SC29-18 SC29-19 SC29-20 SC29-21 SC29-22 SC29-23 SC30-01 SC30-02 SC30-10
High voltage abnormality
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Process abnormality
Communication abnormality Fan abnormality
Motor abnormality
1-33
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (E0) 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 SC code Section NO
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 KRDS Parameter (E0) 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D SC code Section
I ADJUSTMENT
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
SC34-01 SC34-02 SC34-03 SC34-04 SC34-05 SC34-06 SC34-07 SC34-08 SC35-01 SC35-02 SC35-03 SC35-04 SC35-05 SC35-06 SC36-02 SC36-04 SC36-05 SC36-06 SC36-07 SC36-08 SC36-09 SC36-10 SC36-11 SC36-12 SC38-02 SC38-03 SC39-01 SC41-01 SC41-02 SC41-03 SC41-04 SC41-05 SC41-06 SC41-07 SC41-08 SC41-09 SC41-10 SC41-11 SC42-01 SC42-02
High fixing temperature abnormality
115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122
SC45-01 SC45-03 SC45-07 SC45-08 SC45-09 SC45-10 SC45-11 SC45-12 SC45-20 SC46-01 SC46-02 SC46-03 SC46-05 SC46-06 SC46-07 SC46-08 SC46-09 SC46-11 SC46-12 SC46-13 SC46-14 SC46-15 SC46-16 SC46-17 SC46-18 SC46-19 SC46-21 SC46-23 SC46-24 SC46-25 SC46-26 SC46-31 SC46-32 SC46-35 SC46-40 SC46-41 SC46-42 SC46-43 SC46-58 SC46-59 SC46-62 SC46-63 SC46-64 SC46-66
Color registration abnormality
Low fixing temperature abnormality
123 124 125 126 127 128
Image processing abnormality
Fixing sensor abnormality
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141
Scanner abnormality Write abnormality
142 143 144 145 146 147
Scanner abnormality Write abnormality
148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158
Fan abnormality
1-34
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 NO KRDS Parameter (E0) 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 SC code Section NO KRDS Parameter (E0) C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE E0 E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE SC code
25 MODE Section
159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196
SC46-80 SC46-81 SC46-82 SC46-83 SC46-90 SC46-91 SC46-98 SC46-99 SC49-00 SC49-01 SC49-02 SC50-01 SC50-02 SC50-03 SC50-04 SC50-05 SC50-10 SC50-11 SC52-01 SC52-02 SC52-03 SC56-02 SC56-11 SC56-12 SC56-13 SC60-01 SC61-01 SC61-02 SC61-03 SC61-04 SC61-05 SC61-06 SC61-07 SC61-08 SC61-09 SC61-10 SC70-01 SC77-01
Image processing abnormality
197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204
SC77-02 SC77-03 SC77-04 SC77-05 SC77-06 SC77-07 SC77-08 SC77-11 SC77-12 SC77-13 SC77-14 SC77-21 SC77-22 SC77-25 SC77-26 SC77-31 SC77-32 SC77-33 SC77-34 SC77-35 SC77-36 SC37-37 SC77-41 SC77-42 SC77-43 SC77-44 SC77-45 SC77-46 SC77-47 SC77-52 SC77-53 SC77-54 SC77-55 SC77-56 SC77-57 SC77-81 SC77-91 SC77-92 SC77-98 SC77-99 SC80-01 SC80-02 SC80-03
FNS abnormality
Communication abnormality
205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214
TU abnormality
Fan abnormality
215 216 217
Operation board abnormality
218 219 220 221
PI abnormality
DF abnormality
222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
PK abnormality Not used PK abnormality Not used PK abnormality Not used
FNS abnormality
Communication abnormality
1-35
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (E0) EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF G0 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 GA GB GC SC code Section
I ADJUSTMENT
240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270
SC80-11 SC80-21 SC80-30 SC80-31 SC80-32 SC80-40 SC89-01 SC89-02 SC89-03 SC89-04
ISW abnormality
Main body abnormality
Maximum count: 99,999,999
1-36
25 MODE
6.7
Parts counter
I ADJUSTMENT
The following are conducted with respect to each replacement part: display of copy count used, resetting of count, setting of limit value, and new registration of replacement parts. The copy count by parts that need to be replaced includes the following: Count of special parts Count of each parts 6.7.1 Count of special parts When a periodically replaced part is replaced, reset the counter of the part that has been replaced. Display the name, part number and the copy count of a replacement part that has been registered, and reset the count. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Parts counter] key. 3. "Parts counter menu screen" Press the [1. Count of special parts] key. 4. "Parts counter (fixed) screen" Press the arrow key to select a part that you want to reset. 5. Press the [Count reset] key. 6. "Parts count reset screen" Press the [YES] key when resetting the part count. The part count is reset. Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Parts counter menu screen" with the part count not reset.
1-37
25 MODE B. Count of special parts list
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
KRDS Parameter (F1)
Parts name
P/N (Parts No.)
Count conditions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A
Toner collection box Ozone filter /1 (Right side) Deodorant filter (Rear side) Dust-proof filter /1 (Right side) Dust-proof filter /2 (Rear side) Charging dust proof filter Drum cartridge /Y Drum /Y Drum cleaning blade /Y Lubricant applying unit /Y Drum cartridge /M Drum /M Drum cleaning blade /M Lubricant applying unit /M Drum cartridge /C Drum /C Drum cleaning blade /C Lubricant applying unit /C Drum cartridge /K Drum /K Drum cleaning blade /K Lubricant applying unit /K Charging corona /Y Charging wire assy /Y Charging grid plate /Y Charging corona /M Charging wire assy /M Charging grid plate /M Charging corona /C Charging wire assy /C Charging grid plate /C Charging corona /K Charging wire assy /K Charging grid plate /K Transfer belt unit Transfer belt 1st transfer roller /Y 1st transfer roller /M 1st transfer roller /C
65AA-245 65AA1043 65AA1137 65AA1044 65AA-142 65AA-387 65AA-200 65AA-219 65AA2003 65AA-202 65AA-200 65AA-219 65AA2003 65AA-202 65AA-200 65AA-219 65AA2003 65AA-202 65AA-200 65AA-219 65AA2003 65AA-202 65AA-250 65AA-252 65AA2507 65AA-250 65AA-252 65AA2507 65AA-250 65AA-252 65AA2507 65AA-255 65AA-252 65AA2513 65AA-260 65AA2642 65AA2612 65AA2612 65AA2612 1-38
*1
*2
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 1st transfer roller /K 2nd transfer roller /U Transfer belt separation claw Tranfer belt cleaning unit Belt cleaning brush unit Toner collection sheet /1 Belt cleaning blade 2nd transfer roller /L Separation discharging unit Fixing cleaning unit Fixing roller /U Fixing roller /L Developer /Y (Page) Developer /Y (Page) Developer /C (Page) Developer /K (Page) Developing unit /Y Developing unit /M Developing unit /C Developing unit /K Developer /Y (Distance) Developer /M (Distance) Developer /C (Distance) Developer /K (Distance) FNS tray up/down motor FNS stapler /F 65AA-573 65AA5301 65AA5302 65AA3079 65AA3080 65AA3081 65AA3082 65AA-300 65AA-300 65AA-300 65AA-300 65AA3079 65AA3080 65AA3081 65AA3082 13QE-115 20AK4241 *1 *1 *2 *2 65AA2604 65AA2611 65AA-287 65AA-275 65AA-288 65AA-293 65AA2630 65AA4501 65AA-452 *1 Parts name P/N (Parts No.) Count conditions
25 MODE
Displays developing sleeve travel distance (in meters)
1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit 1 count for each 1 paper exit in staple mode 1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2-staple and the stitch-and-fold modes
71
46
FNS stapler /R
20AK4241
1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2-staple and the stitch-and-fold modes
72 73
47 48
FNS shift motor FNS exit opening motor
12QR-361 12QR-361
1 count for each paper exit at even number of copies in the sort mode 1 count for starting the job of "large size" (A4R/8.5 x 11R or larger) in the staple mode, and 1 count for each paper exit 1 count for starting each of the stitchand-fold and folding jobs
74
49
FNS folding knife motor
13QJ-502
1 count for each copy exit in each of the stitch-and-fold and folding and the threefolding modes
1-39
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F By-pass gate solenoid Tri-folding gate SD Pl conveyance clutch /U Pl feed roller /A /U Pl feed roller /B /U Pl reverse roller /U Pl torque limiter /U Pl conveyance clutch /L Pl feed roller /A /L Pl feed roller /B /L Pl reverse roller /L Pl torque limiter /L Trimmer blade PK punching unit (2 hole) PK punching unit (3 hole) PK punching unit (4 hole) ADF paper feed roller ADF feed roller ADF Dfeed prevention roller ADF exit solenoid 20AJ8251 12QR-263 12QR-263 13QN8201 50BA-574 50BA-575 13QN-443 13QN4073 13QN8201 50BA-574 50BA-575 13QN-443 13QN4073 Parts name P/N (Parts No.)
I ADJUSTMENT
1 count for each A4 / B5 / 8.5 x 11 / 16K copy exit in the staple mode 1 count for each copy exit in the threefolding mode 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand 1 count for each paper feed in PI lower stand
13LHK001/002 1 count for each cutter operation 14EA/14EF 14EB 14EE/14EG 13YH4064 13YH4039 13YH4066 Original passage count in all modes 1 count for each original passage in the double side copy mode and the mixing original mode Original passage count in all modes 1 count for each punch operation
97
60
ADF feed clutch
13TH8059
Single side copy mode: 1 count for each original Double side copy mode: 3 counts for each original
98
61
ADF reversal solenoid
20AJ8251
1 count for each original passage in the double side copy mode and the mixing original mode
99 100 101 102 103 104
62 63 64 65 66 67
Exposure ON time Sub power switch Door SW Toner supply door switch Main power SW
65AA8301 65AA8303 40AA8501 13GG-802 55GA8601
Accumulation of on-time (in : minute 1 count each time the main switch turns off the power 1 count each time the front door is opened 1 count each time the toner supply door is opened 1 count each time the reset switch turns off the power
1-40
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 Pl regist clutch Punch motor Paper exit roller /A Intermediate conveyance roller Stacking assist roller Fixing torque limiter Registration cleaning sheet 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 Ball bearing /U Heat insulating sleeve /U Intermediate convery. clutch /1 Intermediate convery. clutch /2 Intermediate convery. clutch /3 Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-1) Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-2) Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-3) Feed/Dfeed rubber (By-pass) Registration roller Separation claw solenoid Fixing upper lamp /1 Fixing upper lamp /2 Fixing lower lamp Fixing temp. sensor /3 Fixing temp. sensor /4 Paper feed roller (Tray-1) Paper feed roller (Tray-2) Paper feed roller ((Tray-3) Paper feed roller (By-pass) 45407504 45405339 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 25SA4096 25SA4096 25SA4096 25SA4096 65AA4601 26NA8251 65AA8303/ 65AF8303 65AA8304/ 65AF8304 65AA8305/ 65AF8305 65AA-553 65AA-554 56AA-458 56AA-458 56AA-458 65AA-520 20AK4210 65AA5365 65AA4609 13QN8202 54008004 122H4825 13QE4531 Parts name P/N (Parts No.) Count conditions
25 MODE
1 count each time PI feeds a sheet 1 count for each punch operation 1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit 1 count for each sheet in each of the FNS flat stapling, stitch-and-fold, folding and three-folding modes *1 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode *1 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 1 counts in the double side copy mode 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-pass tray 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 *1 65AA: For Japan and inch area 65EA: For metric area
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-pass tray
1-41
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO KRDS Parameter (F1) 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU pre-registration clutch Ball bearing /L Heat insulating sleeve /L Fixing drive gear Decurler roller 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 26NA5371 65AA5371 65AA7727 65AA4905 Parts name P/N (Parts No.)
I ADJUSTMENT
1 count for each paper exit in the double side copy mode (no count is made in the single side copy mode) *1
1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode
141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152
8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97
LCT paper feed roller LCT feed/Dfeed roller LCT feed clutch LCT pre-registration clutch Paper feed clutch (Tray-1) Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-1) Paper feed clutch (Tray-2) Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-2) Paper feed clutch (Tray-3) Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-3) Paper feed clutch (By-pass) Transfer earth plate unit
55VA-484 55VA-483 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8201 56AA8202 65AA-456
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the LCT
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-pass tray 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode
153 154 *1
98 99
Center fixing temp. sensor/U Center fixing temp. sensor/L
65AA8801 65AA8802
*1
Maximum count: 99,999,999 Count in all color modes 25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in the double side copy mode = 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the double side copy mode *2 Count only in full color or single color mode 25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in the double side copy mode = 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the double side copy mode
1-42
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 6.7.2 Count of each parts This is used when you want to control the part counter. Set the part name, part number and the limit value, and display and reset the copy count. Up to 30 data from No. 01 to No. 30 can be set. A count is taken for each passage of paper, regardless of the paper size. Reference: When the copy count is in excess of a limit value, an asterisk [*] is shown to the left of No. A. Setting of each replacement part and display of the copy count (1) Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Parts counter] key. 3. "Parts counter menu screen" Press the [2. Count of each parts] key. 4. "Copy count of each part screen" Press the arrow key to select a number you want to set or change. 5. Press one of the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and [Limit setting] key. 6. Press an item you want to set or change out of the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and [Limit setting] key, and enter it with the alphanumeric keys. [Part name setting]: Enter a part name (8 digits in alphanumeric) [P/N setting]: Enter a part number (9 digits in alphanumeric) [Limit setting]: Limit value (8 digits in numeric) 7. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
25 MODE B. Resetting of each replacement part
1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Parts counter] key. 3. "Parts counter menu screen" Press the [2. Count of each parts] key. 4. "Count of each part screen" Press the arrow key to select a number you want to set or change. 5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key. 6. "Parts count reset screen" Press the [YES] key when resetting a part count. This resets the part counter. Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Count of each part" with the part count not reset.
1-43
I ADJUSTMENT
(1) Procedure
25 MODE C. Relationship between each data No. and
I ADJUSTMENT
KRDS parameter NO PARTS NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Z4:00 Z4:01 Z4:02 Z4:03 Z4:04 Z4:05 Z4:06 Z4:07 Z4:08 Z4:09 Z4:0A Z4:0B Z4:0C Z4:0D Z4:0E Z4:0F Z4:10 Z4:11 Z4:12 Z4:13 Z4:14 Z4:15 Z4:16 Z4:17 Z4:18 Z4:19 Z4:1A Z4:1B Z4:1C Z4:1D P/N Z3:00 Z3:01 Z3:02 Z3:03 Z3:04 Z3:05 Z3:06 Z3:07 Z3:08 Z3:09 Z3:0A Z3:0B Z3:0C Z3:0D Z3:0E Z3:0F Z3:10 Z3:11 Z3:12 Z3:13 Z3:14 Z3:15 Z3:16 Z3:17 Z3:18 Z3:19 Z3:1A Z3:1B Z3:1C Z3:1D COUNT G0:00 G0:01 G0:02 G0:03 G0:04 G0:05 G0:06 G0:07 G0:08 G0:09 G0:0A G0:0B G0:0C G0:0D G0:0E G0:0F G0:10 G0:11 G0:12 G0:13 G0:14 G0:15 G0:16 G0:17 G0:18 G0:19 G0:1A G0:1B G0:1C G0:1D LIMIT H0:00 H0:01 H0:02 H0:03 H0:04 H0:05 H0:06 H0:07 H0:08 H0:09 H0:0A H0:0B H0:0C H0:0D H0:0E H0:0F H0:10 H0:11 H0:12 H0:13 H0:14 H0:15 H0:16 H0:17 H0:18 H0:19 H0:1A H0:1B H0:1C H0:1D
1-44
25 MODE
6.8
Password setting
6.9
Telephone number setting

I ADJUSTMENT
Set the following passwords. Key operator password (4 digits): Password used to enter the key operator mode. EKC master key code (8 digits): Password required when entering various EKC setting modes. Weekly timer password (4 digits): Password required when entering various weekly timer setting modes. Note: A password can be set only when the setting for use of the weekly timer is set to "Use" in the key operator mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [6. Password setting] key. 3. "Password setting mode screen" Press the key of an item you want to set. Key operator password (4 digits) EKC master key code (8 digits) Weekly timer password (4 digits) 4. Enter a new password through the numeric keys. 5. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
Set the customer support center telephone and FAX numbers that are used in an emergency for a service call and shown on the basic screen for help. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Telephone number setting] key. 3. "Customer support TEL/FAX setting screen" Press either of the [Service centre Telephone number (16 digits)] and [Service centre FAX number (16)] keys that you want to set. 4. Enter a TEL or FAX number through the numeric keys. 5. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
Note: When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure to use hyphens to fill up the blanks.
Note: Setting "0000" for the key operator password and the weekly timer password allows you to use each mode with no password.
1-45
25 MODE
6.10 M/C serial number setting

I ADJUSTMENT
Display and set the serial numbers of the main body and options. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [8. M/C serial number setting] key. 3. "Serial number setting mode screen" Press the key of an item you want to set and enter a serial number through the alphanumeric keys. 4. Press the [OK] key to update the data. 5. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
6.11 Indication of ROM version

Display the ROM version of the main body and options. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [9. Indication of ROM version] key. 3. "Indication of ROM version screen" Each ROM version is displayed. 4. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to "25 mode menu screen."
6.12 KRDS setting

See the "KRDS manual."
Note: The serial number of the main body cannot be changed.
6.13 ISW
See chapter "Service tools."
1-46
25 MODE
6.14 Setting date input

Set the starting date of the total counter that is displayed on the LCD in the P function. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [12.Setting date input] key. 3. "Setting date input screen" Enter an installation date through the numeric keys. 4. Press the [OK] key to update the data. 5. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
6.15 Board change mode

When changing any of the following four types of boards, be sure to set the serial number of the main body in this setting. OPERATION (operation board /1) OVERALL CB (overall control board) NVRAM (memory board) PRINTER (printer control board) Note: The number of boards that can be replaced at the same time is restricted only to two boards. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [13. Board change mode] key. 3. "Board change mode screen" Select a key of the board that you have replaced a part. 4. "Serial number input screen" Enter the serial number of the main body through the alphanumeric keys. 5. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
1-47
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7. 36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.2
Process adjustment
7.1
Setting method
Make various adjustments around the process. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment mode menu screen" For the process adjustment, there are the following items provided: [1. High voltage adjustment] [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] [3. Sensor output adjustment] [4. Exclusive paper setting] [5. Recall standard data] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Process adjustment menu screen."
This machine is provided with the 36 mode to make various adjustment in this mode. A. Procedure 1. With the reset switch (SW1) left ON, turn OFF the main switch (SW2). 2. Turn ON the SW2 while pressing the numeric buttons 3 and 6 at the same time. The "36 mode menu screen" is shown. At this point, the machine enters the 36 mode with the normal copy operation unavailable. 3. Press the item key on the liquid crystal display (LCD) to show a setting screen of each item. 4. Confirm the details of input in the setting screen of each item. 5. Turn OFF the SW2 to release the 36 mode. 6. New data will be effective after restarting.
1-48
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.2.1 High voltage adjustment For the high voltage adjustment, the following items are provided. However, be sure not to conduct a high voltage adjustment in the field. [1. 1st transfer manual adj.] [2. 2nd transfer manual adj.] [3. HV adjustment (Separation AC)] [4. HV adjustment (Separation DC)] [5. Pre-transfer guide HV check] 7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment Conduct the blade setting, charging potential correction, gamma, developer charge, L-detection adjustment and the initial drum rotation. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" For the drum peculiarity adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Blade setting mode] [2. Automatic drum potential adj.] [3. Automatic gamma adjustment] [4. LD bias adjustment] [5. Automatic developer charge] [6. L-detect initial auto. adj.] [7. Initial drum rotation] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen. a. Procedure (1) Blade setting mode
36 MODE
cleaning blade or the transfer belt. In this mode, apply toner onto the transfer belt then clean with the belt cleaning blade. This prevents the damages of the transfer belt and the belt cleaning blade.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press [1. Blade setting mode] key. 5. "Blade setting mode screen" Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 15 seconds and complete message is shown on the screen. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum pecuriality adjustment menu screen."
1-49
I ADJUSTMENT
Perform this adjustment when changing the belt
36 MODE (2) Automatic drum potential adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (3) Automatic gamma adjustment The gamma adjustment is performed automatically. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
I ADJUSTMENT
Measure the charging potential of each drum of Y, M, C and K to adjust automatically the developing bias value and the charging voltage. This adjustment is not necessary because of the automatic gamma adjustment contain this adjustment. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. Automatic gamma adjustment] key. 5. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0 screen" There are 8 kinds of the gamma adjustment (0 to 7). However, conduct "Gamma auto adjustment 0" in the field. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0": Perform the Dmax density adjustment, dot diameter adjustment, automatic drum potential adjustment, and the gamma adjustment. The developing bias value is shown for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M, C and K) with a complete message. Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 2.5 minutes and the developing bias value is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/ 2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen with a complete message. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum pecuriality adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum pecuriality adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press [2. Automatic drum potential adjustment] key. 5. "Automatic drum potential adjustment screen" Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 20 seconds and the charging potential is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/ 2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen, with an exit message shown. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum pecuriality adjustment menu screen."
1-50
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (4) LD bias adjustment Perform this adjustment when replacing the write unit. Note: Do not perform this adjustment except when replacing the write unit. a. Procedure
36 MODE 6. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1) screen" For the LD bias adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the arrow key to select the color of the write unit you just replaced. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/3)" "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/3)" "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/3)" "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/3)" 7. Enter the numeric value on the bar code labeled on the replacing write unit through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Note: Be sure to enter the same numeric value in LS 1/1, LS 1/2, and LS 1/3.
1. Read the numeric value on the bar code labeled [1] on the replacing write unit.
[1]
2. Enter the 36 mode. 3. "36 mode menu screen"
8050fs1025
8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 4. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 5. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [4. LD bias adjustment] key.
1-51
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (5) Automatic developer charge
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 3. Set the developer charging plate /L [2] to the shoulder screws [1] provided above the developing unit of a color the developer of which is changed.
I ADJUSTMENT
In this mode, after discharging developer from the developing unit manually, a new developer is automatically charged. Note: Do not open the upper cover of the developing unit. Otherwise, dust gets in the unit causing image failure. a. Procedure
[2]
[1]
1. Open the toner supply section. 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the developer charging plate [3] provided inside the toner supply section [2]. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the developer charging funnel /L [5].
[2]
[1]
[4] [2]
[3]
[5]
8050fs1002
[1]
8050fs1003
1-52
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 4. Set the developer charging funnel /L [2] to the developer charging plate [1]. Note: Be sure to attach the tip of the developer charging funnel /L [2] securely to the toner supply opening [3]. 7. "36 mode menu screen"
36 MODE
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 8. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 9. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Automatic developer charge] key.
[1]
10. "Automatic developer charge Y screen" Press the arrow key to select the color of developer you want to charge. For the automatic developer charge, the following items are provided: Automatic developer charge Y Automatic developer charge M Automatic developer charge C Automatic developer charge K 11. Press the [Start] key to introduce a new developer into the developer charging funnel /U.
[3]
[2]
8050fs1004
12. Make sure that the developer has been charged successfully before pressing the [CANCEL] key. 13. When charging another developer, repeat steps 3 to 11. 14. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum pecuriality adjustment menu screen." 15. Return the installed parts back to their original positions. Note: After completion of this adjustment, be sure to perform the L-detect initial auto. adjustment. If printing is started without performing the L-detect initial auto. adjustment, a proper image density cannot be obtained, thus resulting in the change of developer again.
5. Set the developer charging funnel /U [2] packaged together with developer to the developer charging funnel /L [1]. Note: The developer charge funnel /U [2] is packaged together with each developer. So, be sure to avoid its reuse.
[1]
6. Enter the 36 mode.
[2]
8050fs1005
1-53
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (6) L-detect initial automatic adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (7) Initial drum rotation When remove the drum cartridge, be sure to conduct this operation to securely set the drum coupling.
I ADJUSTMENT
Be sure to conduct this adjustment after a new developer is charged. Note: Do not print without conducting the L-detect initial auto. adjustment. Otherwise, a proper image density cannot be obtained, thus resulting in the change of developer again. a. Procedure
a.
Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [7. Initial drum rotation] key. 5. "Initial drum rotation screen" Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 10 seconds and complete message is shown on the screen. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum pecuriality adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [6. L-detect initial auto. adjustment] key. 5. "L-detect initial auto. adj. ALL screen" Press the arrow key to select the color of a developer that has been newly charged, and then press the [Start] key. For the L-detect initial auto. adj., the following items are provided: L-detect initial auto. adj. All: Conduct all colors of Y, M,C and K. L-detect initial auto. adj. YMC: Conduct Y, M and C only. L-detect initial auto. adj. K: Conduct K only. L-detect initial auto. adj. Y: Conduct Y only. L-detect initial auto. adj. M: Conduct M only. L-detect initial auto. adj. C: Conduct C only. 6. A message "Completed" is displayed. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum pecuriality adjustment menu screen."
1-54
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.2.3 Sensor output check For the sensor output check, the following items are provided; however, do not conduct them in the field: [1. Surface potential sensor output] [2. Max. density sensor output] [3. Gamma sensor output] 7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting
36 MODE
This setting is used when the user cannot obtain the satisfactory results of transfer, separation or fixing with the standard setting due to a special paper being used. This setting is applicable when [Exclusive paper A to D] is selected in the key operator mode [Paper type/ Special paper size set]. In default, the following paper data is entered for each destination area. For Japan: 80g/m2 color specified paper For inch area: 105g/m2 color specified paper For metric area: 90g/m2 color specified paper Note: When setting data, be sure to follow the instructions given by Konica Technology Support Center. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [4. Exclusive paper setting] key. 4. "User paper setting menu screen" For the user paper setting menu, the following items are provided which correspond to the setting key of the same name in the key operator mode. [1. Exclusive paper A setting] [2. Exclusive paper B setting] [3. Exclusive paper C setting] [4. Exclusive paper D setting]
1-55
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 5. For setting, press the key of an item you want
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.2.5 Recall standard data Reset the adjusted set values of process adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data) Note: Data for automatic drum potential, automatic gamma, L-detect initial auto. and exclusive paper setting adjustment cannot be reset to the standard data. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Recall standard data] key. 4. "Recall standard data: Process adjustment screen" Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard data. Pressing the [NO] key or the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Process adjustment menu screen" without recalling the standard data.
I ADJUSTMENT
to set. Set the following 12 types of setting for each exclusive paper A to D. 2nd transfer offset Side 1 2nd transfer offset Side 2 2nd separation AC offset Side 1 2nd separation AC offset Side 2 2nd separation DC offset Side 1 2nd separation DC offset Side 2 Fixing (U) roller temp (idle) Fixing (U) roller temp (print) Fixing (L) roller temp (idle) Fixing (L) roller temp (print) Fixing (U and L) roller temp. difference Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width <261mm Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width >=261mm Line speed 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "User paper setting menu screen."
1-56
36 MODE 7.3.1 Magnification adjustment Adjust various magnifications. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" For the magnification adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer vertical mag.adj.] [2. Printer horizontal mag.adj.] [3. Scanner vertical mag.adj.] [4. Belt line speed adjustment] [5. Fixing line speed adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
7.3
Image adjustment
Conduct various image adjustments. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" For the image adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Magnification adjustment] [2. Timing adjustment] [3. RADF adjustment] [4. Centring adjustment] [5. Non-image area erase check] [6. Recall standard data] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Image adjustment menu screen."
1-57
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1mm against 205.7 mm
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer system. This adjustment changes the line speed of the registration roller, drum, transfer belt and the fixing. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the following two methods are available. Be sure to take care when an adjustment is made. (1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to the wear of the registration roller or the heat shrinkage of paper. (2) Belt line speed adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to causes other than the above. In default, the printer vertical magnification adjustment on side 2 is not reflected to the image. When adjusting the vertical magnification on side 2, use the memory switch in the key operator mode to turn ON side 2 drum clock adjustment mode. However, since the line speed is switched for each image creation process on side 1 and side 2, the print speed is reduced to about 1/4. a. Procedure
205.7 1
8050fs1006
8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Printer screen" For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment": Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the same time. Setting range: -300 to +300, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 2 offset (ADU)": Tray 2 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 3 offset (ADU)": Tray 3 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Back tray 4 offset": LCT side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. vertical magnification adjustment
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Printer vertical mag. adj.] key. 5. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
1-58
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
36 MODE 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment screen" For the printer horizontal magnification adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment": Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the same time. Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 2 offset (ADU)": Tray 2 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 3 offset (ADU)": Tray 3 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 4 offset (ADU)": LCT side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
(2) Printer horizontal magnification adjustment Adjust the horizontal magnification of the printer system. This adjustment changes the horizontal magnification in image processing prior to the laser exposure. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Printer horizontal magnification adjustment] key. 5. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 7. Measure the horizontal magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1mm against 190mm
190
8050fs1007
1-59
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (3) Scanner vertical magnification adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the vertical magnification of the scanner system. This adjustment changes the scan speed. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
(4) Belt line speed adjustment Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer system. This adjustment charges line speed of the transfer belt. Note: For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the following two methods are available. Be sure to take care when an adjustment is made. (1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to the wear of the registration roller or the heat shrinkage of paper. (2) Belt line speed adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to causes other than the above. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. Scanner vertical mag. adj.] key. 5. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1mm against 200mm
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
200
8050fs1008
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [4. Belt line speed adjustment] key. 5. "Belt line speed adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
8. When the value is not within to the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.05% 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value can be obtained.
1-60
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1mm against 205.7 mm (5) Fixing line speed adjustment
36 MODE
belt, use this adjustment method to adjust the fixing roller line speed. When the fixing line speed is faster than the transfer belt, this results in an increased vertical magnification or transfer jittering. And when the fixing line speed is slower than the transfer belt, this results in the trailing edge of the image will be soiled. Note:
205.7 1
8050fs1006
When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper for fixing speed adjustment" (P/N 65AA-991*). Otherwise, the fixing line speed cannot be accurately adjusted. a. Procedure
8. If the specification is not satisfied, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Belt line speed adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value can be obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Fixing line speed adjustment] key. 5. "Set the cyan density screen" Press the [DENSITY] key. 6. With the fixing adjustment paper set to the bypass tray, press the START button to output a test pattern. Based on a cyan half-tone, a test pattern is output. Note: When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper for fixing speed adjustment." Otherwise, it cannot be accurately adjusted.
1-61
I ADJUSTMENT
When replacing the fixing roller/U, /L and transfer
36 MODE 7. Compare the fixing adjustment density patches
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 16. Comparing the output image on the first sheet with the remaining 7 output sheets, find out an output sheet in which the distance between the magenta line at the lead edge and the first black line at the trail edge (10 lines at intervals of 1mm) gets 1mm stretched.
I ADJUSTMENT
(upper and lower limit samples of density that are packed with the "paper for fixing speed adjustment") with the cyan density of the outputed paper, and check to see if the cyan density of the output paper is within the limit of the fixing density standard patches. 8. When it is not within the limit, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Set the cyan density screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: 0 to 255 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the density ges inside the limit. 11. "Set the cyan density screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key. 12. "Push [Sample] and print 8 sheets screen" Press the [8 SAMPLES] key. 13. With 8 sheets of the fixing adjustment paper set to the by-pass tray, press the START button to output a test pattern. Note: Be sure to conduct this operation with the copy count set to 1. 14. With the image formation line speed variable automatically at intervals of about 25 seconds, 8 sheets of test patterns based on cyan halftone are output. 15. With a pen, write serial numbers from 1 to 8 on the output sheets in order of the paper exit (bottom to top).
8050fs1009
Note: The image does not stretch gradually for each output sheet. It suddenly stretches at a certain sheet. Therefore, be sure to measure each sheet in order of output. 17. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 18. "Set the cyan density screen" Enter the number of the output sheet that stretches 1mm through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 19. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
1-62
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.3.2 Timing adjustment Adjust various timings. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" For the timing adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] [2. Printer registration loop adj.] [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] [6. RADF registration loop adj.] [7. Writing unit skew initial adj.] [8. Auto. color registration adj.] [9. Color registration manual adj.] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Timing adjustment menu screen." a. Procedure
36 MODE (1) Printer lead edge timing adjustment This adjustment changes the paper restart timing from the registration roller. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Be sure the printer vertical magnification has been adjusted.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] key.
1-63
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the lead edge timing.
36 MODE 5. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1) screen"
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 9. Measure the lead edge timing with a scale. Standard value: 20mm 0.5mm
I ADJUSTMENT
For the printer lead edge timing adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1)" "Lead edge timing (Tray 2)" "Lead edge timing (Tray 3)" "Lead edge timing (Bypass)" "Lead edge timing (Tray 4)" "Lead edge timing (ADU)" "Tray large size normal paper offset" "Tray large size thick paper offset" "Tray small size normal paper offset" "Tray small size thick paper offset" "Bypass large size normal paper offset" "Bypass large size thick paper offset" "Bypass small size normal paper offset" "Bypass small size thick paper offset" "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Large size thick paper offse (ADU)" "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)" Note: Large size: 300mm or more in length in the paper feed direction Small sise: 300mm or less in length in the paper feed direction Thick Paper: 106g/m2 or more 6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Set the copy setting according to the item adjusted and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS
20
8050fs1010
10. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 11. "Printer lead edge timing screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.1mm 12. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
(2) Printer registration loop adjustment Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer registration loop adj.] key.
1-64
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 5. "Printer registration loop adjustment screen (Tray 1)" For the printer registration loop adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 2 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 2 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 3 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 3 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Bypass L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Bypass S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 4 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 4 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Thick)" Note: Large size: 300mm or more in length in the paper feed direction Small size: 300mm or less in length in the paper feed direction Thick Paper: 106g/m2 or more 6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Set the copy according to the item that has been adjusted and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 9. If the printer registration loop amount is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. "Printer registration loop adj. screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1mm 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. (3) Printer pre-registration adjustment
36 MODE 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
Adjust the paper loop amount in each tray and the ADU pre-registration roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-registration section. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] key. 5. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen (Tray 1)" For the printer pre-registration adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 1)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 2)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 3)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 4)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (ADU)" 6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 9. When the printer pre-registration amount is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button.
1-65
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 10. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen"
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (5) Scanner re-start timing adjustment Adjust re-start timing of original scanning. In this adjustment, the starting position for reading while in the original scanning mode is adjusted. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Make sure that the printer timing adjustment has been completed.
I ADJUSTMENT
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1mm 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
(4) Printer erasure amount adjustment Conduct an erasure amount adjustment. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.
a.
Procedure
a.
Procedure
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] key. 5. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] key. 5. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Check the scanner re-start timing.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Check the printer erasure amount. Standard value: 3mm or less 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -20 to +40, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
Standard value: 3mm or less 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -10 to +20, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
1-66
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (6) RADF registration loop adjustment Adjust the original loop amount in the RADF registration roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: a. Procedure
36 MODE (7) Writing unit skew initial adjustment main scan of a new write unit (Y, M and C only) in the memory board (MB). The data is updated automatically by the auto. color registration adjustment.
When any of the write units Y, M and C is replaced, be sure to start the main body in the 36 mode for this adjustment. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [6. RADF registration loop adj.] key. 5. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. If the RADF registration loop amount is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -7 to +7, 1 step = 0.5mm 9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the standard value is obtained. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" Press the [7. Writing unit skew initial adj.] key. 5. "Writing unit skew int. adj. screen" Press the [Start] key. 6. Adjustment starts for all the write units Y, M and C at the same time, and a message "Complete" is shown in about a minute. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
1-67
I ADJUSTMENT
Store a skew correction position data along the
36 MODE (8) Auto. color registration adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7. "Color registration adj. screen" When pressing the [LIST] key, the main scan, sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the skew of Y, M and C compared based on K after adjustment are shown. 8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
I ADJUSTMENT
Make this adjustment when there is a color registration error. The main scan, sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the skew of color registration error are automatically adjusted. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: This auto. color registration adjustment has a larger correction area than that of the color registration auto correction in the user mode. So, be sure to perform this adjustment when a SC45-20 occurs. a. Procedure
(9) Color registration manual adjustment (partial horizontal adjustment) With respect to the main scan, entire horizontal magnification, partial horizontal magnification, subscan, inclination and the scan inclination, the registration error amount of Y, M and C compared based on K is shown on the operation panel. The partial horizontal magnification that cannot be corrected automatically is manually adjusted. Note: Be sure that the printer vertical and horizontal magnifications have been complete. Make sure that the auto. color registration adjustment has been completed. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" Press the [8. Auto. color registration adj.] key. 5. "Color registration adj. screen" Press the [Start] key. 6. The color registration adjustment starts and a message "Complete" is shown in about 2 minutes. When the error message appears, perform an error correction referring to the below. Error 1: It does not converge within the standard value. The patch density may be too light. Check around the drum unit and perform the gamma automatic adjustment (0). Then perform this adjustment. Error 2: The difference of the color registration is too much. Error 3: The other error SC other than the color registration automatic adjustment may occur. Restart the main body in the normal mode to check for SC code. 1-68
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [9. Color registration manual adj.] key. 5. "Color registration manual adj. screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern. Place the test pattern [1] outputted securely against the original positioning plate /L [2] and the original positioning plate /R [3] to set it to the original glass, and close the DF or platen cover. Note: When setting the test pattern to the original glass, be sure to take check of the setting direction and position. Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C, K) in the [Test pattern density setting] of 36 mode is set to 255. If not, it results in an error.
36 MODE 10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the items. When any item is not within the standard, an error code is displayed for each cause together with an NG. Make an error correction referring to the below: When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan", "Mag(ALL)", "SubScan" or "Incline," perform the auto. color registration adjustment again. Error 1: A chart pattern cannot be detected. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is upside down. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected. A different type of chart. Error 4: Adjustment is impossible. Software bugged. Error 5: Not within the standard value. Re-adjust it. Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality. Check the installation of memory board. Error 7: Memory other than those specified is accessed. Software bugged. Error 8: Memory related error. Software bugged. Error 9: Program error. Software bugged. Error 10: The chart is skew. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 11: Image header information read error. Software bugged. Error 12: An argument set error. Software bugged. Error 13: A measurement error. Improper positioning of the chart, or a defective chart.
[3] [2]
[1]
8050fs1011
7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Color registration manual adj. screen" Press the [SCAN] key to scan the test pattern. 9. The amount of error of the "MainScan" (main scan), "Mag(ALL)" (entire horizontal magnification), "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnification), "SubScan" (sub-scan), "Incline" (inclination) and the "ScanBend" (scan incline) of Y, M and C are compared based on K and result are shown at "Rest" section on the operation panel (unit is pixel).
1-69
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 11. When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan",
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 14. Repeat steps 4 to 13 until "OK" is displayed. 15. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
I ADJUSTMENT
"Mag(ALL)" or "Mag(PART)," open the toner supply section and loosen 2 screws [1] provided near the developing unit of a color from which an "NG" is displayed. Then, slide the adjustment plate [2] up and down to adjust the partial horizontal magnification. Moving the adjustment plate [2] upward increases the partial horizontal magnification data (plus) and moving the plate downward reduces it (minus). Adjustment target Move the adjustment plate [2] by referring to the "Rest" of "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnification) (unit: pixel) displayed at the operation panel. The scale [3] that moves together with the adjustment plate [2] changes about 0.5 pixel per notch.
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1012
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment menu screen." 13. Conduct the color registration adjustment referring to (8) Auto. color registration adjustment.
1-70
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.3.3 RADF adjustment Conduct the original size adjustment, original stop position adjustment and the sensor adjustment of the RADF. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" For the RADF adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. RADF original size adjustment] [2. RADF orig. stop position adj.] [3. RADF sensor adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."
36 MODE 5. "RADF original size adjustment (A4) or (8.5 x 11) screen" With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11 (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF, press the [Start] key. 6. After confirmation of a message "Complete," press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key. 7. "RADF original size adjustment (A5R) or (5.5 x 8.5R) screen" With the A5R (for metric machine) or 5.5 x 8.5R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF, press the [Start] key. 8. After confirmation of a message "Complete," press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key. 9. "RADF original size adjustment (A4R) or (8.5 x 11R) screen" With the A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF, press the [Start] key. 10. After confirmation of a message "Complete," press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 11. Make sure that the RADF original size is properly detected.
(1) RADF original size adjustment Conduct this adjustment when the RADF original size is not properly detected. a. Procedure
12. Press the C button while pressing P button. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. RADF original size adjustment] key.
1-71
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (2) RADF original stop position adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
I ADJUSTMENT
Conduct the original stop position leading edge timing (leading edge timing) adjustment of the RADF. Note: Make sure that the printer lead edge timing adjustment and the scanner re-start timing adjustment have been completed. a. Procedure
to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
(3) RADF sensor adjustment Conduct this adjustment when malfunction occurs in the reflective type sensors. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key.
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. RADF orig. stop position ] key.
Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen"
5. "Front plain paper/thick paper screen" For the RADF orig. stop position adj., the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. [Normal & Thick paper (Front side)] [Thin paper (Front side)] [Normal & Thick paper (Back side)] [Thin paper (Back side)] 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. With the original setting set to the copy mode according to an item you want to adjust, set the test chart to the RADF. And select the A3 paper and press the START button. 8. Check the RADF leading edge timing. Standard value: 3mm or less 9. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -14 to +14, 1 step = 0.5mm
Press the [3. RADF sensor adjustment ] key. 5. "RADF sensor adjustment screen" Close the RADF and press the [Start] key. The sensitivity of the RADF sensors are automatically adjusted. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
1-72
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.3.4 Centring adjustment Adjust the mis-centering of images vertical to the paper feed direction. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. 4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen" For the centering adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer centring adjustment] [2. Scanner centring adjustment] [3. RADF centring adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
36 MODE 4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Printer centring adjustment] key. 5. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1) screen" For the printer centering adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1)" "Printer centring adj. (Tray 2)" "Printer centring adj. (Tray 3)" "Printer centring adj. (Bypass)" "Printer centring adj. (Tray 4)" "Printer centring adj. (ADU)" "Large size offset (Tray 1)" "Small size offset (Tray 1)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 1)" "Large size offset (Tray 2)" "Small size offset (Tray 2)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 2)" "Large size offset (Tray 3)" "Small size offset (Tray 3)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 3)" "Large size offset (Bypass)" "Small size offset (Bypass)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Bypass)"
(1) Printer centring adjustment This adjustment changes the laser writing start timing. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Be sure that the printer horizontal magnification has been completed.
"Large size offset (Tray 4)" "Small size offset (Tray 4)" "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)" "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)" "8.5 x 5.5 normal paper offset (ADU)" "8.5 x 5.5 thick paper offset (ADU)" Note:
a.
Procedure
Large size: 300mm or more in length in the paper feed direction Small size: 300mm or less in length in the paper feed direction Thick Paper: 106g/m2 or more 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
1-73
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7. Select the paper size and the type of paper
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Scanner centring adjustment] key. 5. "Scanner (platen) centring adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed direction and check the amount of error of the lines on both sides. Standard value: Within 2mm 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -30 to +30, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained.
I ADJUSTMENT
according to an item you want to adjust, and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 8. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed direction and check the amount of error of the lines on both sides. Standard value: Within 2mm 9. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.1mm 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
(2) Scanner centring adjustment Adjust the centring when scanning the platen original. This adjustment changes the reading timing of the CCD. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Make sure that the printer centering adjustment has been completed. a. Procedure
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
(3) RADF centring adjustment Adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF original. This adjustment changes the reading timing of the CCD. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Make sure that the printer centering and scanner centring adjustment has been completed.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
1-74
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 a. Procedure 7.3.5 Non-image area erase check
36 MODE
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. 4. "Centring adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. RADF centring adjustment] key. 5. "RADF centring adjustment (Front) screen" For the RADF centering adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "RADF centring adjustment (Front)" "RADF centring adjustment (Back)" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed direction and check the amount of error of the lines on both sides. Standard value: Within 2mm 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -30 to +30, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
When installing the copier or moving its installation location, check to see if the "non-image area erase" function of the copy application functions works satisfactorily. Preparations made in advance: Open fully the RADF or platen cover. There should not be anything on the original glass. Clean the original glass. A. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Non-image area erase check] key. 4. "Non-image area erase check screen" Press the [Start] key. 5. Make sure that a message "Normal adjustment selected ..." is shown on the operation panel. When a message "Does not function satisfactorily ..." is shown, refer to "B. Error message and Handling," to conduct the non-image area erase check again. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image adjustment menu screen."
1-75
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE B. Error message and Handling
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.3.6 Recall standard data Reset the adjustment values of image adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data) Note:
I ADJUSTMENT
If the error is detected while perform the "non-image area erase check" mode, following error message will be displayed on the operation panel. (1) Error message 1 Adjust for Moderate Brightness. The Non-image area erase function may not operate correctly with dark (density) originals. Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns of Service Handbook. Handling 1 When the "non-image area erase" function is not used very frequently, or when copy originals that have a dark background are not copied very frequently in the "non-image area erase," the copier can be used in the current installation location. However, when copy originals that have a dark background are frequently copied, install the copier in a location or in a direction where less external light get in (darker) than the present installation location, and check the "non-image area erase check mode" again. (2) Error message 2 Adjust for Extreme Brightness. In many case, the non-image area erase function will not operate correctly. Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns of Service Handbook. Handling 2 When the "non-image area erase" function is not used very frequently, the copier can be used in the current installation location. However, the outsideoriginal erasure function is frequently used, install the copier in a location or in a direction where less external light get in (darker) than the present installation location, and check the "non-image area erase check mode" again. At this time, when there is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light installed directly above the copier, reconsider the installation location or direction, or take some measures to shield the light source and check the "nonimage area erase check mode" again. 1-76
Data for the printer vertical magnification, RADF registration loop, auto. color registration, color registration manual, RADF original size, RADF original stop position and RADF sensor adjustment cannot be reset to standard data. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Recall standard data] key. 4. "Recall standard data (image adjustment data) screen" Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard data. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Image adjustment menu screen" without recalling the standard data.
36 MODE 7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner. When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usually conduct the printer gamma correction. When changing the CCD unit, exposure lamp (L1), original glass or each scanner mirror, conduct this adjustment. Note: Scanner gamma has been adjusted for each machine. Please be noted that the scanner gamma data is rewritten to the mean value if the [Adj. data reset] key in the "Scanner gamma adjustment screen" is pressed. A. Procedure 1. After replacing a part, place a test chart on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the START button. 2. Check for the foggy background or color balance. 3. If there is abnormality, enter the 36 mode. 4. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 5. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] key. 6. "Scanner gamma adjustment screen" Press the [Adj. data reset] key. Press the [YES] key when rewriting the scanner gamma mean value. Press the [NO] to return to the "Scanner gamma adjustment screen" without rewriting. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
7.4
Image quality adjustment
Conduct various image quality adjustments. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" For the image quality adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] [2. Printer gamma adjustment] [3. Sharpness adjustment] [4. Contrast adjustment] [5. Image judge adjustment] [6. ACS adjustment] [7. Density adjustment] [8. Tone adjustment] [9. Recall standard data] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1-77
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (1) Printer gamma offset adjustment Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduction varies with copy modes to correct the gradation in a high light density section and adjust the density in the background.
I ADJUSTMENT
When the color reproduction is in poor condition, conduct this adjustment to correct gradation. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. For the printer gamma adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of adjustment screen to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen."
Note: For the printer gamma offset adjustment, adjustment methods of 0 to 5 are available for each screen type. It is possible to divide the gradation in 256 into 6 parts of 0 to 5 and adjust the entire ranges from "0: Low density section" to "5: High density section." In default, adjustment is limited only to "0 (low density section)." When setting DIPSW 28-4 to 1, adjustment can be made on the entire ranges of 0 to 5. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] key.
1-78
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 5. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0) screen" For the printer gamma offset adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS150) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS200) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS150) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-8) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-2) (0 to 5)" The following shows the copy mode to which each adjustment is reflected. (LS200): Line screen/High resolution (LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone (DS200): Dot screen/High resolution (DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone (ED-8): Text section to be used together with the screens above. (ED-2): High compression 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray and press the START button to print a test pattern. 8. Check the test pattern that has been outputted. Make sure that the high light density starting section of C and K is uniform, and even between the gray reference lines [1].
36 MODE 9. When they are not even, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. "Printer gamma offset adjustment screen" Press the key of a color (C or K) you want to adjust, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker) Note: There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3] provided for each line speed. Be sure to use the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into keys [1/2] and [1/3]. 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. 12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1] created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is the same.
Y M C K
[1] [6]
[1]
Y M C K
[5] [4] [2]
[3]
8050fs1016
8050fs1015
1-79
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 13. When the gray balance is not the same, press
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (2) Printer gamma sensor adjustment When a poor color reproduction results even after the automatic gamma adjustment, conduct this adjustment to correct gradation. The printer gamma correction that is carried out automatically and periodically uses a gamma sensor to read patterns on the transfer belt. So, there is a possibility of the gamma sensor not being accurately adjusted due to the change in characteristic of the gamma sensor. This adjustment use the scanner to correct the gamma sensor for accurate printer gamma adjustment. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
I ADJUSTMENT
the key of a color (Y or M) you want to adjust, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker) Note: There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3] provided for each line speed. Be sure to use the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into keys [1/2] and [1/3]. How to match the gray balance Take notice of the gray patches [4] made up of 49 colors of C, M and Y. In the 49 patches, M gets darker as going right to left. And Y gets darker as going down from up. However, C is fixed. The patch [5] at the center is the same color as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positioned at the four corners of the patch [5] is the same color as the gray [3]. Out of the 49 patches, select a gray of the same gray balance as the gray [6]. e.g.) When a patch on the lower right side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the positive direction. When a patch on the upper left side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the negative direction. 14. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 15. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray and press the START button to print a test pattern. 16. Repeat steps 13 to 15 until you can get a satisfactory result. 17. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] key.
1-80
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 5. "Printer gamma sensor adj. (LS200) screen" For the printer gamma sensor adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS200)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS150)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS200)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS150)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (CONTONE)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (ED)" The following shows the copy mode to which each adjustment is reflected: (LS200): Line screen/High resolution (LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone (DS200): Dot screen/High resolution (DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone (CONTONE): Text section with to the be used together above. (ED): High compression Note: A screen in which the screen selection is turned off by the key operator mode-memory switch is not displayed. 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11 (for inch machine) paper set in the by-pass tray, press the START button to output a test pattern. screens 8. "Please load output paper ... screen"
36 MODE
After completion of the test pattern output, the display returns automatically to the adjustment scren. With the green triangular mark [2] of the outputted test pattern [1] pressed securely against the original positioning plate /L [3] and the original positioning plate /R [4], set it to the original glass.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1017
9. With 10 sheets of copy paper (white) placed on the test chart, close the RADF or platen cover. Note: Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gradation cannot be corrected properly. 10. Press the [Start] key. Note: Start cannot be made when paper is not set in the by-pass tray. 11. When the chart is scanned with no problem found, the gamma sensor is adjusted, the printer gamma correction is made and a message "Complete" is displayed.
1-81
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 12. If any trouble should be found, an error code is
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 13. "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen" Press the [Adj. data reset] key if you want to return to the factory default data. Press the [YES] key to reset the adjusted printer gamma sensor data and return to the factory default data. Press the [NO] key to return to the "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen" without data reset. 14. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen."
I ADJUSTMENT
displayed for each cause. Repair the error referring to the below. Error 1: Improper positioning of the chart. Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is upside down. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected. A different type of chart. Error 4: Adjustment is impossible. Software bugged. Error 5: Not within the standard value. Re-adjust it. Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality. Check the installation of memory board. Error 7: Memory other than those specified is accessed. Software bugged. Error 8: Memory related error. Software bugged. Error 9: Program errorSoftware bugged. Error 10: The chart is skew. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 11: Image header information read error. Software bugged. Error 12: RGB data abnormality. Chart is wrong, or software is bugged. Error 13: Argument set error. Software bugged. Error 31: Sensor value abnormality - Re-adjust it. Error 51: Regression calculation abnormality Re-adjust it. Error 52: Array number overflow - Software bugged. Error 53: Regression order abnormality - Software bugged. Error 54: Selected screen information abnormality - Software bugged. Error 55: Color information abnormality - Software bugged.
(3) Printer screen gradation adjustment Adjust a tone jump (in which gradation is not continuous). a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] key. 5. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y) screen" For the printer screen gradation adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y)" "Printer screen gradation adj. (M)" "Printer screen gradation adj. (C)" "Printer screen gradation adj. (K)" 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. Set the A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray and press the START button to output a test pattern.
1-82
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 8. Five sheets of test pattern are automatically outputted. Check them to see if there is a tone jump found in them. 9. When a tone jump is found in them, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. "Printer screen gradation adj." Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a color in which a tone jump has occurred. 11. Enter one less numeric value than the current and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -3 to +1 12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the tone jump disappears. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen." 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" 7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment
36 MODE
Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is carried out when moire reproduced. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the sharpness adjustment in the user mode. A. Procedure
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [3. Sharpness adjustment] key. 4. "Sharpness adjustment menu screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 6. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 7. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/ more moire) 8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable. 9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1-83
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.4.4 Contrast adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.4.5 Image judge adjustment Adjust the threshold value of the original image judgement. A. Procedure
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the contrast. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the contrast adjustment in the user mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [4. Contrast adjustment] key. 4. "Contrast adjustment menu screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 6. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 7. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (contrast increased) to +5 (contrast reduced) 8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable. 9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen" For the image judge adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Dot detect adjustment] [2. Color text adjustment] [3. Dot/Text area adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen."
(1) Dot detect adjustment Adjust the dot discrimination threshold value of the original image. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Dot detect adjustment] key. 5. "Dot detect adjustment R screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
1-84
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. A dot detection pattern is outputted. This output pattern shows how the original image is discriminated as an image. Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot. White section: Discriminated as a picture. Black section: Discriminated as a black text. Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Dot detect adjustment R screen" For the dot detection adjustment, the following items are provided: [Dot detect adjustment R] [Dot detect adjustment G] [Dot detect adjustment B] 10. Select a color you want to adjust as necessary, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (dot area reduced) to +5 (dot area increased) 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until it becomes suitable. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen." 5. "Color text screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. a. Procedure (2) Color text adjustment of the original image.
36 MODE
Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the color text adjustment in the user mode.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Color text adjustment] key.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. A color text detection pattern is outputted. This output pattern shows how the original image is discriminated as an image. Black section: Discriminated as a black text. Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Color text screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (color text area reduced) to +5 (color text area increased) 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until it becomes suitable. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
1-85
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color text discrimination threshold value
36 MODE (3) Dot/Text area adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.4.6 ACS adjustment Conduct this adjustment when the ACS (Auto color selection) does not function properly. A. Procedure
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the dot discrimination and text discrimination threshold values of the original image. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the letter adjustment in the user mode. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen" Press the [6. ACS adjustment] key. 4. "Set the chart and push [SCAN] screen" With an original in which the ACS does not function properly set to the original glass, press the [SCAN] key. 5. In the "JUDGE," the result of the ACS is shown as "COLOR" or "MONOCHROME." 6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (MONOCHROME) to +5 (COLOR) 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until it becomes suitable. 8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Dot/Text adjustment] key. 5. "Dot/Text adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. A dot and text detection pattern is outputted. This output pattern shows how the original image is discriminated as an image. Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot. White section: Discriminated as a picture. Black section: Discriminated as a black text. Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Dot/Text area adjustment screen" 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (dot area and text area increased) to +5 (dot area increased and text area reduced) 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until it becomes suitable. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
1-86
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.4.7 Density adjustment Adjust the AE (AES) density, copy density and the background density. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" For the density adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. AE (AES) adjustment] [2. Copy density adjustment] [3. Background adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. a. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen." 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Procedure (2) Copy density adjustment Adjust the copy density.
36 MODE 6. A numeric value is shown in the "RESULT." 7. When the adjustment result is other than 0, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key (e.g.: if the adjustment result is 2, input -2). Setting range: -5 to +5 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the adjustment result becomes 0. 9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen."
Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the density shift function in the user mode.
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. (1) AE (AES) adjustment Conduct this adjustment when you want to change the center value selected by the AE (Auto density selection) in the user mode. a. Procedure 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Copy density adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. AE (AES) adjustment] key. 5. With a chart in which you want to change the AE density set to the original glass, press the [SCAN] key.
1-87
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 5. "Copy density adjustment screen" a.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Procedure
I ADJUSTMENT
For the copy density adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the arrow key to select an item you want to adjust. "Text/Photo (Full color)" "Photo (Full color)" "Text (Full color)" "Map (Full color)" "Text/Photo (Mono color)" "Photo (Mono color)" "Text (Mono color)" "Map (Mono color)" "Text/Photo (Monochrome)" "Photo (Monochrome)" "Text (Monochrome)" "Map (Monochrome)" 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test chart set to the original glass, press the START button. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker)
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Background adjustment] key. 5. "Background adjustment screen" For the background adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the arrow key to select an item you want to adjust. "Text/Photo (Full color)" "Photo (Full color)" "Text (Full color)" "Map (Full color)" "Text/Photo (Mono color)" "Photo (Mono color)" "Text (Mono color)" "Map (Mono color)" "Text/Photo (Monochrome)" "Photo (Monochrome)" "Text (Monochrome)" "Map (Monochrome)" 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until it becomes suitable. 7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen." select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test chart set to the original glass, press the START button. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. (3) Background adjustment Adjust the copy background density. The background adjustment in the user mode only supports the batch adjustment. It is not possible to adjust the background for each color mode or original mode. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until it becomes suitable. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen."
1-88
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.4.8 Tone adjustment Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the tone adjustment in the user mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
36 MODE 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key. 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" For the tone adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Red adjustment] [2. Green adjustment] [3. Blue adjustment] a.
to
the
"Image
quality
adjustment
menu
screen."
(2) Green adjustment Adjust the density of green. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 2. "36 mode menu screen" 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Image quality mode menu screen." 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key. (1) Red adjustment Adjust the density of red. This adjustment is not reflected to the IP. a. Procedure 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Green adjustment] key. 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the origi1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key. 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Red adjustment] key. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. to the "Image quality mode menu screen." keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable. nal glass. 7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
1-89
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (3) Blue adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.4.9 Recall standard data Reset the adjustment values of image quality
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the density of blue. a. Procedure adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data) Note: Data for the scanner gamma adjustment and the printer gamma sensor adjustment cannot be reset to standard data. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [9. Recall standard data] key. 4. "Recall standard data: Image quality adj. screen" Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard date. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the [Image quality mode menu screen] without recalling the standard data.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key. 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Blue adjustment] key. 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1-90
36 MODE 7.5.1 Setting method A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [4. Running test mode] key. 3. "Running test mode menu screen" Press the mode key of one of the modes 1 to 5. 4. "Basic screen" Press the [Start] key. 5. After confirmation of the copy operation, press the STOP button and turn OFF the main switch (SW2).
7.5
tion.
Running test mode
Conduct a test while in the continuous copy operaSelect [4. Running test mode] in the 36 mode menu screen to show the running mode menu screen. For this adjustment, the following items can be selected: A. Intermittent copy mode After completion of the copy operation for the set copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the same operation. B. Paperless running mode Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal copy operation. In the same manner as the intermittent copy mode, after completion of the copy operation for the set copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the same operation. C. Paperless mode Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal copy operation. D. Paperless endless mode The copier operates with the copy count infinitely set automatically. In the same manner as the paperless mode, without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal copy operation. E. Running mode The copy operation is made in the paperless endless mode plus the scanner each-time scan and the auto paper feed tray switching.
1-91
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.6
I ADJUSTMENT
Test pattern output mode
Output various test patterns to separate abnormalities. Select [5. Test pattern output mode] in the 36 mode screen to show "Test pattern output mode screen." Note: As for modes specifically not given in the SHB, be sure not to output test patterns. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Test pattern output mode] key. 3. "Test pattern output mode screen" After entering an output pattern number through the numeric keys, press the [SET] key. 4. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. "Basic screen" Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the START button to output a test pattern. 6. When outputting another test pattern, repeat steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with the P button being pressed at the same time. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to the "36 mode menu screen."
1-92
36 MODE
No.1 Overall halftone

[Check Items] When the density is set to 70 (halftone) When there are image stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for any abnormality. [Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit and transfer belt unit. When the density is set to 0 (white) When there is image foggy back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality. [Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact. When the density is set at 255 (Y, M, C, K) When the density is light, check the printer system for any abnormality. [Recommended check point]: Write unit * For information about setting the density, see "7.7 Test pattern density setting."
Test Pattern When the density is set to 70 When the density is set to 0 When the density is set to 255
8050fs1019
1-93
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
No.11 Beam check

[Check Items 1] For developement and analysis of the write unit [Check Items 2] Check the solid black pattern [1] to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and subscanning directions. [Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, transfer belt unit, and 2nd transfer unit [Check Items 3] Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern [2] at the leading/trailing edge of the test pattern in the feed direction. [Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit
Test Pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1020
[1] Solid black pattern
[2] Gradation pattern
1-94
36 MODE
No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern

[Check Items] Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal. Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vartical magnification, skew, and leading edge timing, etc. of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test Pattern
[1]
30mm 237mm 20mm
[1]
205.7mm
28 0m m
190mm
190mm
190mm
8050fs1021
[1] Edge of paper
1-95
I ADJUSTMENT
0m 28 m
36 MODE
7.7
I ADJUSTMENT
Test pattern density setting
7.8
Finisher adjustment
Set the density of the test pattern. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [6. Test pattern density setting] key. 3. "Test pattern density setting-Y screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select one of the colors: "Y, M, C and K" that you want to adjust. 4. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: 0 (lighter) to 255 (darker) 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. "Basic screen" Select the paper size and press the START button to output a test pattern. 7. When outputting another test pattern, repeat steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with the P button being pressed at the same time. 8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to the "36 mode menu screen."
Adjusting the FNS, PI, PK, TU. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" [1. Stitch & Fold stopper adj.] [2. Fold stopper adjustment] [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] [4. Trimming stopper adjustment] [5. Punch adjustment] [6. Three-Fold position adj.] [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
1-96
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FS-215 only)
36 MODE 7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FS-215 only) Adjusting the fold position when stitch and fold or
Adjusting the stapling position when stitch and fold mode.
folding mode. A. Procedure
A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Stitch and Fold stopper adj.] key. 4. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 6. Check the paper center and stapling position. Standard value: 1mm 7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Fold stopper adjustment] key. 4. "Fold stopper adjustment (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 6. Check the paper center and folding position. Standard value: 1mm 7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Fold stopper adjustment screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
1-97
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (PI-110
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TU-109 only) Adjusting the trimming amount. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Trimming stopper adjustment] key. 4. "Trimming stopper adjustment (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF and press the START button. 6. Check the trimming amount. Standard value: 2.5 to 4.5mm Note: Setting a trimming amount of 2.5mm or less may cause a trimming error. 7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Trimming stopper adjustment screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI8050fs1022
I ADJUSTMENT
only) This adjustment should be performed when the cover sheet tray size cannot be detected properly and when centring adjustment for cover sheet tray is performed. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] key. 4. Set a A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R (for inch machine) paper on the cover sheet tray (upper/lower) [1] and press the [Start] key. A complete message appears on the screen.
[1]
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size.
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment menu screen."
9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment menu mode screen."
1-98
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-120 only) This adjusts the punch vertical positions, punch horizontal positions, and punch registration loop amount. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 3. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Punch adjustment includes the following items: [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] [2. Punch kit horizontal pos. adj.] [5. Punch registration loop adj.] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return each adjustment screen to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen." a. Procedure
36 MODE (1) Punch kit vertical position adjustment (PKAdjusting the punch vertical position.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] key. 5. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 7. Check the punch vertical position. 8. When the value is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing down the P button. 9. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1mm 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the value is appropriate. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
1-99
I ADJUSTMENT
120 only)
36 MODE (2) Punch kit horizontal position adjustment
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (3) Punch registration loop adjustment Adjusting the registration loop amount for the reversed paper exit, the ADU paper exit (straight exit) and cover sheet upper/lower.
I ADJUSTMENT
(PK-120 only) Adjusting the punch horizontal position. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Punch kit Horizontal pos. adj.] key. 5. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 7. Check the position of punch holes. Specification (Length between the edge of paper and the center of punch hole): 10.5mm (2 holes/4 holes/swedish 4 holes), 9.5mm (3 holes/inch 2 holes) 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1mm 11. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the value is obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
a.
Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch registration loop adj.] key. 5. Press [1. Punch registration loop adj. (main body)] key. or [2. Punch registration loop adj. (PI)] key. 6. "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select the item to be adjusted. The screen changes as follows; reverse ADU or upper tray lower tray. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Press the START button to make a copy. 9. Check the punch registration loop amount. 10. When the value is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button. 11. "Punch registration loop adj. screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -20 to +20, 1 step = 0.8mm 12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the value is appropriate. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen."
1-100
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FS-215 only) Adjusting the folding positions during the threefolded copy. a. Procedure 8. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"
36 MODE
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. Note: See "9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS" to adjust the folded positions "b" and "c."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [6. Three-fold position adj.] key. 4. "Three-Fold adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 6. Check the three-folded position "a."
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
c a
8050fs1023
Folded positions a b c
Standard value A4R 95mm 101mm 101mm 8.5 x 11R 89.4mm 95mm 95mm
Specification 2mm 2mm 2mm
7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button.
1-101
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment
7.9
List output mode
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting the pitch of the 2 positions staple. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] key. 4. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 6. Check the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
Output a variety of data. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [8. List output mode] key. 3. "List output mode menu screen" List output mode items are as follows: [1. Machine management list 1] [2. Adjustment data list] [3. Page fill data list] [4. Machine management list 2] [5. Parameter list] [6. Memory dump list] [7. Font pattern] Note: Setting DPSW 30-1 to 1, [4. Machine management list 2] and later appear.
4. Press the key of an item you want to output. 5. Select A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper and press the
8050fs1024
START button. 6. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "36 mode menu screen."
7. When changing the dimension A, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen" Enter a value with numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: 120 to 160, 1 step: 1mm 9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the dimension A is appropriate. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
1-102
47 MODE 5. Input check result will appear in the input check result display area. 6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to perform the other signal input check.
8. 47 MODE
8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting method
A. 47 Mode This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/ output check function) to check and adjust the various signals and loads. B. Operation method for 47 mode (1) Starting 47 mode a. b. c. Turn off the main switch (SW2). Turn on the SW2 while holding down 4 and 7 of the numeric keys. The 47 mode is activated if the moment "I/O check mode" is displayed in the message display area at the center of the screen. "47 mode menu screen" 2. "47 mode menu screen" Enter the output check code with the numeric keys. *2 3. Press the P button when using the multi mode. 4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.* 2 5. Press the [Start] key to perform the output check. 6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output check. *1 See "8.5 Input check list".
(3) Output check method Follow the following procedure. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 47 mode.
[2] [1] [3]

[1] [2] [3] [4]
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check other signal out-
[4]
8050fs1001
put check. *2 See "8.6 Output check list".
Input/Output check code Multi code Input check Output check
(4) Exiting from the 47 mode Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
(2) Input check method Follow the following procedure. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 47 mode. 2. "47 mode menu screen" Enter the input check code with the numeric keys. *1 3. Press the P button when using the multi mode. 4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys. *1
1-103
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
8.2
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment data display
8.3
Hard disk check
Lists the adjustment values of the machine (factoryset values and current values). No adjustment value can be changed in this mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 47 mode. 2. "47 mode menu screen" Press "94" with the numeric keys. Check that "94-00" appears in the message display area. 3. Press the [Start] key. 4. Press the [STOP] key at the lower right corner of the screen. 5. Turn off the main switch (SW2) to exit from the 47 mode. Note: Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
Perform this operation if you want to check the HDD total capacity, the HDD remaining capacity, and the error code related to HDD. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 47 mode. 2. "47 mode menu screen" Press "99" with the numeric keys. Check that "99-00" appears in the message display area. 3. Press the P button. 4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys. Check that "99-xx" (xx represents the input number) appears in the message display area. 01: HDD total capacity check 02: HDD remaining capacity check 03: HDD bad sectors check and recovery 5. Press the [Start] key. At checking the total capacity: the total capacity is displayed At checking the remaining capacity: the remaining capacity is displayed At checking and recovering the bad sectors: During the operation-"NOW" appears The operation succeeded-"OK" appears The operation failed-"NG" appears Press the [Start] key to perform the HDD bad sectors check and recovery again when "NG" appears. 6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output check. 7. Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode. Note: The operation can not be canceled during the HDD bad sectors check and recovery (the [STOP] button or the [Change Mode] key are disabled).
1-104
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 The hard disk is vulnerable to vibrations and disk when you move the main body.
47 MODE
1-105
I ADJUSTMENT
physical shocks. Be sure to remove the hard
47 MODE
8.4
I ADJUSTMENT
Input check list

Code Multi code Name Display and signal source 001 000 0 to 255
Classification Symbol
High voltage, TEMP/HUM analog signal TEMP/HUM TDB TLD Y TLD M TLD C TLD K PS53 PS52 HV1
00
0 1 2 3
Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside humidity) Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside temperature) Temp detection board Remaining toner detection sensor /Y Remaining toner detection sensor /M Remaining toner detection sensor /C Remaining toner detection sensor /K Waste toner door sensor Waste toner full sensor High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K)
0 to 255 No toner
01
4 5 6 7 8 9
Toner
Box FULL Abnormal
No box EMPTY Normal
02
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HV2
03
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Abnormal
Normal
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) One or more High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) color is abnormal High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) High voltage unit/2 (separation) High voltage unit/2 (separation) Gamma sensor Gamma sensor Drum potential sensor /Y Drum potential sensor /M Drum potential sensor /C Drum potential sensor /K Abnormal Abnormal
Normal
Normal
HV2 PS11 DRPS Y DRPS M DRPS C DRPS K
04 05 06
0 1 2 6 0 1 2 3
Normal
0 to 255
1-106
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Symbol Code Multi code Name
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 000 Normal Abnormal
High voltage, analog signal
HV2
4 5 6 7
High voltage unit /2 (guide plate)
HV2
08
0 1 2 3 4
High voltage unit/2 (2nd transfer)
Abnormal
Normal
HV1
09
0 1 2 3
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K) No paper sensor /1 No paper sensor /2 No paper sensor /3 No paper sensor /BP No paper sensor (LT-211) Remaining paper sensor /1 Remaining paper sensor /2 Remaining paper sensor /3 Remaining paper sensor /1 to /4 (LT-211) Paper size /S1 Paper size /L1 Paper size /S2 Paper size /L2 Paper size /S3 Paper size /L3 Paper size /SBP Paper size /LBP Paper sizeVR /1 Paper sizeVR /2 Paper sizeVR /3 Paper sizeVR /BP Tray upper limit sensor /1 Tray upper limit sensor /2 Tray upper limit sensor /3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP Upper limit sensor (LT-211) Tray set detection /1 Tray set detection /2 Tray set detection /3
Abnormal
Normal
Paper feed, conveyance
PS31 PS37 PS43 PS47 PS108 PS32 PS38 PS44 PS102 to 105 PS33 PS34 PS39 PS40 PS45 PS46 PS48 PS49 VR1 VR2 VR3 VR4 PS30 PS36 PS42 PS25 PS109
11
0 1 2 3 4
Paper
No paper
12
0 1 2 3
Paper
No paper
0 to 7 Paper No paper
13
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14
0 1 2 3
0 to 255
16
0 1 2 3 4
Upper limit
Not at upper limit
Upper:1, lower:2, middle:0 Yes No
17
0 1 2
1-107
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code Multi code
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name Display and signal source 001 000 No paper Paper
I ADJUSTMENT
PS29 PS35 PS41 PS26 PS106 PS107 PS23 PS20 PS27 PS28 PS22 PS50 PS13 PS19 PS21 PS12 PS30 PS36 PS41 PS25 PS101, PS109 PS24
19
0 1 2 3 4
Pre-registration sensor /1 Pre-registration sensor /2 Pre-registration sensor /3 By-pass conveyance sensor Feed sensor (LT-211) Paper feed sensor (LT-211) ADU pre-registration sensor ADU conveyance sensor Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 Registration sensor Vertical conveyance sensor Paper exit sensor Reverse paper exit sensor ADU paper reverse sensor Paper exit full sensor Tray upper limit sensor /1 Tray upper limit sensor /2 Tray upper limit sensor /3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP Lower limit sensor (LT-211) Upper limit sensor (LT-211) 2nd transfer HP sensor
20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Paper
No paper
Paper
No paper
Full
Other than full
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Upper limit Other than upper limit
Upper limit:1, lower limit:2, middle:0 Home Other than position home position Open Close
24
0 1 2
PS18 PS51 PS54 PS14 PS100 PS115 SW100 M41 Light PS1 PS3 PS4 PS2
25
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Front door open/close sensor Vertical conveyance door open/close sensor Toner supply door open/close sensor Toner supply unit open/close sensor Fixing unit set detection Top cover open/close sensor1 (LT-211) Front door open/close sensor (LT-211) Tray down switch (LT-211) Paper feed motor Scanner HP sensor APS detection sensor /S APS detection sensor /L APS timing sensor
Installed Open ON Abnormal
Not installed Close OFF Normal
28 30
0 0 1 2 3
Home Other than position home position Paper OPEN No paper CLOSE
1-108
Light
M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 INDX SB Y INDX SB M INDX SB C INDX SB B INDX SB Y, M, C, K PS5, PS6, PS7
32
0 1 2 3 4
Polygon motor /Y (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /M (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /C (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /K (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (abnormal rotation detection)
One or more colors are abnormal Abnormal
Normal
5 6 7 8 9
Polygon motor /Y (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /M (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /C (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /K (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (abnormal temperature detection)
Normal
One or more colors are abnormal Abnormal
Normal
33
0 1 2 3 4 5
Index sensor /Y Index sensor /M Index sensor /C Index sensor /K Index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K
Normal
One or more colors are abnormal
Normal
35
Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C
Edge detected Edge from one or undetected more color Edge Edge detected undetected Edge detected Edge from one or undetected more color Edge Edge detected undetected Edge detected Edge from one or undetected more color
PS5 PS6 PS7 PS5, PS6, PS7
1 2 3 4
Laser correction HP sensor /Y Laser correction HP sensor /M Laser correction HP sensor /C Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C
PS5 PS6 PS7 PS5, PS6, PS7
5 6 7 8
Laser correction HP sensor /Y Laser correction HP sensor /M Laser correction HP sensor /C Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C
1-109
I ADJUSTMENT
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name Display and signal source 001 000 Edge Edge detected undetected 0 to 255 0 to 255
I ADJUSTMENT
Light
PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 LDB Y LDB M LDB C LDB K PS1
35
9 10 11
Laser correction HP sensor /Y Laser correction HP sensor /M Laser correction HP sensor /C Color registration sensor /F Color registration sensor /R Laser drive board /Y Laser drive board /M Laser drive board /C Laser drive board /K Scanner HP sensor Encoder sensor /Y1, /Y2
36 37
3 4 1 2 3 4
38 41
5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Home Other than position home position Abnormal Normal
Main body
PS60, PS61 PS62, PS63 PS64, PS65 PS66, PS67 PS69, PS68 PS15
Encoder sensor /M1, /M2
Encoder sensor /C1, /C2
Encoder sensor /K1, /K2
Encoder sensor /belt 1, /belt 2
1st transfer HP sensor
Home Other than position home position
M2 M42 M10 M48 M47 M43, M44, M45, M46 M24 M28, M27, M26 M12, M13 M11 M25
42
0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Scanner cooling fan DCPS cooling fan Fixing cooling fan /1 Charger intake fan Drum unit fan Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan /1, /2 IP cooling fan Paper exit fan /F, /M, /R Drum cooling fan /1, /2 Transfer belt cooling fan ICP cooling fan
Abnormal
Normal
1-110
Main body
DCPS1 DCPS2
43
0 1 2 3 4
DC power supply unit /1 (12VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) Total counter Checking to see if the key counterequipped machine is provided with a key counter or not.
C (T) C (K)
5 6
Yes Yes
No No
TH1 TH3 TH2 TH4 TH1 TH1 TH2 M29
45
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /3 Fixing temperature sensor /2 Fixing temperature sensor /4 Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /2 TH1 correction temperature TH2 correction temperature TH1 correction temperature Fixing motor
0 to 255
47
0 1 2
Abnormal
Normal
PS16
3 4 5
Fixing pressure release sensor
Home Other than position home position Abnormal Normal
M29
9 10 11
Fixing motor
PS15
48
0 1 2 3
1st transfer HP sensor
Home Other than position home position
PRCB
49
Printer control board (drum motor control)
Displays abnormal code
1-111
I ADJUSTMENT
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name Display and signal source 001 000 Normal Abnormal
I ADJUSTMENT
Intrinsic functions
M20
50
0 1 2
Developing motor /Y
M21
3 4 5
Developing motor /M
M22
6 7 8
Developing motor /C
M23
9 10 11
Developing motor /K
TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K PCL Y PCL M PCL C PCL K TDS Y 54 51
12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 0 1 2
Toner density sensor /Y Toner density sensor /M Toner density sensor /C Toner density sensor /K Pre-charging lamp /Y Pre-charging lamp /M Pre-charging lamp /C Pre-charging lamp /K Toner density sensor /Y
0 to 255
Abnormal
Normal
0 to 255
TDS M
3 4 5
Toner density sensor /M
TDS C
6 7 8
Toner density sensor /C
TDS K
9 10 11
Toner density sensor /K
TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K PS17
57
0 1 2
FS-115, FS-215 LT-211 DF-319 Toner density sensor /Y Toner density sensor /M Toner density sensor /C Toner density sensor /K Fixing paper exit sensor
Connected Unconnected
58
0 1 2 3
0 to 255
59
Paper
No paper
1-112
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 000 No paper Paper
DF-319
PS304 PS301 PS302 PS305 PS306 PS303 PS308 PS307 RS1
60
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
No paper sensor Registration sensor Timing sensor Reverse sensor Paper exit sensor Paper feed cover sensor Paper feed tray sensor Paper exit cover sensor DF-319 open/close sensor Sub-tray paper exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor Tray lower limit sensor FNS entrance sensor Stacker entrance sensor Main tray paper exit sensor Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor Alignment HP sensor /U Paper exit belt HP sensor Stapler rotation HP sensor Stapler movement HP sensor Paper exit opening HP sensor Clincher rotation HP sensor Counter reset sensor Shift HP sensor Stacker no paper sensor Staple switch /R Stapler HP sensor /R Cartridge switch /R Clincher motor /R Clincher HP sensor /R Sub-tray full sensor FNS interlock switch Staple switch /F
Open
Close
FS-115, 215 PS701 PS702 PS703 PS704 PS705 PS706 PS707 PS708 PS709 PS713 PS711 PS712 PS714 PS715 PS718 PS720 SW702 PS730 SW701 M710 PS732 PS719 MS701 SW704
76
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Paper
No paper
Upper limit Other than upper limit Lower limit Other than lower limit No paper Paper Paper No paper
Other than Standby standby position position Home Other than position home position Other than home position Home position Home position Other than home position
Other than Close close position position Home position Paper Other than home position Paper No staple Other than home position Other than start Other than home position Full Other than home position No paper Home position No paper Staple Home position Start Home position Other than full
No cartridge Cartridge
Front door Front door opened closed No staple Staple
1-113
I ADJUSTMENT
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name Display and signal source 001 000 Home position Start Home position Control speed Other than home position Home position No paper Other than full Control speed Control speed Other than home position Other than start Other than home position Other than control speed Home position Other than home position Paper Full Other than control speed Other than control speed
I ADJUSTMENT
FS-115, 215 PS731 SW703 M715 PS733 M707 PS722 PS723 PS724 PS725 PS726 PS729 M720 PI-110 M203 PS201 PS206 FS-115, 215 PS716
76
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
Stapler HP sensor /F Cartridge switch /F Clincher motor /F Clincher HP sensor /F Paper exit roller motor lock detection FNS connection detection Folding knife HP sensor Stopper HP sensor Alignment HP sensor /L Folding exit sensor Folding passage sensor Folding full sensor Folding conveyance motor PI conveyance motor DIPSW0 PI passage sensor /U PI passage sensor /L Folding connection detection Gate HP sensor
No cartridge Cartridge
Connected Unconnected
Other than Single single operation operation Paper No paper
Unconnected Connected
1-114
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 000 Paper No paper
PI-110
PS202 PS203 PS205 PS204 MS201 PS207 PS208 PS210 PS209 PS212
76
62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92
No sheet sensor /U Sheet set sensor /U Tray lower limit sensor /U Tray upper limit sensor /U Sheet feeder manual start/clear switch Sheet feeder manual punch button switch Sheet feeder manual function selection button switch PI interlock switch No sheet sensor /L Sheet set sensor /L Tray lower limit sensor /L Tray upper limit sensor /L Sheet size sensor /L PI connection detection Punch HP sensor Punch scraps full sensor Punch scraps box set sensor PK120 rocking End face detection 1 PK120 rocking End face detection 2 PK120 rocking End face detection 3 PK120 rocking End face detection 4 PK120 rocking End face detection 5 PK120 rocking Punch movement home position PK120 connection detection
Lower limit Other than lower limit Upper limit Other than upper limit Switch OFF Switch ON
Open No paper
Close Paper
Lower limit Other than lower limit Upper limit Other than upper limit Other than home position Other than full Set No paper Home position Full Other than set Paper
PK-120
PS801 PS802 PS804
PF-110
PS803
93 94 95
Home position
Other than home position
1-115
I ADJUSTMENT
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name Display and signal source 001 000 No paper Other than home position Home position Other than home position No paper Paper Home position Other than home position Home position Paper
I ADJUSTMENT
TU-109
PS101 PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 PS106 PS108 PS110 PS111 PS112 PS114 MS2 PS107 PS109 PS113
77
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Cutting entrance detection Cutting conveyance detection Cutting end stopper HP detection Cutting clear HP detection Cutting press HP detectin Cutting knife upper limit HP detection Cutting booklet discharge Holder board of upper limit detection Holder board of lower limit detection Pusher HP Cutting stacker cover detection 24V Cutting front door detection 24V Cutting conveyance M lock signal under operation Cutting end scraps box set detection Cutting end scraps box full detection Cutting stucker full detection TU connection detection
Other than Upper limit upper limit Lower limit Other than lower limit Home position Open Locked Not set Other than full No paper Other than home position Close Unlocked Other than set Full Paper
1-116
47 MODE
8.5
Note:
Output check list

set or change in the field" column. These items are only for the developping/manufucting process. Outputs of them may damage the machine. Name Exposure lamp Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /Y 1 2 M53, MC15 3 4 5 M53, MC16 6 7 8 M53, MC17 9 10 11 HV1 02 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /K Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /K Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /K High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y: for current measurement) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M: for current measurement) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C: for current measurement) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K: for current measurement) x x x x x x x x Cannot be set or changed in the field
Do not output items which cannot be set or changed in the field and codes which are not described in the output check list." Classification Symbol High voltage, L1 analog signal M53, MC14 Code 00 01 Multi code 0 0
1-117
I ADJUSTMENT
Do not output items with "x" in the "Cannot be
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 03 Multi code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 L1 10 11 12 HV2 04 0 1 PS11 DRPS Y DRPS M DRPS C DRPS K HV2 07 06 2 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 08 0 1 2 3 4 5
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y, / M, /C, /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current measurement at color mode) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current measurement at color mode) High voltage unit/2 (separation) High voltage unit /2 (separation, measurement) Gamma sensor Gamma sensor (for individual check) Drum potential sensor /Y Drum potential sensor /M Drum potential sensor /C Drum potential sensor /K High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output) High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output) High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output: for individual check) High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output: for individual check) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output3: for cleaning consideration)* High voltage unit /2 (guide plate) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Cannot be set or changed in the field x x x x x
I ADJUSTMENT
High voltage, analog signal
HV2
1-118
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Symbol High voltage, analog signal HV1 Code 09 Multi code 0 1 2 3 Paper feed, conveyance SD7 SD8 SD9 SD5 SD100 MC7 MC9 MC11 MC6 MC101 MC8 MC10 MC12 MC102 M40 M39 M38 M35 M100 M34 24 23 22 21 20 15 1 2 98 0 1 2 4 5 0 1 2 4 5 0 1 2 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 M30 25 0 1 2 3 4 M31 26 0 1 2 Name High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K) Counter reset Job memory clear KRDS setup Pick up solenoid /1 Pick up solenoid /2 Pick up solenoid /3 Pick up solenoid /BP Paper feed solenoid (LT-211) Paper feed clutch /1 Paper feed clutch /2 Paper feed clutch /3 Paper feed clutch /BP Paper feed clutch (LT-211) Pre-registration clutch /1 Pre-registration clutch /2 Pre-registration clutch /3 Pre-registration clutch (LT-211) Tray up drive motor /1 Tray up drive motor /2 Tray up drive motor /3 Tray up drive motor /BP (down) Tray up drive motor /BP (up) UP/DOWN motor (LT-211: down) UP/DOWN motor (LT-211: up) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (continuous rotation) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (pressure) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (release) Registration motor (1/3 speed) Registration motor (1/2 speed) Registration motor (1/1speed) Registration motor (paper feed line speed) Registration motor (hard timer on: 1/1 speed) Loop roller motor (1/3 speed) Loop roller motor (1/2 speed) Loop roller motor (1/1speed)
47 MODE Cannot be set or x x x x
1-119
I ADJUSTMENT
changed in the field
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 26 27 Multi code 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M41 M101 MC13 MC4 MC5 SD1 M136, M137 SD6 M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 5 6 7 8 9 32 29 28 0 1 0 1 2 3 5 6 0 1 2 3 4
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name Loop roller motor (paper feed line speed) M33 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/3 speed) Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/2 speed) Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/1 speed) Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:3 times speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/ 3 speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/ 2 speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/ 1 speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:3 times speed) Paper feed motor Paper feed motor (LT-211) Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 Transfer belt separating claw Paper feed assist fan /F, /R (LT-211) ADU lock solenoid Polygon motor /Y (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /M (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /C (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /K (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /Y (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /M (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /C (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Cannot be set or changed in the field
I ADJUSTMENT
M31
1-120
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Symbol Paper feed, conveyance LDB Y LDB M LDB C LDB K LDB Y, M, C, K PS8 PS9 M1 37 38 34 36 3 4 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Main body ACDB 40 0 1 M14 41 0 1 2 M15 3 4 5 M16 6 7 8 M17 9 10 11 M18 12 13 14 15 Shading correction Color registration sensor /F Color registration sensor /R LD alarm level detection all colors Scanner motor (back and forth drive 1: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 2: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 3: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 4: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 5: continuous) Scanner motor (HP search) Scanner motor(moves to the back scan position) Scanner motor (back scan AGS operation+scan operation: one operation) AC drive board (RL1 (main relay)ON) AC drive board (HTR1, 2 (HTR1, 2(heater/1, /2)OFF) Drum motor /Y (1/3 speed) Drum motor /Y (1/2 speed) Drum motor /Y (1/1speed) Drum motor /M (1/3 speed) Drum motor /M (1/2 speed) Drum motor /M (1/1speed) Drum motor /C (1/3 speed) Drum motor /C (1/2 speed) Drum motor /C (1/1speed) Drum motor /K (1/3 speed) Drum motor /K (1/2 speed) Drum motor /K (1/1speed) Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed) Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed) Transfer belt motor (1/1speed) Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed: for nip measurement) 1-121 Code 33 Multi code 0 1 2 3 4 Name Laser drive board /Y Laser drive board /M Laser drive board /C Laser drive board /K Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K
47 MODE Cannot be set or
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 41 Multi code 16 17 M2 M25 M42 M10, M36, M37 M48 M47 M43, M44, M45, M46 M24 M26, M27, M28 M12 M13 M11 T (C) T (BK) T (K) DCPS2 L2, L3, L4 44 45 0 1 2 3 L2 L3 L4 L2, L3, L4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 M29 47 0 1 2 3 4 5 43 9 10 11 1 2 6 7 8 4 5 6 42 0 1 2 3
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed: for nip measurement) Transfer belt motor (1/1 speed: for nip measurement) Scanner cooling fan IPB cooling fan DCPS cooling fan Fixing cooling fan /1, /3, /2 Charger intake fan Drum unit fan Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan /1, /2 IP cooling fan Exhaust fan/R, /M, /F Drum cooling fan /1 Drum cooling fan /2 Transfer belt cooling fan Total counter Black counter Key counter DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC breaking) Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, Fixing lower lamp x Cannot be set or changed in the field x
I ADJUSTMENT
Main body
M18
Fixing upper lamp /1 Fixing upper lamp /2 Fixing lower lamp Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, Fixing lower lamp
Fixing motor (1/3 speed) Fixing motor (1/2 speed) Fixing motor (1/1speed) Fixing motor (reverse rotation: release operation on, full-time rotation) Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the pressure position) Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the release position)
1-122
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Symbol Main body M29 Code 47 Multi code 9 10 11 M29, L2, L3, L4 M54 M19 48 15 0 1 2 3 M18 49 0 1 2 3 4 5 Intrinsic functions M20 50 0 1 2 M21 3 4 5 M22 6 7 8 M23 9 10 11 PCL Y PLC M PCL C 51 0 1 2 13 Name Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/3 speed) Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/2 speed) Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/1 speed) Fixing motor, Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, fixing lower lamp (fixing roller pressure+all heater lamps on) Web motor 1st transfer pressure/release motor (full-time rotation) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at the release position) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at black and white pressure position) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at color mode pressure position) Transfer belt motor (for checking photosensitive material control 1: 1/1 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 2: 1/2 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 3: 1/3 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 4: 1/1 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 5: 1/2 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 6: 1/3 speed) Developing motor /Y (1/1speed) Developing motor /Y (1/2 speed) Developing motor /Y (1/3 speed) Developing motor /M (1/1speed) Developing motor /M (1/2 speed) Developing motor /M (1/3 speed) Developing motor /C (1/1speed) Developing motor /C (1/2 speed) Developing motor /C (1/3 speed) Developing motor /K (1/1speed) Developing motor /K (1/2 speed) Developing motor /K (1/3 speed) Pre-charging lamp /Y Pre-charging lamp /M Pre-charging lamp /C 1-123
x x x x x x
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 51 Multi code 3 4 5 6 7 52 0 1 2 3 4 5 54 0 1 2 M50 3 4 5 M51 6 7 8 M52 9 10 11 MC14 MC15 MC16 MC17 SD2 SD3 56 55 12 13 14 15 0 1 0 1 2 3 TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K 58 57 0 1 2 0 1 2 3
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name Pre-charging lamp /K Pre-charging lamp /Y (turns on the control signal) PCL M PLC C PCL K M49 Pre-charging lamp //M (turns on the control signal) Pre-charging lamp /C (turns on the control signal) Pre-charging lamp /K (turns on the control signal) L detection reference for all colors L detection reference for colors (Y, M, C) L detection reference for K L detection reference for Y L detection reference for M L detection reference for C Toner supply motor /Y (high speed) Toner supply motor /Y (low speed) Toner supply motor /Y (setting value) Toner supply motor /M (high speed) Toner supply motor /M (low speed) Toner supply motor /M (setting value) Toner supply motor /C (high speed) Toner supply motor /C (low speed) Toner supply motor /C (setting value) Toner supply motor /K (high speed) Toner supply motor /K (low speed) Toner supply motor /K (setting value) Toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle clutch /K Color registration shutter solenoid Gamma sensor shutter solenoid Indicator lamp (PAT1 on) Indicator lamp (PAT2 on) Indicator lamp (PAT3 on) Indicator lamp (PAT4 on) FS-115, FS-215 connection check LT-211 connection check DF-319 connection check Toner density sensor /Y Toner density sensor /M Toner density sensor /C Toner density sensor /K x x x x x x Cannot be set or changed in the field
I ADJUSTMENT
Intrinsic functions
PCL K PCL Y
1-124
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Symbol DF-319 M301 Code 60 Multi code 1 2 3 4 5 6 M302 7 8 9 10 11 12 M303 13 14 15 16 17 18 SD302 SD301 MC301 19 20 21 Name Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec) Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec) Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec) Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec) Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 400mm/sec) Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 900mm/sec) Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec) Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec) Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec) Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec) Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 400mm/sec) Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 900mm/sec) Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec) Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec) Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 400mm/sec) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 900mm/sec) Reverse solenoid Paper exit solenoid Registration clutch
1-125
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 75 Multi code 1 2 3 4 M703 5 6 7 M705 M707 8 9 10 M708 M708 M709 M714 M711 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 M713 M718 M716 M719 M720 SD704 SD705 M705 19 20 21 23 24 31 32 33 34 35 M716 36 37 38 M718 TU-109 M101 M102 M103 M104 39 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 M105 62 63
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name FNS conveyance motor Shift motor (HP search) Shift motor (moves to the shift position) Shift motor ( rotation) Tray up/down motor (HP search) Tray up/down motor (down) Tray up/down motor (up) Alignment motor /U (HP search) Paper exit roller motor (HP search) Paper exit roller motor (reverse rotation) Paper exit opening motor (HP search) Paper exit opening motor (moves to opening) Stapler motor /R (initianl operation) Stapler motor /R (stapling) Stapler motor /F (initianl operation) Stapler motor /F (stapling) Stapler movement motor (HP search) Stapler movement motor (movement by size) Stacker entrance motor Stopper motor (HP search) Alignment motor /L Folding knife motor Folding conveyance motor Paper exit opening solenoid By-pass gate solenoid Alignment motor /U (open) Alignment motor /U (close) Alignment motor /U (rocking) Alignment motor /L (open) Alignment motor /L (close) Alignment motor /L (rocking) Stopper motor (moves to the A4R position) Conveyance motor Cutter motor (normal rotation) Cutter motor (reverse rotation) Stopper motor (HP search) Stopper release motor (HP search) Stopper release motor (release) Stopper release motor (set) Press motor (HP search) Press motor (press) Cannot be set or changed in the field
I ADJUSTMENT
FS-115, FS-215
M701 M702
1-126
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Symbol PI-110 MC202 M202 SD202 PK-120 PI-110 M801 M802 MC201 M201 SD201 M203 FS-115, FS-215 M712 Code 75 Multi code 64 65 66 67 78 79 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 M721 M704 M706 SD706 ADU SD4 MC2 MC1 MC3 M32 84 80 81 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91 92 93 94 95 96 99 Name Conveyance clutch /L Tray up/down motor /L (down) Tray up/down motor /L (up) Sheet feed solenoid /L Punch motor Punch shift motor (HP search) Conveyance clutch /U Tray up/down motor (down) Tray up/down motor (up) Sheet feed solenoid /U PI conveyance motor Gate drive motor (HP search) Gate drive motor (stacker direction switching) Gate drive motor (straight direction switching) Sub-tray paper exit motor Clincher rotation motor (HP search) Clincher rotation motor (skew shift) Stapler rotation motor (HP search) Stapler rotation motor (skew shift) Three-folding gate solenoid FNS paperless running mode Reverse/exit solenoid ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU pre-registration clutch ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/3 speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/2 speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/1 speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: paper feed line speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 3 times speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/3 speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/2 speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/1 speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: paper feed line speed) 1-127
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code 84 94 Multi code 9 0 1 2 97 98 99 1 2 3
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Name ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:3 times speed) Adjustment data display Illuminate all LEDs on the operation board Message display E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display E-RDH (DRAM) check HDD bad sectors check and recovery Cannot be set or changed in the field
I ADJUSTMENT
ADU Others
M32
1-128
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Caution: Make sure the power cord of the copier is unplugged from the power outlet
9.1
Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment
Perform the paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment when the no feed jam occurs at the by-pass feed. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. 2. Install the piled plate [3] on the paper feed roller/ BP [2] with 2 screws [1]. 3. Replace the ADU. 4. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation. 5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 if the no feed jam continues to occur at the paper feed. Note: The weight plate (P/N:13FG4062*) is a supply part. It should be purchased separately. Up to 4 plates can be used at a time. Perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass)" when the weight plate is added.
8050fs1050
[1]
[3]
[2]
1-129
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.2
I ADJUSTMENT
Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (by-pass)
Perform the paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled paper. Note: This adjustment affects the pick-up movement amount. When the adjustment is complete, perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass)". A. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. 2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed solenoid cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1051
1-130
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Note: Take note of the original scale. (1) If it is not within the standard value: Adjust the vertical position of the sensor mounting bracket to make the height of the entrance guide upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface to be within the standard value. When raising the height of the up/down plate: lower the sensor mounting bracket. When lowering height of the up/down plate: lower the sensor mounting bracket. (2) If any problem occurs: When the edge of the fed paper is folded: raise the position of the sensor mounting bracket. When paper with a concave curl is fed: raise the position of the sensor mounting bracket. When paper with a convex curl is fed: lower the position of the sensor mounting bracket. 1. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover. 2. Replace the ADU. 3. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of PS25 again if the problem continues to occur.
8050fs1052
[2]
[1]
1-131
I ADJUSTMENT
tray upper limit sensor/BP (PS25) [2].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.3
I ADJUSTMENT
Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass)
Perform the pick-up movement amount adjustment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. 2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed solenoid cover [2].
[1]
[2]
3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5) [2]. Note: Take note of the original scale. 4. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover. 5. Replace the ADU. 6. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation. 7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of SD5 again if the no feed jam continues to occur.
[1]
8050fs1053
[2]
[1]
8050fs1054
1-132
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.4
Perform this adjustment when the mis-centering occurs even after "Printer-centering adjustment" in the 36 mode, has been performed. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the paper feed tray. 2. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the up/down plate [1]. 3. Move the guide plate and adjust the center position. 4. Tighten 3 screws [2]. 5. Print the test pattern (No.16).
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1055
6. Fold the output in half vertically and check whether the mis-centering [3] of the center of image [2] against the center of paper [1] is within the standard value. Standard value: 3mm or less 7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the mis-centering amount is within the standard value.
8050fs1056
[2] [3] [1]
1-133
I ADJUSTMENT
Paper feed tray /1 to /3 miscentering adjustment
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.5
I ADJUSTMENT
Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment
Perform the sheet feed pressure adjustment when the no feed jam or the double feed jam occurs at the paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment). Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the paper feed tray [1]. 2. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the paper feed unit cover [3].
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
8050fs1057
1-134
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 3. Unplug the connector [1]. shaft screw [3]. 5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] toward the rear side and lift it up. Then, unplug the connector [5] and remove the paper feed unit [4].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1058
6. Change the hook position of the spring [1] at the bottom of the paper feed unit. Weak[2]: Double feed jam is corrected. Strong [3]: No feed jam is corrected. 7. Replace the paper feed unit and the paper feed tray.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1059
1-135
I ADJUSTMENT
4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.6
I ADJUSTMENT
FNS adjustment of the bypass conveyance guide plate magnet
A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Check whether the stopper piece [4] of the bypass conveyance guide plate is in contact with the by-pass conveyance guide plate/L [5] when the magnet [2] for the by-pass conveyance guide plate [1] is attached to the front panel [3]. If not, perform the following adjustment.
[1] [5] [2] [3]
[4] [1]
[5]
[2] [4]
8050fs1075
3. Loosen the magnet screw [1]. 4. Push the by-pass conveyance guide plate [2] toward the arrow until the stopper piece [4] comes into contact with the conveyance guide plate/L [4]. 5. Attach the magnet [5] to the front panel [6]. Then, tighten the magnet screw [1]. 6. Close the finisher door.
[2] [5] [6]
[1] [4]
[3]
8050fs1076
1-136
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.7
A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Pull out the stacker unit [1]. 3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [2]. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid FNS from falling, make sure to place a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[2]
[1] [2] [3]

4. Open the by-pass conveyance guide plate [1]. 5. Visually check whether the clearance between the by-pass gate [2] and the by-pass conveyance plate [3] is within the standard value when the by-pass gate solenoid (SD705) is off. Standard value: A = 3.2 0.5mm If not, perform the following adjustment.
mm
8050fs1077
[2] [1]
A=
3.2
0.5
[3]
[2]
8050fs1078
1-137
I ADJUSTMENT
FNS adjustment of the bypass gate
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 6. Remove the rear cover.
I ADJUSTMENT
7. Unplug all connectors [2] from the FNS control board (FNSCB) [1] and remove the wiring harness from the clamp [3]. 8. Remove 5 screws [4]. Then, remove the FNSCB [1] with the bracket [5].
[2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[1]
8050fs1079
9. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the by-pass gate solenoid (SD705) [1] and adjust the position of SD 705 [1] based on the mark [5] to make the clearance between the by-pass gate [3] and the bypass conveyance plate [4] to be within the standard value when SD705 [1] is off. Standard value: A = 3.2 0.5mm 10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[4]
A=
3.2
0.5
mm
[3] [2]
[5]
[1]
8050fs1080
1-138
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.8
A. Procedure 1. Remove the following parts. Top cover or optional PI (if installed) Top cover/2 2. Turn on the main body, and then drive the shift motor (M702) in the 47 mode (code 75-2/75-3). 3. Check whether the edge of the actuator [5] for the slide gear is placed in the notched hole [3] at the slide stay [2] for the shift unit [1] for both the HP search (home position) and the shift position. If not, perform the following adjustment.
[3] [4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1081
4. Loosen the bracket screw [2] for the shift HP sensor (PS718) and adjust the position of the bracket [4] based on the mark [3]. 5. Tighten the bracket screw [2] when the adjustment is complete. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1] [4]
[3] [2]
8050fs1082
1-139
I ADJUSTMENT
FNS adjustment of the shift position
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.9
I ADJUSTMENT
FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid
A. Procedure 1. Remove the following parts. Top cover/1 or optional PI (if installed) Top cover/2 Rear cover 2. Turn on the main body, and then turn on the paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) in the 47 mode (code 75-31). 3. Check whether the clearance between the plunger [2] on the solenoid and the stopper [3] on the bracket is within the standard value when SD704 [1] is on. Standard value: A = 6.5 0.5mm If not, perform the following adjustment.
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1]
[2]
8050fs1083
4. Remove 2 solenoid bracket screws [1] and remove the solenoid [2] with the bracket [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1084
1-140
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 5. Loosen 2 solenoid screws [1], adjust the posiscrews. Standard value: A = 6.5 0.5mm
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1]
8050fs1085
6. Replace the solenoid bracket [1] and tighten the solenoid bracket screws [5] at the position where the paper exit guide [2] is in contact with the stopper (rubber) [4] on the paper exit guide stay [3]. Note: There should be the gap of 1mm or more between the paper exit guide [2] and the paper exit guide stay [3].
[1]
[5]
[4] [3] [2]
[3]
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
1mm
[2]
8050fs1086
1-141
I ADJUSTMENT
tion of the solenoid [2], and then tighten the
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm

A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 2. Check whether the upper face of the paper exit belt arm [4] is located at the center of 2 marks [5] when the edge of the actuator [2] for the belt detection gear [1] is placed in the notched hole [3] at the rear panel. If not, perform the adjustment. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
[3]
[2]
Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit.
[1]
[4]
[5]
8050fs1087
1-142
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 4. Remove a screw [2] for the belt detection gear fied position. Then, fix the detection gear [1] at the specified position. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[2]
8050fs1088
1-143
I ADJUSTMENT
[1]. Place the paper eject belt arm at the speci-
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/U

A. Procedure 1. Turn on the main body. Once the finisher completes its initial operation, turn off the main body. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Check whether the actuator [2] for the alignment HP sensor/U (PS708) [1] is aligned with the home position.
[1] [2]
8050fs1089
5. Check whether the clearance A for the alignment plate/U [1] is within the standard value. Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5mm (in to in) If not, perform the following adjustment.
A=340.6
mm
[1]
PS708
8050fs1090
1-144
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 6. Loosen 2 screws [1]. Align the rear side of the center of the marking lines [3]. Then, adjust the front side of the alignment plate/U [4] to be within the standard value based on the rear side.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[2] [1] [3]

8050fs1091
1-145
I ADJUSTMENT
alignment plate/U [2] with the long line at the
[4]
[1]
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L (only for FS-215)
A. Procedure 1. Check whether "Adjustment of the position of FNS alignment plate/U" has been completed. 2. Turn on the main body. In the 47 mode, use one of the following codes to drive a motor and turn off the main body. Code 75-8: alignment motor/U (M705) home position search Code 75-21: alignment motor/L (M716) home position search Code 75-39: stopper motor (M718) moves to the A4R or larger position 3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 4. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 5. Remove the stapler unit cover. 6. Check whether the actuator for the alignment HP sensor/U (PS708) is aligned with the home position. 7. Check whether the actuator [3] for the alignment HP sensor/L (PS724) for the alignment plate/L [1] is aligned with the home position.
[1] [2] [3]

8050fs1092
1-146
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 8. Place a sheet larger than A4R in the stacker plate/U (rear) [1] and alignment plate/L (rear) [2] by placing a sheet [3]. Check whether the space A between the alignment plate/L (rear) [2] and the alignment plate/L (front) [4] is within the standard value. Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5mm (in to in) If not, perform the following adjustment.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[4]
[2]
A=340.6
mm
8050fs1093
9. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of the alignment plate/L [2] to be within the standard value.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
8050fs1094
1-147
I ADJUSTMENT
section and check the position of the alignment
[3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling)

Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause the teeth to skip between the belt and gear). A. Procedure 1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it is performed within the standard value. Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at rear) [1]: A = 8.5 3mm Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at front) [2]: B=8.5 3mm Standard value for the flat stapling [3]: C= B=8.5 3mm (In the flat stapling, the paper edge and the line [4] connecting 2 staples must become parallel) If not, perform the following adjustment. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stapler unit cover.
B=8.5 3mm
[1]
A=8.5 3mm
[2]
[3]
C=8.5 3mm
[4]
8050fs1095
1-148
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 5. Loosen the adjustment screws [3] for the the position of the flat-stapling stopper [5] based on the mark [4]. 6. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it is performed within the standard value.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[5]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4] [4] [3]

8050fs1096
1-149
I ADJUSTMENT
clincher/F [1] and the clincher/R [2] and adjust
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction

A. Procedure Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause the teeth to skip between the belt and gear). 1. Perform a stapling operation to check for the clinch failure. Buckled staple-needles [1] Floating stapling [2] (standard value: L = 1mm or less) Height of belt staple-needle [3] (standard value: L = 0.7mm or less) If there is a failure, perform the following adjustment. Note: Adjust the clincher or stapler if it is replaced or removed. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stapler unit cover. 5. Remove the cartridge [1], open the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet [3] by sliding it.
[1]
[2]
L=1mm
[3]
L=0.7mm
8050fs1097
[1] [3]
[2]
1-150
8050fs1098
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 6. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler positionthe hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then close the cover [5]. 7. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[5] [3] [2]
[4]
8050fs1099
8. Loosen 4 screws [3] for the clincher/F [1] and the clincher/R [2].
[1]
[2]
[3] [1] [2]
[3]
[3]
8050fs1100
1-151
I ADJUSTMENT
ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 9. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2
I ADJUSTMENT
guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2] into the holes [5] on the clincher [4]. Note: The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be hooked on the clincher.
[2]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2] [3]
8050fs1101
1-152
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 10. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler downward. plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Rotate the gear [1] downward further. Then, place the plate [2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into the clincher unit [4]. 11. Tighten 4 screws for each clincher. 12. Remove the jig by rotating the gear for the stapler upward. Note: Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the clincher when removing the stapler positioning jig. 13. Remove the cartridge and plate. Then, replace the staple sheet removed at the step 5. Replace the cartridge. 14. Check the operation of the stapler.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[3] [2]
[4]
[1]
8050fs1102
1-153
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the position of the clincher [4] for the
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FS-215)
A. Procedure Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip between the belt and gear). 1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether the paper edge and the line [2] connecting 2 staples [1] becomes parallel [3] and the discrepancy L is within the standard value. Standard value: discrepancy L = 1mm or less If the discrepancy is not within the standard value, perform the following adjustment. 2. Check whether "adjustment of the position of FNS alignment plate/U" and "adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L" has been complete. 3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 4. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 5. Remove the stapler unit cover. 6. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the alignment plate/L [1].
8050fs1103
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050fs1104
1-154
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7. Adjust the position based on the mark [3] to paper to be horizontal. 8. Tighten the 3 screws, then perform a stapling operation to check whether the stitch-and-fold position is within the standard value.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[3] [2] [3]

8050fs1105
1-155
I ADJUSTMENT
make the upper edge [1] and lower edge [2] of
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FS-215)
Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip between the belt and gear). Never loosen the screw [1] that must not be removed.
[1]
8050fs1106
A. Procedure 1. Perform a folding operation with A3 paper to check whether the discrepancy at the folding edge is within the standard value. Standard value: A = 1mm or less If the discrepancy is not within the standard value, perform the following adjustment. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stapler unit cover.
8050fs1107
1-156
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 5. Loosen 5 screws [2] for the folding stopper [1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Note: Never loosen the screw [4] that must not be removed. 6. Tighten the 5 screws [2], then perform the folding to check whether the discrepancy is within the standard value.
[4] [2] [1] [3]

8050fs1108
1-157
I ADJUSTMENT
and adjust the angle based on the mark [3].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FS-215)

A. Procedure 1. Perform the followings to change the pressure of the folding roller. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stacker unit cover. 5. Change the positions of each 2 pressure springs [3] at front [1] and rear [2]. Note: The 4 pressure springs [3] must be hooked on the hook holes with same symbol.
A B
[3]
C B A
[1]
C B A C B A
[3]
[2]
8050fs1109
1-158
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
A. Procedure 1. Check whether "adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper" has been completed.
Folding position a b c
Standard value A4R 95mm 101mm 101mm 8.5 x 11R 89.4mm 95mm 95mm
Specification 2mm 2mm 2mm

a c
2. Perform a three-folding operation to check whether the three-folding position is within the specification. If it is not within the specification, perform the following adjustment. 3. Turn on the main body, adjust the first folding position (standard value a) in "Finisher adjustment" "Three-holding position adjustment" in the 36 mode. Then, perform the three-folding for confirmation. 4. Once the first folding line is adjusted within the specification, open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 5. Open the three-folding guide plate [1], loosen 2 three-folding stopper screws [2], and then adjust the position of the three-folding stopper [4] based on the mark [3]. 6. Tighten the 2 screws [2], then perform the threefolding to check whether the three-folding position is within the standard value.
b
8050fs1110
[3]
[2] [4] [2] [1]

8050fs1111
1-159
I ADJUSTMENT
9.18 FNS adjustment of the threeholding position (only for FS-215)
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position

A. Procedure Note: This adjustment is performed only if the position between the drive belt and the gear is displaced during another adjustment by mistake. 1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 2. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 3. Remove the following parts. Rear cover Stapler unit cover 4. Insert the stacker unit. 5. Loosen 2 screws (M3) [2] for the staple slide pulley/B [1] from the rear side with the hexagonal wrench [3]. 6. Move the stapler and clincher simultaneously toward center until they contacts with the bearing. Note: Make sure to move them simultaneously. The flat-stapling stopper may be damaged at the metal frame of the stapler if they are moved individually.
[1] [2]
[3]
8050fs1112
1-160
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7. Remove the cartridge [1] for the stapler/R, open [3] by sliding it.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1] [3]
[2]
8050fs1113
8. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler positioning jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then close the cover [5]. 9. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler/R.
[1]
[5] [3] [2]
[4]
8050fs1114
1-161
I ADJUSTMENT
the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 10. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2
I ADJUSTMENT
guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2] into the holes [5] on the clincher [4]. Note: The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be hooked on the clincher.
[2]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2] [3]
8050fs1115
11. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler/R downward. Adjust the horizontal position of the clincher [4] for the plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Then, adjust the horizontal position of the stapler/R and the clincher/R. Then, rotate the gear [1] downward further. Place the plate [2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into the clincher unit [4]. Note: Do not loosen the screws for the clincher at this time. The stapler/R and the clincher/R must be finely adjusted if the position is not matched.
[3] [2]
[4]
[1]
8050fs1116
1-162
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 12. Insert the stacker with the jig attached (with the for the staple slide pulley/B from the rear side. 13. Pull out the stacker unit. Then, remove the jig by rotating the gear for the stapler upward. Note: Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the clincher when removing the stapler positioning jig. 14. Remove the cartridge for the stapler/R and plate. Replace the staple sheet removed at the step 7 and replace the cartridge. Then check following 3 stapling operations. 1-staple (at rear) 1-staple (at front) 2-staple 15. Replace the rear cover and the stapler cover.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
1-163
I ADJUSTMENT
plate and the jig joined). Then, tighten 2 screws
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism

A. Procedure 1. Measure the length between the folding face [1] and trimming surface [2] and calculate the parallelism. Then, check whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: parallelism = A-B = 1mm or less If not, perform the following adjustment.
A
[1]
[2]
8050fs1117
2. Open the front door [1]. 3. Push up the pressure release lever [2]. 4. Loosen the screw [3]. Then adjust the conveyance guide plate [5] based on the mark [4]. 5. Tighten the screw [3].
[2] [1]
[5]
[4] [3]
8050fs1118
1-164
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Perform this adjustment when the positioning correction cannot be done (the mis-centering amount exceeds the automatic adjustment range of 5mm) even if "Printer centring adjustment (tray 4)" in the 36 mode, has been performed. A. Procedure 1. Print the test pattern No.16 to check the miscentering amount. 2. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 3. Open the top cover [2]. 4. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the top of LCT. Then, slide the guide plate/front [4] and the guide plate/rear [5] in the same direction at the same amount.
[4]
[3]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1064
1-165
I ADJUSTMENT
9.21 LCT tray adjustment
mis-centering
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 5. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the center positioning
I ADJUSTMENT
bracket [1] at the bottom of LCT. Then, slide the guide plate in the same direction at the same amount with step 4 6. Tighten the 2 screws [2]. 7. Replace the LCT and print the test pattern No.16 again. 8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the mis-centering amount becomes within the automatic adjustment range.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1065
1-166
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.22 LCT skew adjustment

Perform the LCT skew adjustment when the paper skew is different with paper supplied from the other tray in such case as LCT is placed on the inclined surface. However, it has just a little effect because all paper is corrected at the second paper feed section. A. When all printouts are skewed: 1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous copy mode to check the skew amount. 2. Open the front door of the LCT. 3. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the positioning bracket [1] at the bottom of the LCT. 4. Adjust the position of the positioning bracket [2]. 5. Tighten the 2 screws [2].
[1]
[2]
8050fs1066
1-167
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS B. When some printouts are skewed:
I ADJUSTMENT
1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous copy mode to check the skew amount. 2. Open the top cover [1]. 3. Loosen 6 screws [2] at the top of LCT to loosen the guide plate/front [3], the guide plate/rear [4], and the guide plate/right side [5]. 4. Tighten the 6 screws at the position where each guide plate is in contact with paper. Reference: The size indicator on the guide plate is approximately 2mm wider than the actual standard size paper. It may cause the skew for some paper. The skew amount is reduced if paper is fixed with each guide plate in tight.
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2] [5]
8050fs1067
1-168
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Perform the LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment when the no feed jam occurs at the paper feed. Note: The weight plate (P/N:13FG4062*) is a supply part. It should be purchased separately. A. Procedure 1. Open the top cover [1]. 2. Remove the spring [2]. 3. Install the weight plate [4] on the paper feed roller [3] with 2 screws [5]. 4. Replace the spring [2]. 5. Close the top cover. 6. Perform the continuous copy to check the paper feed. 7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 if the no feed jam continues to occur at the paper feed.
[5]
[4] [2]
[3]
[1]
8050fs1068
1-169
I ADJUSTMENT
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment

Perform the LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment when the paper feed jam occurs frequently or the up/down wire is replaced. A. Procedure 1. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 2. Open the top cover [2]. 3. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the front and rear side. 4. Position the mark [5] to make the up/down plate to be horizontal with 2 adjusting screws [4] at the front and rear side. 5. Tighten the 4 screws [3].
[5] [2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[5]
8050fs1069
1-170
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Perform the LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment when a no feed jam or a double feed jam occurs at the paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment). A. Procedure 1. Remove LCT from the main body. 2. Check the adjusting spring mechanism [2] from the top left side of the LCT (paper exit side) [1]. 3. Change the spring hook position [2] depending on the symptom. The load of the spring changes approximately 10% for a change in its position. Note: Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom. For example, a no feed jam becomes a double feed jam. Weak: Double feed jam is corrected. Strong: No feed jam is corrected.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1070
1-171
I ADJUSTMENT
9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment

Perform the LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled paper. The adjustment is performed by changing the vertical position of the upper limit sensor (PS109). A. Procedure 1. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 2. Open the top cover [2]. 3. Measure the height of the entrance guide upper surface [3] and up/down plate upper surface [4] with a scale to check whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: 2 to 5mm Perform the following adjustment if it is not within the standard value or the edge of the fed paper is folded even if it is within the standard value. Note: This adjustment affects the pick-up release amount. When the adjustment is complete, perform "9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment". 4. Remove the sprint [6] from the paper feed unit [5]. 5. Remove 4 screws [7]. 6. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [8] toward right.
[6]
[5] [3] [1] [4]
[2]
[8]
[7]
8050fs1071
1-172
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 7. Loosen a screw [1]. to make the height of the entrance guide upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface to be within the standard value. If it is not within the standard value and the height of the up/down plate has to be raised: When paper with a convex curl is fed: Lower the position of the sensor mounting bracket If it is not within the standard value and the height of the up/down plate has to be lowered: When the edge of the fed paper is folded: When paper with a concave curl is fed: Raise the position of the sensor mounting bracket 9. When the adjustment is complete, tighten a screw [1].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
8050fs1072
1-173
I ADJUSTMENT
8. Move the sensor mounting bracket [2] vertically
[1]
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment

Perform the LCT pick-up release amount adjustment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. The adjustment is performed by changing the horizontal position of the paper feed solenoid (SD100). A. Procedure 1. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 2. Open the top cover [2]. 3. Remove the sprint [4] from the paper feed unit [3]. 4. Remove 4 screws [5]. 5. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [6] toward right.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
8050fs1073
1-174
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 6. Pull the moving section of SD100 (paper feed the paper feed roller [2] and the upper surface of the up/down plate [3] to check whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: 0.5 to 2.5mm Perform the following adjustment if it is not within the standard value. 7. Loosen a screw [4].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[2]
[1]
[3]
Note: Before starting the operation, note the original position of the solenoid. 8. Move the paper feed solenoid (SD100) [1] horizontally to make the distance between the paper feed roller and the upper surface of the up/down plate to be within the standard value. 9. Tighten the screw [4] for the paper feed solenoid.
[4]
8050fs1074
1-175
I ADJUSTMENT
solenoid) [1] and measure the distance between
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
Blank page
1-176
ISW
II
SERVICE TOOL
1.2
Note:
Installing the USB driver for ISWTrns
1. ISW
1.1 Description of the ISW
It is requierd to install the USB driver for ISWTrns to perform ISW via USB on this machine. See the installation procedure file attached to ISWTrns for the installation procedure. turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] [Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and press the OK button. Only ISWTrns is supported for ISW in this machine. Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to
ISW (In-system Writer) is an operation to rewrite the control program stored in the flash ROM on a variety of control boards in Konica's digital copier without removing the boards from the main body of the copier. ISW allows you to update the version of the control program without replacing the board or to install the latest program when replacing the board. [ISWTrns (PC software)] is provided to execute ISW, which rewrite the program by connecting a PC to the digital copier. The software rewrites the control program stored in the flash ROM in the copier main body directly. This chapeter only describes the set up procedure on the main body for executing ISW. See the "Konica ISW (In-System Writer) Service Handbook" for information on operating the ISWTrns.
2-1
II SERVICE TOOL
ISW
1.3
1.3.1
Setup
Board used for the ISW
B. HELP + CHECK mode The HELP + CHECK mode is started when the main switch (SW2) is pressed while pressing "HELP" and "CHECK button." This mode is designed specifically for ISW to be started when the overall control program is installed but the operation board control program is not installed because the 25 mode cannot be started in such case. C. 25 mode The 25 mode is available only if both the overall control program and the operation board control program are installed.
ISWTrns supports the following boards for rewriting the control program in 8050. Overall control board (OACB) Printer controller board (PRCB) Operation board/1 (OB1) RADF control board (DFCB) FNS control board (FNSCB) See IP SHB for the printer controller. ROM replacement is needed for boards other than the above. 1.3.2 Data flow
II SERVICE TOOL
The following shows the ISW data flow. PC OACB OB1 PRCB DFCB FNSCB
Note: The control program on other boards cannot be written until that for the overall control board (OACB) is written. 1.3.3 ISW transfer type
The copier supports three ISW transfer modes as follows. A. Power ON mode The power ON mode is used if no program is installed on the overall control board (OACB) or it is faulty. If no program is installed on OACB, the OACB program becomes possible to be written at power ON. No display appears on the operation panel and the timer LED flashes even if the operation board control program is installed because the OACB controls the power for the operation board.
2-2
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 1.3.4 Instances of ISW transfer
ISW
A. When writing a new program (because replacing a board or failed to rewrite the program) Normal startup display ISW transfer method Overall control board Operation board /1 Flashing timer LED No display on the operation panel Error code display Power ON mode Condition Overall control program is not installed or faulty
but the operation board program is not installed or faulty Both the overall control program and the operation board program is installed
Others
Error code display
25 mode
B. When updating the version of the program Normal startup display ISW transfer method Overall control board Operation board /1 Others Normal Normal Normal 25 mode 25 mode 25 mode Condition All program has been installed
2-3
II SERVICE TOOL
HELP + CHECK mode
The overall control program is installed
ISW 1.3.5 Setup procedure Note:
Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to A. Connecting a PC a. Procedure turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] [Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and press the OK button. B. Power on mode a. Procedure
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover/2 [2].
[1] II SERVICE TOOL
1. Turn ON the main switch (SW2). 2. Check the timer LED is flushing. The control program becomes possible to be written in this state. 3. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "Konica ISW (In-System Writer) Service Handbook." Note: Do not turn OFF the copier while writing the ISW data is being rewitten. 4. The operation screen appears if it is completed
[2]
[1]
8050fs2012
successfully. If it is terminated abnormally, see "E. The relationship between ISW resulting operation and the operational LEDs."
2. Connect either of IEEE1284 port [1] or USB (Type B) port [2] to the PC via a cable.
C. HELP + CHECK mode a. Procedure
1. Turn ON the copie while pressing "HELP" and "CHECK button." 2. "ISW write mode select menu screen" Press 1 (PC) with the numeric keys.
ISW WRITE MODE SELECT MENU
1.PC
[1] [2]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
9.EXIT
8050fs2040
2-4
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 3. "ISW device select menu screen" Select 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) with the numeric keys. Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0 (PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
ISW DEVICE SELECT MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. GRAPHIC CONTROL PRINTER CONTROL OPERATION CONTROL ADF VIF [MODE:PC]
ISW 6. "ISW executing screen" Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "Konica ISW (In-System Writer) Service Handbook." "Result screen" appears once ISW is complete.
EXECUTING
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
0. PREVIOUS
9. EXIT
Note: Rewirte programs other than 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) in the 25 mode because this mode does not support them. 4. "Operation control - item select menu screen" Select an item from 1 - 5 to rewrite it individually or select 6 (ALL) to rewrite all items at a time. Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0 (PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
OPERATION CONTROL - ITEM SELECT MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 01 02 03 04 05 [MODE:PC] PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT *** NORMAL END ***
7. "Result screen" The operation is completed successfully "NORMAL END" appears.
The operation is terminated abnormally "ABNORMAL END" appears. Check the error code on the screen if the rewriting is terminated abnormally.
0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT *** ABNORMAL END *** INPUT DEVICE ERROR (ERROR CODE : XX)
6. ALL
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
5. "ISW start screen" Select 1 (YES) to start ISW. Select 2 (NO) to cancel.
OPERATION CONTROL - 01 [MODE:PC]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY ISW START OK ?
0. CONTINUE
9. EXIT
8. Select 0 (CONTINUE) to continue ISW or select 9 (EXIT) to exit. "PLEASE TURN OFF A POWER SUPPLY" appears when pressing 9, then tunrn OFF the main switch (SW2).
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
1. YES
2. NO
2-5
II SERVICE TOOL
ISW b. Error code Causes
Error code 01 1F 41 42 43 81
No. of resulting operation (1) (1) (2) (2) (2) (3) (5) (5) (8) (6) (9) (9) (4) (4) (4) (4) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (4)
Error in the instruction against the ISW processing unit Program error Input data format error (at ISW for the operation board program) Model name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) Board name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) Input device error such as the input time out (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM erasing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) Flash ROM writing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) ROM check sum error (at ISW for the overall control program) Output device error such as the input time out Erase error Write error Communication error I/F communication parameter error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F command sequence error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F communication timeout error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM error (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM verify error (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM write error (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM erase error (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive checksum error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive header code error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive parity error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive framing error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive overflow error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
II SERVICE TOOL
C1 C2 C3 C4 E1 E2 E3 E9 EA EB F0 F1 F2 F3 F8 F9 FA FB FC
Resulting operations (1) The program is not operating normaly. Turn OFF and ON the main switch (SW2) and then start ISW again. (2) Check the ISW transfer data file. (3) Check the connection of the communication cable from the input device (PC). (4) Check I/F between the overall control board and the operation board. (5) The flash ROM on the overall control board is faulty. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the flash ROM on the overall control board may be faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace the overall control board.
2-6
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (6) An error is detected from the board on which you want to rewrite the program. Check the board on which you want to execute ISW. (7) The flash ROM on the operation board/1 is faulty. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the flash ROM on the operation board/1 may be faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace the operation board/1. (8) The checksum calculated after the program is written does not become equal to the ROM checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file may not be downloaded properly. (9) It cannot write/erase data to/from area on which ISW is executed. The flash ROM may be faulty or have reached its life. Replace the object board. The checksum calculated after the program is written does not become equal to the ROM checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file may not be downloaded properly. Note: If an error occurs during rewriting the program on the overall control board, the operation panel cannot be displayed even if the main switch is ON because the program controlling the whole components has been lost. Execute ISW in the power ON mode if such is the case. If an error occurs during rewriting the program on the operation board/1, it cannot be started in the 25 mode because the error code is displayed. Execute ISW in the HELP + CHECK mode if such is the case. a. Procedure D. 25 mode
ISW
1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [11 ISW] key. 3. "ISW mode menu screen"
4. Pressing the [Start] key, cause the machine to be data waiting condition. Note: See "C. HELP + CHECK mode" since selecting "Operation panel" switches to the HELP + CHECK mode. 5. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "Konica ISW (In-System Writer) Service Handbook." Note: Do not turn OFF the copier while rewriting the ISW data is being witten.
2-7
II SERVICE TOOL
Select a program for which ISW is executed.
ISW E. The relationship between ISW operation and the operational LEDs The following shows the display of the operation panel in the power ON mode with ISW executed. No. 1 2 3 CPU initialization During memory check Memory check error (waiting data from PC) ISW processing (receiving data) ISW processing (writing to flash ROM) Transfer data error Flash ROM write error Memory check successful and reboot Operation
Timer LED OFF OFF Blink OFF OFF Blink Blink OFF
Power save LED OFF OFF OFF Blink Blink Blink Steady lit OFF
II SERVICE TOOL
4 5 6 7 8
2-8
INTERNET ISW
2. INTERNET ISW
2.1 What is the Internet ISW?
The Internet ISW is the system to perform ISW, by indicating ISW using the Internet mail (E-mail) or browser to let copier automatically acquire the subject program from program server and rewrite its own program. With this Internet ISW, you can update copier's programs just by transmitting E-mail with simple keyword described, without visiting customer's office. With the Web function, you can perform the ISW on customer site, without carrying the actual programs with you.
2.2
Operating environment
To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must be satisfied. A. The copier is connected to a built in network where programs can be downloaded from the Internet using ftp or http protocol. *1 B. The Internet ISW does not function in copier under the following conditions. (1) The reset switch (SW1) is OFF. (2) The main switch (SW2) is OFF. (3) The copier is shut OFF by the auto shut off function. *1 Programs can be downloaded using Firewall. Note: The Internet ISW does not function even if the copier receives the Internet ISW designating mail, as long as it is in any of the above conditions. The Internet ISW starts when the above conditions are released. However, the mails are able to have period of validity. The Internet ISW continues to function in the condition of a paper jam or SC occurs, or in the low power mode.
2.3
Main features
With the Internet ISW, the following functions are available. A. Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system *2 By sending simple keywords to a copier by E-Mail, the programs in the copier are rewritten automatically. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. *3 (1) Overall control board (I) (2) Printer control board (C) (3) Operation board /1 (O) (4) RADF control board (F) (5) FNS control board (N)
* *
2 3
To use the function, the E-Mail remote notification system must be setup separately. The available boards are different depending on the copier models. B. Internet ISW using Web utility By accessing copier main body's homepage via PC web browser, programs in the copier are rewritten automatically. To use the function, a Web terminal that is networked to the copier is necessary. *4
In case it is connected to a LAN, it can only be used within the LAN. 2-9
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
2.4
Initial setting
To use the Internet ISW, the related settings such as network parameter, program server address, firewall address must be performed in the copier main body beforehand. Also, to use the [1.1 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system], the related settings such as account registration must be set on the mail server separately. For the details, please refer to "3. Mail remote notification system". 2.4.1 Setting on Control panel
II SERVICE TOOL
First, set the copier's IP address on the control panel, to network the copier. If it has already been set, go to "2.4.2 Setting on Web brouser". a. Procedure 1. Select "Key operator mode" on the control panel. 2. Select "[1] System initial setting". 3. Select "[3] IP address setting". 4. Enter [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address]. *5 5. Reboot the copier.
*
Copier's IP address, etc. are usually assigned by the system administrator. For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator.
2.4.2
Setting on Web browser
Next, set the program server, etc. from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, prepare a networked PC *6.
*
Prepare a PC by borrowing customer's PC or carrying laptop PC, for example. (Considerations) In any setting item, space cannot be set. If there is a mistake in input process on the Web browser, be sure to correct it according to error message displayed. If the mistake is left without correction, program download error may occur. Web's layout may change without prior notice.
2-10
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 a. Procedure 1. Start the Web browser. *7
INTERNET ISW
2. Specify the copier's IP address that you have entered at "2.4.1 Setting on Control panel". If you access the copier's http address, the [Main page] as the top figure on next page appears.
*
If proxy is set on the web browser, it may not be able to access the copier's http address (web page). For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator. As Web browser, Internet Explorer or Netscape is recommended. Do not perform setting from two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web Utility Main Page 3. On the [Main page], click the [Environment setup], to display [Login to Environment setup] page.
Login window to Environment setting
2-11
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
4. On [Login to Environment setup] page, enter the key operator password (the same password as key operator mode password) and click Apply. The environment setup list appears. Then click [Extension for maintenance].
II SERVICE TOOL
Environment setup screen 5. On [Login to Extension for maintenance] page, enter the password (the same password as mode change menu password) and click Apply. The environment setting list appears. Then click [Internet ISW].
Login window to Extension for maintenance
Extension for maintenance screen
2-12
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 6. Click [Initial Setting].
INTERNET ISW
Internet ISW main screen 7. Set proxy server. When you don't use proxy server (firewall), go to Step 9.
2-13
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
Enableproxy
Select [no] if you do not use proxy Select [Use ftp proxy] if you use ftp proxy Select [Use http proxy] if you use http proxy
Proxy server Type *8
If you selected [Use ftp proxy] for [Use of proxy], select the type of proxy from the following. Type1 [USER USER@HOST] Type2 [OPEN HOSTNAME] Type3 [FW USERNAMEFW PASSWORDSITE HOSTNAME]
II SERVICE TOOL
Type4 [FW USERNAMEFW PASSWORDUSER USER@HOST] Proxy server IP Address Port Number User name on the proxy server Password for the proxy server
*
If you use proxy server, enter the IP address of the proxy server. If you use proxy server, set the port No. that is used by the proxy server. If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set an account name for the proxy server. If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set a password for the proxy server.
Types 2, 3 and 4 are not guaranteed. When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen. If all are fine, click [Next]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. 8. Set the program server. (Proxy server is used)
2-14
INTERNET ISW
Program server address
Enter the address of the server where programs to download are stored. Select the protocol you use from the drop down list at the left and enter the following address in the test box at the right. In case of ftp, it is the relative path from the home directory. Example: ftp://210.226.5.5/EUR/8050/
User name on the program server Password for the program server Receiving time out
Enter the account name of the program server. Enter the program server password. Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes) If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen. If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. 9. Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)
Protocol Program server IP Address Target directory
Select a protocol to receive programs. Enter the IP address of the server where programs to download are stored. For http, enter path that follows the host domain. For ftp, enter the relative path from the home directory. Example: EUR/8050/
User name on the program server Password for the Program server Receiving time out
Enter the account name of the program server. Enter the program server password. Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes) If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
2-15
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen. If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. 10. Perform the download test. This test downloads "test.dat" from the program server set in the initial setting, to ensure all items have been set appropriately. If the download test fails, check the setting items again according to the error message. When the test finished successfully, the communication speed and estimated download time are displayed as shown below. Draw upon the data to decide [Reception timeout].
II SERVICE TOOL
2-16
INTERNET ISW
If the download test fails, response error code sent from the server is displayed as follows. There may be input errors. Check the initial setting again.
2-17
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
2.5
2.5.1
Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system

Function
Customer engineer sends an E-mail with simple keyword description. Then, the copier that received the mail downloads specified program from the program server and rewrites its program. This function is executed by a different command (keyword) from the list print acquisition function of the [EMail remote notification system]. A. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. (1) Overall control board: I0 (2) Printer control board: C0 (3) Operation board /1: O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5 (4) RADF control board: F0 (5) FNS control board: N0 B. You can acquire version information of programs to be rewritten. C. You can find out how to use [Internet ISW] by mail. To use the above functions, it is necessary to send the copier E-mail with the specified simple keyword (command) description. The following are the commands and the options. Command ISW Option Subject board name Description Specifies name of a board to ISW. (must be entered) The specifiable boards are as follows. [I0, C0, O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5, F0, N0] The available boards are different depending on models. File name can be specified with "=" as [Subject board name=File name]. Timeout Specifies period of validity of mail. (From 5 to 1,440 minutes. Unit is minute. If none is specified, timeout takes place at 90 minutes.) When the time from mail transmission by CE to mail reception at copier exceeds the specified period, ISW is not performed due to expiration. ISWHELP Returns a help mail with the above command use descriptions. When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set beforehand. I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 bootO0.bin bootO1.bin bootO2.bin bootO3.bin bootO4.bin bootO5.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin
II SERVICE TOOL
2-18
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 2.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail
INTERNET ISW
The following is an example of transmitting an E-mail with the aforementioned command to a copier. You can use either upper and lower case characters when typing a command (option) in E-mail. *9 When transmitting an E-mail to a copier, take care of the following. The ISW-designated mail has the period of validity. Therefore, set the date of mailer and time zone of the copier *10 accurately. One mail can be described with only one ISW command. If two or more commands are described, the second and later ones are ignored. With the mail software in use, transmit mails in text mode. (Commands in mails in HTML mode cannot be handled correctly.) Place at least one space or TAB *11 between command and option, and option and option described in mails. Type every command in mails only with alphanumeric one-byte characters (ASCII characters). If other characters *12 are typed, an error mail with [Command not found] is returned. Type every command in mails from the line head. Line head starting with a space or TAB is ignored. Do not attach files or others to the mails transmitted to copiers. Depending on the size of files, such mails may be handled as illegal mails and copier may refuse to receive. Do not type signatures in the mails transmitted to copiers. If auto signature addition is set on the mail software, turn off the setting. Signatures may be handled as commands and error mails may be returned from the copier.
* * * *
9 10 11 12
Case sensitivity is on for the file name. Take care when typing. Set in the E-mail transmission setting for [E-mail transmission setting]. Linefeed is not available. Two-byte characters also cause errors. Take care not to use them.
(1) Transmitting ISW command The transmission mail must have the following descriptions. In Subject, type a CE password that has been entered in the mail reception setting. For the details, please refer to the "3. E-Mail remote notification system". In To, type mail address of a copier. In Body, type a command.
2-19
II SERVICE TOOL
Any mail software can be used. For example, mobile device mail, browser mail and so on.
INTERNET ISW An example of I0 ISW:
Copier's mail address
Password for authentication II SERVICE TOOL
Command
An example of return mail (ISW start) *13 When the copier allows the ISW, it moves into the ISW mode, displaying [Remote ISW executing] on the operation panel. The copier cannot be used while it is in the ISW mode. *14 Then, a mail like the following is returned from the copier.
13 14
The return mail is in English regardless of the language selected for the copier's main body operation panel display. During the ISW, main switch (SW2) of the copier does not function. The copier cannot be shutdown.
2-20
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 An example of return mail (ISW complete)
INTERNET ISW
When ISW completes and copier reboots automatically, a mail like the following is returned from the copier. You can confirm that the ROM version is upgraded.
However, if transmission of the above two kinds of return mails fails, the mails are not retransmitted. When specifying a file name When specifying a file name for ISW command, type the name with "=" following the subject board name. In this case, "65FAI012UGH0.bin" must exist in the program server address that has been set in the Internet ISW setting. Transmission mail ISW I0 = 65FAI012UGH0.bin 30 When transmission mail exceeds the period of validity On ISW command, period of validity (timeout) can be changed set for every mail. (Default: 90 minutes) If period from the mail transmission to mail reception at copier (duration) is longer than the timeout period, ISW is not performed by that mail.
2-21
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW Transmission mail
II SERVICE TOOL
5 minutes is set for timeout
Return mail
Timeout took place as 6 minutes had passed.
2-22
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (2) Transmitting ISWHELP command Manual that shows how to use command is returned by mail. It is useful if you forget how to use command and options. Transmission mail ISWHelp Return mail
INTERNET ISW
2-23
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
2.6
2.6.1
Internet ISW using Web utility

Function
Using the copier's web utility, just by clicking on the browser *15, customer engineer can let the copier automatically download programs from the program server and rewrite its own programs. The boards of which programs can be rewritten are the same as those of [Internet ISW using E-mail remote notification system].
*
15
Usually, it is not possible to access company-inside copier from outside exceeding firewall. How to use
II SERVICE TOOL
2.6.2
A. Going to Internet ISW page The same as instructed in "2.4 Initial Setting", go to the [Internet ISW] page on the Web browser.
Internet ISW main screen Next to each board name, the program version is displayed.
2-24
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 B. Performing ISW
INTERNET ISW
From the [ISW] items, select a board to ISW and check the box. When specifying a name of file to download, type the name in the text box of [File name]. When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set beforehand. I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 When the above input completes, click [ISW]. C. Starting ISW When ISW starts, the following screen appears. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. bootO0.bin bootO1.bin bootO2.bin bootO3.bin bootO4.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin
ISW execution screen When ISW completes successfully, the copier automatically reboots. If you click [Check status], you can check the current ISW status. If you click [Cancel], you can stop the ISW only while program is being downloaded
2-25
II SERVICE TOOL
bootO5.bin
INTERNET ISW D. Checking ISW status
II SERVICE TOOL
ISW status check screen This screen shows the current performance or error. The display items are as follows.
*
ISW is downloading ISW is writing Finished *16 ISW was cancelled due to transferring problem ISW was cancelled due to transferring overtime ISW was cancelled due to writing problem to flash memory Copier reboots after ISW completes normally. Do not click [Refresh] on the browser.
16
E. Ending ISW When ISW completes and copier reboots, ensure that the program version is upgraded on the [Internet ISW main screen].
2-26
INTERNET ISW
2.7
2.7.1
Precautions for use

Prior announcement to administrator
When performing the Internet ISW, be sure to contact the copier's administrator or the like and get his/her agreement beforehand. Perform ISW in condition that the copier is not being used. If the copier is being used (a job is being processed), the Internet ISW is not performed. 2.7.2 If power failure occurs during data rewriting
While ISW rewriting is in progress *17, the operation panel and main switch (SW2) are locked. However, if the main power goes down due to power failure or other, the copier becomes unable to start up. *18 This is only the problem on rewriting the overall control board and the operation board/1. Even if errors occur on rewriting other boards, the boards can be overwritten again with the Internet ISW. If the copier becomes unable to start for the above reason, go to the copier's site and rewrite the program using the ISWTrns. <How to recover> Overall control board : Turn ON the main switch (SW2) and then perform ISW. Operation board /1: Turn ON the main switch (SW2) while pressing HELP and CHECK button and then perform ISW. For the details, please refer to "1. ISW"
* *
17 18
Rewriting takes maximum 10 minute. No problem is cased by power failure during program downloading process. ISW of multiple programs
2.7.3
It is not possible with the Internet ISW to ISW several programs concurrently. Always perform ISW one by one. If several programs must be rewritten at the same time, perform ISW from board of higher priority. *19 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 RADF control board (F), FNS control board (N) Printer control board (C), Operationboard/1 (O) Overall control board (I)
When rewriting several programs, SC may occur during rewriting intervals between programs. However, such SC will clear when all the subject programs are rewritten.
*
19
In case of the Internet ISW using the E-mail remote notification system, the sequence of transmitted ISW designating mails and mails received by copier may change. Transmit multiple mails while ensuring reception of completion mail or putting enough intervals.
2.7.4
If ISW fails in low power mode
If ISW fails due to errors in program download, data check, and so on, the copier recovers into normal mode. Only in low power mode, the copier reboots when ISW fails.
2-27
II SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
2.8
2.8.1
Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW

What is a proxy server?
It is a server that receives request (HTTP or FTP etc) from a client inside the firewall, and represents the client. With this server, access to outside the firewall is enabled. 2.8.2 Authentication of proxy server
II SERVICE TOOL
Following are the lists of commands of each authentication type: All the 4 types below are supported in the Internet ISW. 2.8.3 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server
The following shows the brief description of each authentication type and the list of commands being used. A. Type 1: USER user@host This type does not require an authentication to the proxy sever when accessing outside via proxy. In case it is possible to access outside via proxy server without entering user name and password of the proxy server, this type may be used. Command Command USER PASS Parameter user@host password Reply Code 331 230 Description Sends user name of the program server and program server's address Sends password for the above user name
B. Type 2: OPEN host It is almost the same as Type 1. The only difference is a command at the authentication. Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 1. Command Command OPEN Parameter host Reply Code ftp expanded function: Defined by each server USER PASS user password 331 230 Sends user name of the program sever Sends password for the above user name Description Sends program server's address
2-28
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 C. Type 3: FW user FW password SITE host This type requires an authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing outside.
INTERNET ISW
It is necessary to enter information of the server that you wish to access, user name and password of the proxy sever (firmware). In case the user name and password of the proxy server are required when accessing outside via proxy sever, this type may be used. Command Command USER PASS SITE Parameter FW user FW password host Reply Code 331 230 ftp expanded function: Defined by each server USER PASS user password 331 230 Sends user name of the program sever Sends password for the above user name Description Sends password for the above user name Sends program server's address Sends user name of the proxy server
D. FW user name FW password USER user@host It is almost the same as Type 3. The only difference is a command at the authentication. Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 3. Command Command USER PASS USER PASS Parameter FW user FW password user@host password Reply Code 331 230 331 230 Description Sends user name of the proxy server Sends password for the above user name Sends user name of the program server and program server's address Sends password for the above user name
2.8.4
Remarks For fwtk2.1 (for unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), authentication Type 1 is used. Type 1 is used in many proxy servers. If you are not sure about the authentication type of the proxy server, KC recommends that you use Type 1 in the meantime.
2-29
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
3. MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

3.1 What is the Mail remote notification system?
Mail remote notification system allows to acquire machine data, that have been available as "List Output Mode" in 36 mode from copier, through internet mail (E-mail). This function is achieved without visiting customer site and printing on paper if the simple keyword is e-mailed.
3.2
II SERVICE TOOL
Operation environment
Following conditions should be satisfied in order to use mail remote notification system. The function works during JAM, SC or Low power mode, but does not work during shut-off. However, the sent mail does not disappear and the copier process the mail after next starting up. During low power mode, the machine operation is as usual. A. The mail server *1 that allows copier to receive mail in POP3 or IMAP protocol. (It is preferred that mail server can receive external mail and service constantly.) B. The mail server *2 that allows copier to transmit mail in SMTP protocol. (It is preferred that mail server can send external mail and service constantly.). C. Mail remote notification system disabling conditions on copier are as follows. (1) Main power switch is OFF. (2) Sub power switch is OFF.
*
1 2
qpopper, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. Assign one account per one copier. It can be the same machine to the SMTP server. "Mail remote notification system" corresponds to "POP before SMTP". Sendmail 8.9, qmail, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. It can be the same machine to the receiving server.
3.3
Initial setting
In order to use Mail remote notification system, settings such as network parameter on copier and account registration on mail server are necessary. A. Setting on operation panel In order to connect the copier main body to network, IP address of the copier should be set on operation panel. If it is already set, please go to "B. Setting on Web. a. Procedure 1. Select [Key operator mode] on operation panel. 2. Select [1. System initial setting]. 3. Select [3. IP address setting]. 4. Input [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]*1. 5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
*
System administrator usually assigns IP address and network related setting to copier. Please ask system administrator for details.
2-30
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 B. Setting on Web
Next, input setting for mail server from Web browser. Please use PC*2 connected to the network in order to use Web browser.
*
2 Note:
Prepare PC; borrow the customer's one or bring notebook computer.
No blank space should be entered for any column. Following characters cannot be used for the E-mail address. When the error message is displayed on the web browser, correct the input error following to the message. If the error is not corrected, mail sending or receiving may fail. Web design is subject to change without notice. (1) How to set a. Procedure 1. Start up Web browser *1. 2. Type IP address of the copier you input to the [A. Setting on operation panel]. When accessing Web, the [main page] (see upper figure in next page) is displayed.
*
If proxy is set on Web browser, it may not possible to access web utilities of copier. Please ask system administrator for details. KC recommends to use Internet explorer or Netscape as the Web browser. Do not perform setting from the two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web utilities main page 3. In [Main] page, click [Environment Setup] button and display [Environment setup log in] page.
2-31
II SERVICE TOOL
()<> ;:"[]
II SERVICE TOOL
Environment setup log in page 4. Input key operator password in [Environment setup log in] page, then click [Apply]. [Environment set up] page is displayed. Then click [E-Mail transmission setting]. Even key operator password set "0000" in 25-mode setting, input "0000".
Environment setup page 5. Set the transmission setting. In order to use Mail remote notification system, registration of E-mail address of manager (machine administrator), and sending (SMTP) server input is mandatory. Manager Address *1 DNS Server IP Address Time difference *1 To specify E-mail address of machine manager. The e-mail address to notify error from SMTP. Input as needed. If not needed, leave it blank. The send time of mail is calculated referring this value. Input the time difference from UTC within the range -1200 (12h00min) to +1200 (+12h00min). If setting is not made, it is +0000 (the same as UTC). For example, the time difference in New York is -5 hours, - 500 is input. 2-32
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Sending mail (SMTP) sever *1 Condition Informing Address *1 E-Mail Transmission *1 *1 *2
The IP address of SMTP sever. It is for mail transmission system. *2 You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used. It is for mail transmission system. *2 You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
The same setting can be set on LCD of the copier. But do not set concurrently from web browser and Web. Please see the "INSTRUCTION MANUAL" of copier if use the mail transmission system.
E-Mail transmission setting page 6. Click [Apply] button to finish input.
2-33
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM (2) Test mail sending
Click [Sending test] button and then a test mail is sent to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [Manager address] set on Step5. Click [Sending test] to display result of the test mail. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message. a. Procedure 1. Set the reception setting. In the [Extension for maintenance] column at the bottom of the page, input the password to change the mode then click the initial setting. Use the password for changing modes.
II SERVICE TOOL
Extension for maintenance page (for customer engineer) The records of sent and received mails listed on mail log on the [Extension for maintenance] page are the latest 10 mails. Even the main power switch is turned OFF, the communication is logged and kept though there are some restrictions.
2-34
E-Mail reception setting page 2. Set the e-mail reception screen based on the following. Enable E-mail notification Interval between fetching mails Select [Yes] to use Mail remote notification system. Default is [No]. Interval between checking mail on receiving mail server from copier. The interval can be set within the range from 1 min. to 60 min. Usually, set around 10 min. considering load for network. Receiving mail server Kind of mail spool User name on the server *1 Password *2 E-Mail Address of this copy machine Nickname *3 CE Password *2 The IP address of receiving mail server. Select [POP3] or [IMAP]. Default is [POP3]. The account name for copier assigned on receiving mail server. The password for the above user name. E-mail address of the copier. Usually, the name is [User name@receiving mail server name]. The name added to the mail subject sent from the copier. It can be blank. Input password used for the "Subject" of the mail sent to the copier. The copier uses this password for security check. Also Notice to the administrator (CC mail) - No - Only illegal mails - All mails Default (Do not send the e-mail to the administrator) Specify whether to transfer mail in following conditions; When the mail received by copier does not match to the registered password or the mail size is 10 k-byte or larger. Transfer all sending mails from Mail remote notification system.
2-35
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM Administrator E-Mail address
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Input address for the transfer if above [Only illegal mail] or [all mails] is selected.
Announce delay time in reply mail *4 Select whether to contain the time difference from CE`s transmission and copier reception on the mail. Default is [No]. Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP Select whether SMTP server transmits the mail after POP (IMAP) server attests. Default is [Yes].
*
1 2 3
Consult system administrator and create mail account for copier on receiving mail server. No echo back from the password. Use it as identifier, when managing multiple copiers. Use it to check the copier. is turned ON or not. If the time of the copier or the mail application software is not set correctly (including time difference), wrong time is described. In that case, select [No]. 3. Click "Apply" to finish input. 4. Test mail sending and receiving. Click [Sending and receiving test] button and then sending and receiving tests are performed by one transaction. It checks whether the sent mail is correctly received. Click [Sending and receiving test] to display result of the test. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message.
II SERVICE TOOL
* *
*4
Sending mail test
Mail sending test is performed to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on Step2.
Receiving mail test
Receiving test from receiving mail server is performed. Test mail is received by [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on Step2.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
2-36
3.4
How to use the Mail remote notification system
A. Function CE can use following functions of Mail remote notification system by e-mailing simple keyword to copier. CE can receive the data of the desired copier data list by the e-mail. JOB memory list User management list Font pattern list Adjustment data list Parameter list E.K.C. management list Machine management list 2 Counter list Pixel ratio data list In order to use above function, the simple keyword (command) must be sent by e-mail. The following table shows the command and options. Command GETLOG Options [List output] JOB USER FONT MANAGEMENT ADJUSTMENT PARAMETER EKC 2MANAGEMENT COUNTER PIXEL ALL Not specified CHPASS [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] HELP Not specified Specify current password Specify new password Help mail explaining usage of the above commands is sent. H Explanation The [List output] specified by the following is returned by mail. [JOB memory list] [User management list] [Font pattern list] [Machine management list 1] [Adjustment data list] [Parameter list] [EKC management list] [Machine management list 2] [Counter list] [Pixel ratio data list] All of above list data. Edited [Counter list] for the cellular phone display. To change the password used to certify mail. C J U F M A P E 2 C PI AL Minimum G Machine management list 1
2-37
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM B. Send mails
The example of the mail containing the command to the copier is shown. The command and option on the mail are recognized by the top letters without distinction between capital and small letters. Accordingly, not all letters of the command must be typed. It is recognized by the minimum letters in the above table *1. When sending mail to the copier, please note followings. Note: Mail software on any OS, handy terminal, free-mail using browser can be used without any difference. When sending mail on mail software, be sure to use text mode. (Mail in HTML mode cannot be handle properly.) As for the reception on mail software, the desirable maximum displayable letters per one line is 128 and over (single-byte). (The length of the one line reaches to 128 letters in the part of the data list mail. Accordingly, mail may not be easily seen on the cellular phone or other mobile devices.) Put minimum one space or TAB*2 between the command and option on the mail. Use only single-byte alphanumeric character (ASCII character) for the command on mail. Otherwise, an error mail, [Command Not Found], is returned. Type command from the beginning of the line. If the line starts with blank or TAB, the line is ignored. Maximum number of commands that can be contained in one mail is 10. The eleventh and onwards commands are ignored. Do not attach file to the mail sent to the copier. Depending on file size, it is handled as illegal mail. Do not attach signature to the mail sent to the copier. If automatic attachment of the signature is already set to the mail software, change the setting not to attach the signature. The signature is regarded as command and error mail may be returned. While copier is sending or receiving the mail, if the power switch of the copier is turned OFF or list output is performed on the copier, two mails may be returned. The maximum number of the mails that copier receives from the mail server is 5 per one time. If the mail server has more received mails at a time, remaining mails are processed after the [interval between fetching mails].
* *
II SERVICE TOOL
1 2
Example: All of G, GE, GET, GETL, GETLO, GETLOG equal to specify GETLOG. Return cannot be used.
2-38
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (1) Send GETLOG command Following should be described in the sending mail. a. Subject: Input "CE password" set in reception setting. To: Input E-mail address of the copier. Body: Input command. Example of mail requesting counter list
Mail address of the copier CE Password Command
2-39
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM b. Example of mail requesting counter list*1
II SERVICE TOOL
Serial number of copier Mail address of the sender Nickname of the copier
Requested counter list
Language of the returned mail is English only.
2-40
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 c. When option is not specified
GETLOG command without option is specified, Counter list for the cellular phone display is returned. Sending mail [GetLog] Example of returned mail
2-41
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM d. To receive multiple data list
Data lists in reply to GETLOG command are separately returned by mails; one list per mail. If the same list is requested twice or more in a mail, the list is returned only once. When followings are described in a mail, both counter list mail and machine management list 1 mail are returned. [GetLog Counter] [GetLog Management] When the commands are written in one line continuously, Management (the later command) is
II SERVICE TOOL
ignored and only counter list (the first command) is returned. [GetLog Counter Management] e. When unrecognizable option is specified. Sending mail [GetLog Log] Returned mail [Option Not Found GetLog Log] (2) Send CHPASS command The sending mail password described on the subject can be changed remotely. Specify 20 or less letters to [OldPasswd] and [NewPasswd]. Use ASCII characters except space. Password cannot be changed by mail if you don't remember the old password. Change the [CE password] from the browser, explained in Chapter 2. a. Example of correct password change In this case, old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios]. Sending mail [ChPass U-BIX Sitios] Returned mail [SE's Password was changed successfully. New Password [Sitios]] When the password is changed, use [NewPasswd] from the next mail. When the mail is sent with [OldPasswd], it is treated as illegal mail.
2-42
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 b. Example of invalid password change Old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios]. Sending mail [ChPass Sitios U-BIX] Returned mail [Old Password is Invalid. ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Then, password was not changed. Accordingly, the password is unchanged and [U-BIX]. Sending mail [ChPass Sitios] Returned mail [Violation on format by new password. ChPass Sitios] When the new password is blank, password is not changed.
2-43
II SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM (3) Send HELP command
The manual describing above usage of the commands is returned by mail. Use this function when you forget how to use command and option. Sending mail [Help] Returned mail
II SERVICE TOOL
2-44
3.5
Disabling system
In order to disable Mail remote notification system, in Mail reception setting, select [No] for the "Enable E-Mail notification" and then click [Apply] button.
2-45
II SERVICE TOOL
II SERVICE TOOL
Blank page
2-46
SERVICE SCHEDULE
III SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.1 Service schedule
Guarantee period (5 years or 5,000,000 copies)

Service item 0 Main body Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 200,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 400,000 copies Periodic check (3) Every 600,000 copies Periodic check (4) Every 1,000,000 copies Periodic check (5) Every 1,500,000 copies Periodic check (6) Every 2,000,000 copies Periodic check (7) Every 2,500,000 copies Periodic check (8) Every 4,000,000 copies DF-319 *1 Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) *1 Every 1,800,000 copies x 10,000 copies 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Service 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count
49 times 24 times 12 times 8 times 4 times 3 times 2 times 1 time 1 time 49 times 2 times
*1
Perform the periodic check (1) for the DF-319 at 2 times (18,000,000 copies and 36,000,000 copies).
3-1
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Service item 0 LT-211 Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 600,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 2,500,000 copies FS-115/ Maintenance 215 Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 200,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 400,000 copies

x 10,000 copies 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Service 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count
49 times 8 times 1 time 49 times 24 times 12 times 4 times 1 time 49 times 9 times 4 times 1 time 49 times 49 times 1 time
III SERVICE
Periodic check (3) Every 1,000,000 copies Periodic check (4) Every 2,500,000 copies PI-110 Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 500,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 1,000,000 copies Periodic check (3) Every 3,000,000 copies PK-120 Maintenance Every 100,000 copies TU-109 Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 4,000,000 copies
3-2
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2
Maintenance items
A. Main body (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Preparations (1) Image check Drum (1) Drum cartridge (2) Drum unit cleaning 4 Setting powder Hydro wipe (cleaning pad is not available) 4 Blower brush 1 4 Hydro wipe (cleaning pad is not available) 1 1 ( ) Materials Tools used
Charging corona
(1) Charging wire assy /Y, /M, /C, /K (2) Changing grid plate / Y, /M, /C, /K (3) Charging corona dustproof filter
Developer
(1) Developer (Y, M, C, K) (2) Developer unit cleaning
ADU
(1) Separation corona unit (2) Paper feed roller /BP (3) Feed roller /BP (4) Double feed prevention roller /BP (5) Registration roller cleaning (6) Conveyance roller section cleaning (7) ADU paper through sensor cleaning
Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Blower brush 1 2 1 1 1 Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240) Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240) Roller cleaner 1 *1
Exterior
(1) Ozone filter /1 (2) Dust proof filter /1 (3) Dust proof filter /2
Fixing
(1) Fixing roller /U *2 (2) Fixing roller /L *2 (3) Cleaning roller
9 *1 *2
Reverse/ exit
(1) Decurler roller 25 mode count reset
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode to prevent the fixing jam when replacing the decurler roller. When replacing the fixing roller /U or /L, be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM on the heat insulating sleeve /U or /L, respectively.
3-3
III SERVICE
Transfer belt
(1) Belt cleaning blade
SERVICE SCHEDULE No. Classification Service item Quantity
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Materials Tools used Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Hydro wipe/drum cleaner/blower brush Hydro wipe/drum cleaner/blower brush Hydro wipe Hydro wipe ( ) Hydro wipe
10 Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller /1, /2, /3 (2) Feed roller /1, /2, /3 (3) Double feed prevention roller /1, /2, /3 11 Vertical conveyance 12 Scanner 13 Write unit 14 Toner supply 15 Toner correction (1) Conveyance roller, sensor (1) Original glass, exposure lamp, reflector, lens, mirror, sensor (1) Dust-proof glass (Y, M, C, K) (1) Toner supply unit cleaning (1) Toner correction box replacing/cleaning (2) Exterior cleaning
16 Final check (1) W.U.T. check Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner
III SERVICE
(3) Image and paper through check (4) PM counter resetting (25 mode)
B. DF-319 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Preparations (1) Paper through check 1 Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller (2) Feed roller (3) Double feed prevention roller (4) Pre-separation rubber (5) Rubber roller (6) Reflective sensor (7) Conveyance belt 2 3 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Blower brush Blower brush Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Materials Tools used
Final check (1) Paper through check
3-4
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 C. LT-211 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 Service item Quantity
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
Materials Tools used Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Blower brush
Preparations (1) Paper through check Paper feed (1)Paper feed roller (2) Feed roller (3) Double feed prevention roller (4) Paper dust removing (5) Sensor (6) Gear ( ) Plus guard No.2 *1 Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
3 4
Exterior
(1) Exterior cleaning
D. FS-115 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 3 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Preparations (1) Paper through check Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller Drive (1) Main drive unit (2) Tray up/down drive unit (3) Shift drive unit (4) Paper exit drive section (5) Staple unit 4 5 6 *1 Stapler Exterior (1) Staple check (1) Exterior cleaning ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Actual durable count: 5,000 Materials Tools used
Final check (1) Paper through check If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
3-5
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE E. FS-215 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 3 Service item Quantity
Materials Tools used Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
Preparations (1) Paper through check Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller Drive (1) Main drive unit (2) Tray up/down drive unit (3) Shift drive unit (4) Paper exit drive section (5) Staple unit (6) Folding unit ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Actual durable count: 5,000 Stapler positioning jig
Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1
4 5 6 7
Folding Stapler Exterior
(1) Folding roller (1) Staple check (1) Exterior cleaning
Final check (1) Paper through check If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it. PI-110 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
III SERVICE
*1 F.
No. Classification 1 2
Materials Tools used Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller Paper feed (1) Feed roller (2) Paper feed conveyance roller (3) Double feed prevention roller
Final check (1) Paper through check (2) Exterior cleaning
3-6
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 G. PK-120 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 3 Service item Quantity
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Materials Tools used Blower brush Blower brush Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
Punch unit (1) Punch die Punch scraps section (1) Punch scraps dump (2) Punch scraps full sensor (2) Interior cleaning
H. TU-109 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller (2) Conveyance belt 2 Trimmer (1) Trimmer blade /U (2) Trimmer blade /L (3) Trimming box and its periphery 3 4 5 Stacker Drive (1) Pusher section (2) Stacker section (1) Conveyance drive section (2) Exterior cleaning *1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it. Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner ( ) ( ) Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Materials Tools used Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
3-7
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3
Periodic check items (main body)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Charging corona Service item (1) Changing grid plate 65AA2507* (2) Changing grid spring 65AA2509* 2 Transfer belt (1) 1st transfer roller /K 65AA2604* 25 mode count reset (2) 1st transfer roller /C 65AA2612* 25 mode count reset (3) 2nd transfer roller /U 65AA2611* (4) Belt drive roller cleaning (5) Transfer belt 65AA2642* (6) Toner collection sheet /1 65AA-293* 3 4 2nd transfer (1) 2nd transfer roller /L 65AA4501* Fixing (1) Fixing cleaning unit 65AA-573* 25 mode count reset 1 1 1 *2 1 Quantity 4 8 *1 1 1 3 1 Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Materials Tools used
III SERVICE
*1 *2
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" to prevent a image disturbances in the 25 mode when replacing the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C/K. Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mod when replacing the fixing cleaning unit. Otherwise, the message "You need to replace the fixing cleaning unit. Please call the service." appears and the copy/print prohibition state is started.
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity 3 3 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Feed rubber (tray/1, /2, /3) 25SA4096* (2) Double feed prevention rubber (tray/1, /2, /3) 25SA4096* Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 125,000 Actual durable count: 125,000
3-8
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 C. Periodic check (III) (Every 600,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Charging corona Developer Transfer belt Service item (1) Charging corona dustproof filter 65AA-387* (1) Developer unit /Y, /M, /C, /K 65AA-300* (1) Transfer belt separation claw 65AA-287* (2) Belt cleaning unit 65AA-288* 4 Registration (1) Registration cleaning sheet 65AA-462* Fixing (1) Ball bearing /U 45407504* (2) Ball bearing /L 26NA5371* (3) Heat insulating sleeve /U 45405339* (4) Heat insulating sleeve /L 65AA5341* (5) Fixing torque limiter 65AA5365* Quantity
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Materials Tools used
1 4 3 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
2 3
Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 Fixing Service item (1) Fixing drive gear 65AA7727* Quantity 1 1 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Materials Tools used Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)
2nd transfer (1) Transfer ground plate unit 65AA-456*
E. Periodic check (V) (Every 1,500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 2 3 Service item Quantity 1 1 1 1 Actual durable count: 125,000 Actual durable count: 125,000 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Registration (1) Registration roller 65AA4601* Transfer belt ADU (1) Separation claw solenoid 26NA8251* (1) Feed rubber /BP 25SA4096* (2) Double feed prevention rubber /BP 25SA4096* Materials Tools used
3-9
III SERVICE
Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)
SERVICE SCHEDULE F. Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,000,000 copies/prints) Service item Quantity
No. Classification 1
Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000
Vertical (1) Intermediate conveyance conveyance clutch /1 56AA8201* ADU (1) Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 56AA8201* (2) Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 56AA8201*
G. Periodic check (VII) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Fixing Service item (1) Fixing upper lamp /1 65AF8303* (2) Fixing upper lamp /2 65AF8304* (3) Fixing lower lamp 65AF8305* (4) Fxing temperature sensor /3 65AA-553* (5) Fxing temperature sensor /4 65AA-554* 2 Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller (tray/1, /2, /3) 56AA-458* Quantity 1 1 1 1 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Materials Tools used
III SERVICE
1 Actual durable count: 800,000
3-10
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 H. Periodic check (VIII) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 800,000
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch (tray/1, /2, /3) 56AA8201* (2) Pre-registration clutch (tray/1, /2, /3) 56AA8201*
ADU
(1) ADU conveyance clutch /1 56AA8201* (2) ADU conveyance clutch /2 56AA8201* (3) ADU pre-registration clutch 56AA8201* (4) Paper feed roller /BP 65AA-520* (5) Paper feed clutch /BP 56AA8201*
1 1 1 1
1.4
Periodic check items (DF-319)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,800,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity 1 1 1 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller 13YH4064* (2) Feed roller 13YH4039* (3) Double feed prevention roller 13YH4066* Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 625,000 Actual durable count: 625,000 Actual durable count: 625,000
1.5
Periodic check items (LT-211)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 600,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity 1 1 1 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller 55VA-484* (2) Feed roller 55VA-483* (3) Double feed prevention roller 55VA-483* Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 500,000 Actual durable count: 500,000 Actual durable count: 500,000
3-11
III SERVICE
Actual durable count: 2,000,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE B. Periodic check (II) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity 1 1
Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch 56AA8201* (2) Pre-registration clutch 56AA8201*
1.6
Periodic check items (FS-115/215)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Conveyance (1) Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 122H4825* (2) Intermediate conveyance roller /4 (sponge roller) 13QE4531* 10 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 200,000 Actual durable count: 200,000
III SERVICE
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Conveyance (1) Stack assist roller (sponge roller) 20AK4210* 1 Materials Tools used
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Stapler Service item (1) Stapler unit 20AK4241* Quantity Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement 2 Materials Tools used Stapler positioning jig Actual durable count: 200,000
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Drive Service item (1) FNS up/down motor 13QE-115* Quantity 1 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,500,000
3-12
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.7
Periodic check items (PI-110)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity 2 2 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /B 50BA-575* (2) Double feed prevention roller assembly 13QN-443* Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 100,000 Actual durable count: 100,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity 2 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /A 50BA-574* Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 200,000
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 3,000,000 copies/prints)0 No. Classification 1 Service item Quantity 2 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Paper feed (1) Torque limiter 13QN4073* Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 600,000
1.8
Periodic check items (TU-109)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification 1 Trimmer Service item (1) Trimmer blade /U 13LHK001* (2) Trimmer blade /L 13LHK002* Quantity 1 1 Implementation classification Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 500,000 Actual durable count: 500,000
3-13
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.9
Note:
Replacement parts list
No. in this list is identical with No. in "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode. No. Unit Parts name Toner collection box Ozone filter /1 Dust proof filter /1 Dust proof filter /2 Charging corona dust-proof filter Drum cartridge /Y Drum cartridge /M Drum cartridge /C Drum cartridge /K Charging wire assy /Y Charging grid plate /Y Charging wire assy /M Charging grid plate /M Charging wire assy /C Charging grid plate /C Charging wire assy /K Charging grid plate /K Charging grid spring Transfer belt 1st transfer roller /Y 1st transfer roller /M 1st transfer roller /C 1st transfer roller /K 2nd transfer roller /U Transfer belt separation clawfff Belt cleaning brush unit Toner cllection sheet /1 Belt cleaning blade 2nd transfer roller /L Separation Discharging board unit Fixing cleaning unit Fixing roller /U Fixing roller /L Parts No. 65AA-245* 65AA1043* 65AA1044* 65AA-142* 65AA-387* 65AA-200* 65AA-200* 65AA-200* 65AA-200* 65AA-252* 65AA2507* 65AA-252* 65AA2507* 65AA-252* 65AA2507* 65AA-252* 65AA2507* 65AA2509* 65AA2642* 65AA2612* 65AA2612* 65AA2612* 65AA2612* 65AA2611* 65AA-287* 65AA-288* 65AA-293* 65AA2630* 65AA4501* 65AA-452* 65AA-573* 65AA5301* 65AA5302* Quantity Actual durable count 001 Toner correction 002 Main body 004 005 006 Charging corona 007 Drum 012 017 022 028 Charging corona 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 50,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 600,000 600,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 100,000
III SERVICE
029 031 032 034 034 037 038 040 Transfer belt 041 042 043 044 045 046 048 049 050 051 2nd transfer 052 ADU 053 Fixing 054 055
3-14
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 No. Unit Parts name Developer /Y Developer /M Developer /C Developer /K Developing unit /Y (color label included) Developing unit /M (color label included) Developing unit /C (color label included) Developing unit /K (color label included) FNS up/down unit Stapler unit Stapler unit Staple Staple Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) 078 PI-110 079 080 081 083 084 085 086 087 TU-109 087 092 DF-319 093 095 113 Registration 112 Fixing unit 114 115 116 Vertical conveyance 117 ADU 118 Feed roller assembly /A Feed roller assembly /B Double feed prevention roller assembly Torque limiter Feed roller assembly /A Feed roller assembly /B Double feed prevention roller assembly Torque limiter Trimmer blade /U Trimmer blade /L Paper feed roller Feed roller Double feed prevention roller Registration cleaning sheet Fixing torque limiter Ball bearing /U (for upper roller) Heat insulating sleeve /U (for upper roller) Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 13QN4073* 13LHK001* 13LHK002* 13YH4064* 13YH4039* 13YH4066* 65AA-462* 65AA5365* 45407504* 45405339* 13QN4073* 50BA-574* 50BA-575* 13QN-443* 50BA-574* 50BA-575* 13QN-443* Stacking assist roller (sponge roller) Parts No. 65AA3079* 65AA3080* 65AA3081* 65AA3082* 65AA-300* 65AA-300* 65AA-300* 65AA-300* 13QE-115* 20AK4241* 20AK4241* 12QRK001* 12QRK001* 122H4825* 13QE4531* 20AK4210*
SERVICE SCHEDULE Quantity Actual durable count 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 2,500,000 200,000 200,000 5000 5000 200,000 200,000 400,000 200,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 200,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 500,000 500,000 625,000 625,000 625,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000
056 Developing 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 069 FS-115/215 070 071 108 109 110
3-15
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE No. Unit Parts name Paper feed rubber /1 Double feed prevention rubber /1 Paper feed rubber /2 Double feed prevention rubber /2 Paper feed rubber /3 Double feed prevention rubber /3 Paper feed rubber /BP Double feed prevention rubber /BP Paper feed roller /1 Paper feed roller /2 Paper feed roller /3 Paper feed roller (By-pass) Registration roller Separation claw solenoid Fixing upper lamp /1 Fixing upper lamp /2 Fixing lower lamp Fxing temperature sensor /3 Fxing temperature sensor /4 ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU pre-registration clutch Ball bearing /L (for lower roller) Heat insulating sleeve/L (for lower roller) 139 140 Reverse/exit unit 141 LT-211 142 143 144 145 Main body paper feed 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 2nd transfer Fixing drive gear Decurler roller Paper feed roller Feed roller Double feed prevention roller Paper feed clutch Pre-registration clutch Paper feed clutch /1 Pre-registration clutch /1 Paper feed clutch /2 Pre-registration clutch /2 Paper feed clutch /3 Pre-registration clutch /3 Paper feed clutch /BP Transfer ground plate unit
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Parts No. 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 25SA4096* 56AA-458* 56AA-458* 56AA-458* 65AA-520* 65AA4601* 26NA8251* 65AF8303* 65AF8304* 65AF8305* 65AA-553* 65AA-554* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 26NA5371* 65AA5341* 65AA7727* 65AA4905* 55VA-484* 55VA-483* 55VA-483* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 56AA8201* 65AA-456* Quantity Actual durable count 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 800,000 800,000 800,000 800,000 1,500,000 1,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 600,000 600,000 1,000,000 100,000 500,000 500,000 500,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 1,000,000
119 Main body paper feed 119 120 120 121 121 122 122 130 131 132 133 123 Registration 124 Transfer belt 125 Fixing 126 127 128 129 134 ADU 135 136 137 Fixing 138
III SERVICE
3-16
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.10 Important maintenance parts

The important parts specified by Konica in order to maintain safety of the products are referred to as "important maintenance parts". The important maintenance parts for this machine are as described below: No. 1 2 Unit Fixing unit Fixing unit Parts name Parts No. Quantity 1 1 Thermostat /1 SP00-0030 Thermostat /L SP00-0180
Note: "SP" is indicated in front of the parts number of the important maintenance part. Exercise care when installing the parts according to "III. Directions for disassembly and assembly" in this manual.
3-17
III SERVICE
COPY MATERIAL
2. COPY MATERIAL
2.1 Product
A. Drum cartridge
2.2
Materials
A. Single unit supply Drum Toner black Toner yellow Toner magenta Toner cyan B. Kit a Developer black set DV501K (8050) Developer black Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band) b Developer yellow set DV501Y (8050) DR501 (8050) TN501K (8050) TN501Y (8050) TN501M (8050) TN501C (8050)
III SERVICE
Developer yellow Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band) c Developer magenta set
Developer magenta Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band) d Developer cyan set
DV501M (8050)
Developer cyan Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
DV501C (8050)
3-18
COPY MATERIAL
2.3
PM parts kit
A. 100,000 copies/1 set (total) Name Toner collection box Ozone filter /1 Dust proof filter /1 Dust proof filter /2 Belt cleaning blade Separation corona unit Fixing roller /U Fixing roller /L Decurler roller Charging wire assy Paper for fixing speed adjustment (16 sheets/A3) Dust bag (rubber band) Hand case for collection Cotton swab (x4) Hydor wipe (x10) B. 200,000 copies/1set (total) Name Transfer belt 1st transfer roller /K 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C Toner collection sheet /1 2nd transfer roller /U 2nd transfer roller /L Fixing cleaning unit Changing grid plate Changing grid spring Part No. 65AA2642* 65AA2604* 65AA2612* 65AA-293* 65AA2611* 65AA4501* 65AA-573* 65AA2507* 65AA2509* Quantity 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 4 8 Part No. 65AA-245* 65AA1043* 65AA1044* 65AA-142* 65AA2630* 65AA-452* 65AA5301* 65AA5302* 65AA4905* 65AA-252* 65AA-9910 65AA-9920 Quantity 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1
3-19
III SERVICE
SERVICE MATERIAL LIST
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST

Material No. 000V-16-0 Name Drum cleaner Shape Remark 200ml
000V-17-0
Roller cleaner
200ml
000V-19-0
Setting powde
25g
000V-18-1
Cleaning pad
10pcs/1pack
65AA-9920
Hydro wipe
10pcs/1pack
III SERVICE
00GR00260
Multemp grease FF-RM
25g
00GR00210
Solvest 240
Multemp FF-RM is recommended
00GR00020
Plasguard No.2
3-20
CE TOOLS LIST
4. CE TOOLS LIST
Tool No. 65AAJG021 Name Fixing thermostat positioning jig (for upper roller) 65AAJG031 Fixing thermostat positioning jig (for lower roller) 7050K0020 Mirror positioning jig 2 1 Shape Quantity 1 Remark
00M6-2-00
Door switch jig
25TU00480
Color chart (metric)
111T96110
Color chart (inch)
00VD-5000
New Pyramid chart
120A9711*
Adjustment chart
00VC-2-00
Drum cover
00VD-1000
Blower brush
00VE-1004
Tester
129XJG011
Stapler positioning jig
For adjusting FS-115/215
3-21
III SERVICE
CE TOOLS LIST
III SERVICE
Blank page
3-22
JAM CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST

1. JAM CODE LIST
Classification By-pass feed Jam code During operation J10-01 Causes After the pickup solenoid /BP (SD5) is turned ON, by-pass feed feeder sensor (PS26) is not turned ON within the specified time. After no paper sensor /BP (PS47) is turned ON, tray up drive motor /BP (M35) is not turned ON within specified time. J10-03 After the tray up drive motor /BP (M35) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor / BP (PS25) is not turned ON within specified time. During operation When idling J10-11 By-pass feed conveyance sensor (PS26) was turned ON in the idling condition. After the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) is not turned ON within the specified time. If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) was turned ON in the idling condition. Remove the paper from the by-pass feed tray once and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out the paper feed jammed paper, if any. tray /1 and remove Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. Correction Remove the paper from the by-pass feed tray once and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove paper from the by-pass feed tray once, decrease the stacked sheets and set again.
J10-02
During operation When idling
J11-11
Paper feed tray /2
J12-01
After pick-up solenoid /2 (SD8) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) is not turned ON within specified time.
If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Pull out the paper feed tray /2 and remove jammed paper, if any.
When idling
J12-11
Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) was turned ON in the idling condition.
4-1
IV JAM CODE LIST
Paper feed tray /1
J11-01
JAM CODE LIST Classification Paper feed tray /3 Jam code During operation J13-01 Causes After the pick-up solenoid /3 (SD9) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) is not turned ON.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. Pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) was turned ON in the idling condition. Correction Pull out the paper feed tray /3 and remove jammed paper, if any.
J13-11
LT-211
J14-01
After the paper feed solenoid (SD100) is turned ON, paper feed sensor (PS107) is not turned ON within specified time.
Open the LCT top cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
J14-11
Feed sensor (PS106) was turned ON in the idling condition.
Paper feed
J17-01
After the loop roller motor (M31) is turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) is not turned ON within specified time.
Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
IV JAM CODE LIST
J17-02
After the ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) is turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Printer section stops immediately. If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. Open the vertical conveyance door and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out the paper feed tray /2 and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-03
After the pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12) is turned ON, vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON within specified time.
J17-04
After the pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10) is turned ON, vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON within specified time.
4-2
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Paper feed Jam code During operation J17-05 Causes After the the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is After the pre-registration clutch /1 (MC7) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time. J17-07 After the pre-registration clutch (MC102) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time. J17-08 After the intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not turned ON within specified time. J17-09 After the by-pass feed conveyance sensor (PS26) is turned ON, the intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not turned ON within the specified time. LT-211 J17-10 After the pre-registration clutch (MC102) is turned ON, paper feed sensor (PS107) is not turned ON within the specified time. When idling Paper feed J17-11 Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) was turneds ON in the idling condition. Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main completion of paper exit.
JAM CODE LIST Correction Open the vertical conveyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.
not turned ON within the specified time. body stops after
J17-06
Open the LCT front door and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove paper from the by-pass feed tray and remove jammed paper, if any. Open the LCT top cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Open the vertical conveyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-12
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) was turned ON in the idling condition.
J17-13
Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) was turned ON in the idling condition.
J17-14 LT-211 J17-15
Registration sensor (OS22) was turned in the idling condition. Paper feed sensor (PS107) was turned ON in the idling condition. Open the LCT front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
4-3
IV JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST Classification Others Jam code During operation J19-01 Causes Vertical conveyance door open jam. Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51) was turned OFF when copying / printing.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. LCT top cover open jam or LCT front door open jam. Top cover open/close sensor (PS100) or front door open/ close sensor (PS115) was turned OFF when copying/printing. In case of LCT paper feed, main body stops after completion of paper exit. In case of paper feed other than LCT, main body does not stop. Close the LCT top cover or LCT front door. Correction Close the vertical conveyance door.
Others LT-211
J19-02
Paper exit
J31-02
After the registration roller motor (M30) is turned ON, fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is not turned ON.
Printer section stops immediately.
J32-01
After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J32-02
After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is not turned ON within the specified time.
IV JAM CODE LIST
J32-03
In the reverse paper exit mode, after the reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J32-04
After the fixing pape exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
J32-05
After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in straight paper exit mode).
J32-07
After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in reverse paper exit mode).
J32-08
When the registration roller motor (M30) is ON, fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is ON.
4-4
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Paper exit Jam code When idling J32-11 J32-12 J32-13 During operation Others J51-01 Causes Paper exit sensor (PS13) is ON in the idling condition. Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON in the idling condition. Reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is ON in the idling condition. Front door open jam. Front door open/ close sensor (PS18) was turned OFF while copying/printing. Paper feed section cover open jam. Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) was turned OFF when copying. Paper feed tray open jam. Tray open/ close sensor (PS308) was turned OFF when copying. J61-03 Paper exit section cover open jam. Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) was turned OFF when copying. J62-01 Registration sensor (PS301) is not turned OFF within specified time after paper feed is started. J62-02 After reversal of paper feed motor (M301) is started, timing sensor (PS302) is not turned ON within the specified time. J62-03 After the timing sensor (PS302) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. J62-04 After the reverse/paper exit motor (M303) is turned ON, reverse sensor (PS305) is not turned ON within the specified time. J62-05 After the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. J62-06 In the one-sided original exit mode, paper exit sensor (PS306) is not turned ON within the specified time after the start of paper exit. In the double-sided original exit mode, original exit sensor (PS306) is not turned ON within the specified time after the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned ON. Printer section stops immediately. RADF stops immediately. If there is paper in or after transfer process, main body stops after paper exit. Resulting operation
JAM CODE LIST Correction Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
Close the front door.
DF-319
J61-01
Close the paper feed section cover. Close the paper feed tray. Close the paper exit section cover. Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove jammed paper in the main body conveance section, if any.
J61-02
Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove jammed paper in the main body conveance section, if any.
4-5
IV JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST Classification DF-319 Jam code During operation J62-07 Causes After the paper exit sensor (PS306) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation RADF stops immediately. If there is paper in or after transfer process, main body stops after paper exit. When idling Registration sensor (PS301) is ON in the idling condition. Correction Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove jammed paper in the main body conveance section, if any. Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Reverse sensor (PS305) is ON in the idling condition. Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
J65-01
J65-02
J65-03
Timing sensor (PS302) is ON in the idling condition.
Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
J65-04
Paper exit sensor (PS306) is ON in the idling condition.
Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
IV JAM CODE LIST
During operation
Others FS-115 FS-215 Others TU-109 FS-115 FS-215
J71-01
FNS front door open jam. FNS interlock switch (MS701) was turned OFF when copying/printing. TU front door open jam. Front door MS2 (MS2) was turned OFF when copying/printing. After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Close the FNS front door. Close the TU front door.
J71-02
J72-16
FNS/main body stop immediately.
Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
J72-17
After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is not turned ON within the specified time.
J72-18
After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is not turned ON within the specified time (when stapling).
4-6
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification FS-115 FS-215 Jam code During operation J72-19 Causes After the stacker inlet motor (M713) is turned ON, stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is not turned ON within the specified time. After paper exit operation is started, main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is not turned ON within the specified time (when stapling). J72-21 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the large-size staple mode). J72-22 After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is not turned ON within the specified time within the specified time (in the sub-tray paper exit mode). J72-23 After the sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the large-size staple mode). J72-24 After completion of stapling, folding passage sensor (PS726) is not turned ON. J72-25 After the folding knife motor (M719) is turned ON, folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is not turned ON within the specified time. J72-26 After the folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. J72-28 After the stacker inlet sensor (PW705) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. J72-29 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the non-staple mode). J72-30 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the small-size staple mode). Resulting operation FNS/main body stop immediately.
JAM CODE LIST Correction Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
J72-20
4-7
IV JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST Classification TU-109 Jam code During operation J72-32 Causes After the folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is turned ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the inlet sensor (PS101) is turned ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned ON within the specified time. J72-34 After the conveyance motor (M101) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS108) is not turned OFF within the specified time. PI-110 J72-35 After the conveyance clutch /L (MC202) is turned ON, PI passage sensor /L (PS206) is not turned ON within specified time. PK-120 J72-43 After the punch motor (M801) is turned ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not turned ON within the specified time. FS-115 FS-215 PI-110 J72-48 After the folding passage sensor (PS726) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. J72-49 After the conveyance clutch /U (MC201) is turned ON, PI passage sensor (PS201) is not turned ON within the
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation TU/FNS/main body stop immediately. Correction Remove jammed paper in TU/FNS/main body, if any.
J72-33
FNS/main body stop immediately.
Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
IV JAM CODE LIST
specified time. J72-50 After the PI passage sensor (PS201) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time. J72-51 After the PI passage sensor /L (PS206) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time. FS-115 FS-215 J72-81 After the stapler motor /F (M714) and clincher motor /F (M715) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) and clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) are not turned ON within specified time. J72-82 After the stapler motor /R (M709) and clincher motor /R (M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) and clincher HP sensor (PS732) are not turned ON within the specified time.
4-8
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification FS-115 FS-215 Jam code During operation J72-83 Causes After the stapler motor /F, /R (M714), M709), and clincher motor /F, /R (M715, M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F, /R (PS731, PS730) and clincher HP sensor /F, /R (PS733, PS732) are not turned ON within ghe specified time. J72-90 After operation stop signal is transmitted from the main body to FNS, FNS does not stop within the specified time. When idling J73-01 J73-02 J73-05 J73-07 J73-08 J73-09 J73-10 TU-109 J73-11 J73-12 J73-13 PI-110 J73-14 Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is ON in the idling condition. Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is ON in the idling condition. FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is ON in the idling condition. Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is ON in the idling condition. Stacker no-paper sensor (PS720) is ON in the idling condition. Folding passage sensor (PS726) is ON in the idling condition. Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is ON in the idling condition. Inlet sensor (PS101) is ON in the idling condition. Conveyance sensor (PS102) is ON in the idling condition. Paper exit sensor (PS108) is ON in the idling condition. PI passage sensor (PS206) is ON in the idling condition. Resulting operation FNS/main body stop immediately.
JAM CODE LIST Correction Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
Open the FNS front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
Remove jammed paper in the sub-tray, if any. Open the FNS front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
Open the TU frunt door and remove jammed paper, if any.
Remove paper from the cover sheet feeder /L and remove jammed paper, if any.
J73-17
PI passage sensor /U (PS201) is ON in the idling condition.
Remove paper in the cover sheet feeder /U once and remove jammed paper, if any.
During operation
ADU
J92-01
After the reverse paper exit sensor sor (PS21) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Printer section ately.
(PS19) is turned ON, ADU reverse sen- stops immedi-
4-9
IV JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST Classification ADU Jam code When idling J92-11 Causes ADU reverse sensor (PS21) is ON in the idling condition.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Correction Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any. After reversal of ADU reverse motor (M32) is turned ON, ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is not turned ON within the specified time. Printer section stops immediately.
When idling
J93-11
During operation
J93-01
ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is ON in the idling condition.
During operation
J94-02
After the ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is turned ON, ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is not turned ON within the specified time.
When idling
J94-11
ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is ON in the idling condition.
IV JAM CODE LIST
4-10
ERROR CODE LIST
V ERROR CODE LIST

1. ERROR CODE LIST
Note: In the F code area of warning codes, "Contact the Service Section" is indicated and in the E code area, "Turn ON the power switch again" is indicated. On the actual LCD screen, all the indications are SC codes. Classification Abnormality code Main body Communication abnormality Paper feed motor abnormality LT paper feed motor abnormality Paper feed tray abnormality LT-211 F10-10 Causes Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and LT drive board (LTDB) F13-01 M41 abnormality detection signal was continuoudly detected for the specified time when the paper feed motor (M41) was ON. F13-02 M101 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time when the paper feed motor (M101) was ON. F18-01 After the tray up/down motor /l (M40) is turned ON, trau upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) is not turned ON. F18-02 After the tray up/down motor /2 (M39) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS38) is not turned ON. F18-03 After the tray up/down motor /3 (M38) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42) is not turned ON. F18-04 After the tray up/down motor / BP (M35) is turned ON, the tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) is not turned ON within the specified time. Printer control board (PRCB) Trau up/down motor /1 (M40) Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) Printer control board (PRCB) Tray upper limit motor /2 (M39) (PS38) Printer control board (PRCB) Tray upper limit motor /3 (M38) Tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42) Conveyance drive board (CVDB) Tray up/down motor /BP (M35) Tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) Tray upper limit sensor /2 LT drive motor (LTDB) Paper feed motor (M101) Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Printer control board (PRCB) Paper feed motor (M41) Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) LT drive board (LTDB)
Main body
5-1
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code LT up/ down motor abnormality LT-211 F18-50 Causes When the up/down motor (M100) was ON, M100 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F18-51 When the upper limit sensor (PS109) or lower limit sensor (PS101) is OFF, PS101 or PS109 is not turned ON within the specified time after the up/ down motor (M100) is turned ON. LT paper feed assist fan abnormality F18-60 When the paper feed assist fan /R (M137) was ON, M137 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F18-61 When the paper feed assist fan /F (M136) was ON, M136 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. LT power abnormality Main body Communication abnormality F18-70 F18-71 F20-10 24VDC is not supplied to LCT. 12VDC is not supplied to LCT. Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and drum drive board / Y (DRDB /Y) or drum drive board /M (DRDB /M). F20-11 Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and drum drive board / C (DRDB /C) or drum drive board /K (DRDB /K). F20-12 Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and transfer belt motor (M18)
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. LT drive board (LTDB) UP/DOWN motor (M100) Upper limit sensor (PS109) Lower limit sensor (PS101) Estimated abnormal parts LT drive board (LTDB) UP/DOWN motor (M100)
LT drive board (LTDB) Paper feed assist fan /R (M137)
LT drive board (LTDB) Paper feed assist fan /F (M136)
DC power unit /2 (DCPS2) LT drive board (LTDB) DC power unit /1 (DCPS1) LT drive board (LTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y) Drum drive board /M (DRDB /M)
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C) Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)
V ERROR CODE LIST
Printer control board (PRCB) Transfer belt motor (M18)
5-2
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code Precharging exposure lamp abnormality Main body F21-01 Causes Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y) set cannot be detected. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. F21-02 Pre-charging exposure lamp / M (PCL M) set cannot be detected. F21-03 Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C) set cannot be detected. F21-04 Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K) set cannot be detected. Developing motor abnormality F23-01 When the developing motor /Y (M20) was ON, M20 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F23-02 When the developing motor /M (M21) was ON, M21 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F23-03 When developing motor /C (M22) was ON, M22 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F23-04 When the developing motor /K (M23) was ON, M23 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. Drum motor abnormality F23-05 When the drum motor /Y (M14) was ON, M14 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F23-06 When the drum motor /M (M15) was ON, M15 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y)
Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /M (PCL M) Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C) Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /Y (M20)
Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /M (M21)
Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /C (M22)
Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /K (M23)
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y) Drum motor /Y (M14)
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /M (DRDB /M) Drum motor /M (M15)
5-3
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Drum motor abnormality F23-07 Causes When the drum motor /C (M16) was ON, M16 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F23-08 When drum motor /K (M17) was ON, M17 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. Transfer belt unit abnormality F23-09 When the transfer belt motor (M18) was ON, M18 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F23-10 When the 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15) is ON, PS15 is not turned OFF within the specified time after the 1st transfer pressing/releasing motor (M19) is turned ON. When PS15 is OFF, PS15 is not turned ON within the specified time aftr M19 is turned ON. Toner supply abnormality F23-11 When either of the toner supply motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (M49, M50, M51, or M52), toner bottle motor (M53), or toner bottle clutch /Y, /M, /C, /K (MC14, MC15, MC16, or MC17) was ON, either abnormality detection signal was continuously
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K) Drum motor /K (M17) Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C) Drum motor /C (M16)
Printer control board (PRCB) Transfer belt motor (M18)
Printer control board (PRCB) 1st transfer pressing/releasing motor (M19) 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
Printer control board (PRCB) Toner supply drive board (TSDB) Toner supply motor /Y (M49) Toner supply motor /M (M50) Toner supply motor /C (M51) Toner supply motor /K (M52) Toner bottle motor (M53) Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14) Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15) Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17)
V ERROR CODE LIST
detected for the specified time.
L detection abnormality
F27-01
Output of toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y) cannot be controlled.
Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y) Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /M (TDS M) Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)
F27-02
Output of toner density sensor /M (TDS M) cnnot be controlled.
F27-03
Output of toner density sensor /C (TDS C) cannot be controlled.
5-4
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code Main body L detection abnormality High pressure unit abnormality F27-04 Causes Output of toner density sensor /K (TDS K) cannot be controlled. F28-01 When the charging /Y was ON, charging /Y abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F28-02 When charging /M was ON, charging /M abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F28-03 When charging /C is ON, charging /C abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F28-04 When charging /K was ON, charging /K abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F29-01 When the primary transfer Y was ON, primary transfer Y abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F29-02 When the primary transfer M was ON, primary transfer M abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F29-03 When the primary transfer C was ON, primary transfer C was continuously detected for the specified time. F29-04 When the primary transfer K was ON, primary transfer K abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /K (TDS K)
High pressure unit /1 (HV1)
High pressure unit /2 (HV2) 1st transfer roller
5-5
V ERROR CODE LIST
abnormality detection signal
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Process abnormality F29-06 Causes
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /Y Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /M Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /C Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /K Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M) Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K) Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y) Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Gamma sensor (PS11)
Gamma sensor (PS11) improp- Main body erly adjusted while in the Dmax control.
F29-07
Dmax control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
F29-08
Dmax control /M resulted in an abnormality.
F29-09
Dmax control /C resulted in an abnormality.
F29-10
Dmax control /K resulted in an abnormality.
F29-11
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /Y was out of specification.
F29-12
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /M was out of specification.
F29-13
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /C was out of specification.
F29-14
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /K was out of specification.
V ERROR CODE LIST
F29-15
Charging potential control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
F29-16
Charging potential control /M resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M) Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
5-6
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code Main body Process abnormality F29-17 Causes Charging potential control /C resulted in an abnormality. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is F29-18 Charging potential control /K resulted in an abnormality. turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K) Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K)
F29-19
Dot diameter adjustment control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M) Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K) Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Printer control board (PRCB) Gammma sensor (PS11) High voltage unit /2 (HU2) High voltage unit /2 (HU2) Conveyance drive board (CVDB) Printer control board (PRCB) Printer control board (PRCB) Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10) Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37) Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
F29-20
Dot diameter adjustment control /M resulted in an abnormality.
F29-21
Dot diameter adjustment control /C resulted in an abnormality.
F29-22
Dot diameter adjustment control /K resulted in an abnormality.
F29-23
Gamma sensor (PS11) improperly adjusted while in the gamma correction control
F30-01 F30-02 Motor abnormality Fan abnormality F30-10
2nd transfer abnormality Separation abnormality ADU conveyance drive board communication abnormality
F32-01
When the fixing cooling fan /1 and /2 (M10, M36, M37) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time.
F32-02
When the drum unit fan /3 (M47) was ON, M36 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum unit fan /3 (M47) Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
5-7
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Fan abnormality F32-03 Causes When the paper exit fan /F, /M, and /R (M28, M27, and M26) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time. F32-04 When charging air intake fan (M48) was ON, M48 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F32-05 When the drum cooling fan /1 and /2 (M12, M13) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time. F32-06 When the transfer belt cooling fan (M11) was ON, M11 abnormality detection signal was continuoudly detected for the specified time. Motor abnormality F33-01 When the fixing motor (M29) was ON, M29 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F33-02 When the pressure release sensor (PS16) is ON, PS16 is not turned OFF within the specified time after the fixing motor (M29) is turned ON.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Toner supply drive board (TSDB) Charging air suction fan (M48) Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Paper exit fan /F (M28) Paper exit fan /M (M27) Paper exit fan /R (M26)
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum cooling fan /1 (M12) Drum cooling fan /2 (M13)
Printer control board (PRCB) Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Fixing motor (M29)
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Fixing motor (M29) Fixing pressure release sensor (PS16)
V ERROR CODE LIST
When PS16 is OFF, PS16 is not turned ON within the specified time after M29 is turned ON. F33-03 After the 2nd transfer pressing/ releasing motor (M34) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. F33-04 Abnormality of Web motor (M54) or circuit was detected. Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Web motor (M54) Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) 2nd transfer pressing/releasing motor (M34)
5-8
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code Fixing high temperature abnormality Main body F34-01 Causes Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature over 250C was continuously detected for the specified time. F34-02 Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature over 250C was continuously detected for the specified time. F34-03 Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature over 250C was continuously detected for the specified time. F34-04 Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detection temperature over 250C was continuously detected for the specified time. F34-05 Fixing compensation high temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature over 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. F34-06 Fixing compensation high temperature abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature over 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. F34-08 Fixing roller paper seizure abnormality J31-02 occurred 4 continuous times. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
WARNING When F34-**, F35-** or F36-** (fixing temperature related abnormality) occurs, be sure to repair a defective part before setting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0. If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set to 0 without repairing a defective part, this may cause a fire.
5-9
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Fixing low temperature abnormality Main body F35-01 Causes Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected. F35-02 Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. F35-03 Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. F35-04 Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. F35-05 Fixing compensation low temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature under 20C was continuously detected for the specified time. F35-06 Fixing compensation low temperature abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature under 20C was continuously detected for the specified time.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
V ERROR CODE LIST
5-10
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code Main body Fixing sensor abnormality F36-02 Causes Fixing high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detected abnormality signal F36-04 Fixing high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. F36-05 Fixing low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. F36-06 Fixing low temperture hardware abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. F36-07 Fixing low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. F36-08 Fixing low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. F36-09 Fixing compensation high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. F36-10 Fixing compensation low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
continuously for the specified time. turned OFF.
5-11
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Fixing sensor abnormality F36-11 Causes Fixing compensation high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. F36-12 Fixing compensation low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. F38-02 After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature does not reach 150C within the specified time. F38-03 After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature does not reach 150C within the specified time. F39-01 Scanner abnormality F41-01 Fixing section has not been set. At the home position search, scanner HP sensor (PS1) is not turned on within the specified time after the scanner motor (M1) is turned ON. Motor abnormality F41-02 When the polygon motor /Y (M3) is started or when the speed is switched, M3 lock signal is not detected within the specified time.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
WARNING When F34-**, F35-** or F36-** (fixing temperature related abnormality) occurs, be sure to repair a defective part before setting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0. If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set to 0 without repairing a defective part, this may cause a fire. Scanner drive board (SCDB) Scanner motor (M1) Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /Y (M3)
V ERROR CODE LIST
F41-03
When the polygon motor (M4) is started or the speed is switched, M4 lock signal is not detected within the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /M (M4)
F41-04
When the polygon motor /C (M5) is started or the speed is switched, M5 lock signal is not detected within the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /C (M5)
5-12
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code Main body Motor abnormality F41-05 Causes When the polygon motor /K (M6) is started or the speed is switched, M6 lock signal is not detected within the specified time. Scanner abnormality F41-06 When the optical scanning returns, scanner HP sensor (PS1) is not turned ON within the specified time after the scanner motor (M1) is turned ON. Motor abnormality F41-07 Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /Y (M3) was detected. F41-08 Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /M (M4) was detected. F41-09 F41-10 Abnormal polygon motor /C (M5) was detected. Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /K (M6) was detected. F41-11 Temperature detection board (TDB) detected temperature abnormality in writing unit /K. Fan abnormality F42-01 When the write intake fan /1, /2 (M43, M44), and write exhaust fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time. F42-02 When scanner cooling fan (M2) was ON, M2 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /K (M6)
Scanner drive board (SCDB) Scanner motor (M1) Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /Y (M3) Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /M (M4) Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /C (M5) Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /K (M6) Printer control board (PRCB) Temperature detection board (TDB) Printer control board (PRCB) Writing suction fan /1 (M43) Writing suction fan /2 (M44) Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45) Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46)
Scanner drive board (SCDB) Scanner cooling fan (M2)
5-13
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Color registration abnormality Main body F45-01 Causes Color registration base line correction /F resulted in abnormality. F45-03 Colar registration base line correction /R results in abnormality. F45-07 When laser correction motor /Y (M7) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) was turned OFF. F45-08 When the laser correction motor /M (M8) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) was turned OFF, F45-09 When the laser correction motor /C (M9) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) was turned OFF. F45-10 After the laser correction motor /Y (M7) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. Or, laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) installing position is abnormal. F45-11 Laser correction motor /M (MB) is not turned OFF within the specified time after it is turned ON. Or, laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) installing position is abnormal. F45-12 Laser correction motor /C (M9) is not turned OFF within the specified time after it is turned ON. Or, the laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) installing position is abnormal. F45-20 Color registration correction results in abnormality.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Printer control board (PRCB) Color registration sensor /R (PS9) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /Y (M7) Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /M (M8) Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /C (M9) Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /Y (M7) Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Color registration sensor /F (PS8)
Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /M (M8) Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)
Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /C (M9) Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)
V ERROR CODE LIST
Printer control board (PRCB) Color registration sensor /F (PS8) Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
5-14
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code Image processing abnormality Main body E46-01 Causes When scanning the image, sub-scan beam correction APC cannot be applied. Laser does not light up because 12VDC power to drive the beam is not supplied, MPC is not correct, or because of fault laser. E46-02 Address abnormality of FIFO for scanner. When scanning the image, compression of scanned image data is not normally completed. E46-03 Address abnormality of FIFO for printer. Expansion of scanned image data is not normally completed. E46-05 FIFO interrupt error of compression/expansion chip occurred. E46-06 E46-07 Image data expansion abnormality Connection abnormality between A/D conversion board (ADB) and image processing board (IPB) E46-08 Index sensor output does not change by the execution of APC. Index sensor cannot decect the laser because the polygon mirror does not rotate, or because of the index sensor out of position or defective index sensor E46-09 Connection abnormality between index sensor /Y, /M, / C, /K (INDX SB Y, M, C, K) or laser drive board (LDB Y, M, C, K) and image processing board (IPB) Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Writing unit /Y /M /C /K Image processing board (IPB)
Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB)
Image processing board (IPB)
Image processing board (IPB) MU-412 Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB) A/D conversion board (ADB) CCD wiring harness Writing unit /Y /M /C /K Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB)
Writing unit /Y /M /C /K Image processing board (IPB)
5-15
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Image processing abnormality Main body E46-12 Causes After negation of SVV, compression of scanned image and evolution to page memory are not completed. E46-13 When scanning the image, compression process from scanner to memory is not completed within the specified time. Evolution from scanner to page memory is not completed within the specified time. SVV is not detected within the specified time. E46-14 When scanning the image, expansion process from memory to printer is not completed within the specified time. Output from page memory to printer is not completed within the specified time. PVV is not detected within the specified time. E46-15 When scanning the image, access to expansion device or some other improper process took place even though there was no resource. E46-16 When scanning the image, access to compression device or some other improper process took place even though there was no resource.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB)
Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Writing unit /Y /M /C /K
Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
V ERROR CODE LIST
E46-17
When processing the image, filter coefficient cannot be properly prepared.
E46-19
When accessing the memory device, software fault was detected.
5-16
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code Image processing abnormality Main body E46-21 Causes Expansion process from memory to page memory is not completed within the specified time. Compression process from page memory to memory is not completed within the specified time. Evolution from memory to page memory is not completed within the specified time. Compressed data transfer from memoty to memory is not completed within the specified time. E46-23 When scanning the image, SVV is not turned OFF within the specified time and therefore scanning of next page cannot be started. E46-24 Shading correction abnormality (GA abnormality) E46-25 AOC/AGC adjustment abnormality Blocking cover and lens cover of scanner section are out of place. A/D conversion board (ADB) connector is disconnected. ADB power cable is disconnected. ADB IC protector is broken. Quantity of light of exposure lamp (L1) is excess. L1 does not light up. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB)
Image processing board (IPB) Program of image processing board (IPB) A/D conversion board (ADB) Exposure lamp (L1) Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Scanner drive board (SCDB) L1 inverter board (L1INVB)
5-17
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Image processing abnormality Main body E46-26 Causes There is no correstion data which has been reserved by resolution.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Abnormality detection process is performed but no abnormality code is indicated on the operation board and main body continues operation. Abnormality code is indicated only for data collection, list output and KRDS. Estimated abnormal parts Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
E46-31
Before completion of MPC, APC initial sampling was attempted.
Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Image processing board (IPB) ICP program
E46-32
Execution of MPC was attempted during execution of APC.
E46-35
Continuous page imaging range abnormality. Image cannot be evolved on memory due to abnormal image range on memory.
E46-36
When starting APC, PVV was ON (APC was executed during print)
V ERROR CODE LIST
E46-40
Hard disk initialization abnormality. Hard disk failure or improper connector connection.
Image processing board (IPB) Hard disk (HD-106) HDD I/F board (HDD IFB)
E46-41 E46-42
JOB information could not be stored in the hard disk. At the time of automatic hard disk job deletion, route could not be opened.
E46-43
Hard disk access error. Hard disk failure or improper connector connection. 5-18
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code Image processing abnormality Main body E46-58 Causes Software failure. CCD board was replaced but I1ROM version is not compliant. E46-59 A/D conversion board (ADB) bunch or connector is damaged. F46-62 Before completion of paper mis-centering correction, scanning was started (mis-centering correction cannot be completed). F46-63 Since the quantity of light of exposure lamp (L1) decresed, AGC was retried, though no error occurred. F46-64 PWM gammer curve was not properly prepared. Abnormality detection process is conducted but no code is indicated on the operation board and main body continues operation. Abnormality code is indicated only for data collecE46-66 Shift failure at repeat. tion, list output and KRDS. E46-80 E46-81 E46-82 E46-83 E46-90 E46-91 E46-98 E46-99 Message cue was not enough or destructed. Parameter value exceeds allowable range. Message cue sender task has an undefined ID. Message receiving event is undefined. Abnormal access to memory Header address scanning abnormality Page memory cannot be secured for printing. Memory initialization abnormality. Memory may not be correctly connected. Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Image processing board (IPB) ICP program CCP wiring harness of A/D conversion board (ADB)
Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) LCT drive doard (LTDB)
Exposure lamp (L1) Overall control board (OACB) CCD board (CCDB) Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y) Toner density sensor /M (TDS M) Toner density sensor /C (TDS C) Toner density sensor /K (TDS K) Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB) MU-412
5-19
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Communication abnormality E50-01 Causes 12VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal was continuously detected for the specified time. E50-02 24VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal was continuously detected for the specified time after the specified time from REN /2 ON. E50-03 Conveyance drive board (CVDB) 24VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal of 24VDC for CVDB was detected after specified time from REN /2 ON. E50-04 Laser correction motor 5VDC abnormality. Abnormal 5VDC for laser correction motor /Y, /M, and /C (M7, M8, and M9) was detected. E50-05 Conveyance drive board (CVDB) 12VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal of 12VDC for CVDB was detected. E50-10 Line status error and check sum error was detected between the overall control board (OACB) and image processing board (IPB) and demand for re-transmission was sent but recovery could
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. DC power unit /2 (DCPS2) Estimated abnormal parts DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
DC power unit /2 (DCPS2) Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)
DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
DC power unit /1 (DCPS1) Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB)
V ERROR CODE LIST
not be attained. Re-transmission was demanded and answered but recovery could not be attained. Space is not obtained in the transmission ring buffer within the specified time. E50-11 Communication with the coin vendor cannot be peformed. Printer control board (PRCB) Coin vendor
5-20
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code Main body Fan abnormality F52-01 Causes When the DCPS cooling fan (M42) was ON, M42 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F52-02 When the IP cooling fan (M24) was ON, M24 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. F52-03 When the IPB cooling fan (M25) was ON, M25 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. Operation board abnormality E56-02 After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, communication between the printer control board (PRCB), overall control board (OACB), and operation board /1 (OB1) is not started. E56-11 When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 01 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected. E56-12 When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 02 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected. E56-13 When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 03 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected. DF-319 DF-319 abnormality E60-01 F61-01 F61-02 F61-03 F61-04 Communication error. Registration sensor (PS301) error. Timing sensor (PS302) error. Reverse sensor (PS305) error. Paper exit sensor (PS306) error. Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB) DCPS cooling fan (M42)
Printer control board (PRCB) IP cooling fan (M24)
Printer control board (PRCB) IPB cooling fan (M25)
Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Operation board /1 (OB1)
Operation board /1 (OB1)
RADF control board (DFCB) Printer control board (PRCB) RADF control board (DFCB) Registration sensor (PS301) RADF control board (DFCB) Timing sensor (PS302) RADF control board (DFCB) Reverse sensor (PS305) RADF control board (DFCB) Paper exit sensor (PS306)
5-21
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code DF-319 DF-319 abnormality F61-05 F61-06 F61-07 Causes Size VR (VR301) error. Non-volatile memory error. When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten control program of RADF control board (DFCB) was detected. F61-08 F61-09 F61-10 Paper feed motor (M301) error. Conveyance motor (M302) error. Reverse paper exit motor (M303) error. FS-115, FS-215 FS-115 and FS215 abnormality E70-01 F77-01 Communication error. Shift unit does not reach the shifting position or home position within the specified time. F77-02 After the tray up/down motor (M703) was turned ON, tray upper limit sensor (PS702) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-03 After the alignment motor /U (M705) was turned ON, the alignment HP sensor /U (PS708) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time. F77-04 After the paper exit roller motor (M707) was turned ON, speed does not reach the specified
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts RADF control board (DFCB) Size VR (VR301) RADF control board (DFCB)
RADF control board (DFCB) Paper feed motor (M301) RADF control board (DFCB) Conveyance motor (M302) RADF control board (DFCB) Reverse paper exit motor (M303) Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. FNS control board (FNSCB) Printer control board (PRCB) FNS control board (FNSCB) Shift motor (M702) Shift HP sensor (PS718) FNS control board (FNSCB) Tray up/down motor (M703) Tray upper limit sensor (PS702)
FNS control board (FNSCB) Alignment motor /U (M705) Alignment HP sensor /U (PS708) FNS control board (FNSCB) Paper exit roller motor (M707)
V ERROR CODE LIST
level within the specified time. F77-05 After the paper exit motor (M708) is turned ON, paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time. F77-06 After the stapler moving motor (M711) is turned ON, staper moving HP sensor (PS711) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time. FNS control board (FNSCB) Paper exit opening motor (M708) Paper exit opening sensor (PS712) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler movement motor (M711) Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)
5-22
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code FS-115, FS-215 FS-115 and FS215 abnormality F77-07 Causes After the clincher rotating motor (M704) is turned ON, clincher rotating HP sensor (PS714) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time. F77-08 After the stapler rotating motor (M706) is turned ON, staper rotating HP sensor (PS713) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time. F77-11 After the stapler motor /F (M714) is turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-12 After the stapler motor /R (M709) is turned ON, staper HP sensor /R (PS730) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-13 After the clincher motor /F (M715) is turned ON, clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-14 After clincher motor /R (M710) is turned ON, clincher HP sensor /R (PS732) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-21 After the stopper motor (M718) is turned ON, stopper HP sensor (PS723) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-22 After the alignment motor /L (M716) is turned ON, alignment HP sensor /L (PS724) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-25 After the folding knife motor (M719) is turned ON, folding knife HP sensor (PS722) is not turned ON within the specified time. Resulting operation Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts FNS control board (FNSCB) Clincher rotation motor (M704) Clincher rotation HP sensor (PS714)
FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler rotation motor (M706) Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713)
FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler motor /F (M714) Stapler HP sensor /F (PS731)
FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler motor /R (M709) Stapler HP sensor /R (PS730)
FNS control board (FNSCB) Clincher motor /F (M715) Clincher HP sensor /F (PS733)
FNS control board (FNSCB) Clincher motor /R (M710 Clincher HP sensor /R (PS732) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stopper motor (M718) Stopper HP sensor (PS723) FNS control board (FNSCB) Alignment motor /L (M716) Alignment HP sensor /L (PS724) FNS control board (FNSCB) Folding knife motor (M719) Folding knife HP sensor (PS722)
5-23
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code FS-115, FS-215 FS-115 and FS215 abnormality TU-109 abnormality F77-26 Causes After the folding conveyance motor (M720) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time. F77-31 After the conveyance motor (M101) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time. F77-32 After the cutter motor (M102) is turned ON, cutter HP sensor (PS106) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-33 After the stopper motor (M103) is turned ON, stopper HP sensor (PS103) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-34 After the stopper release motor (M104) is turned ON, stopper release HP snsor (PS104) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-35 After the press motor (M105) is turned ON, press HP sensor (PS105) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-36 After the pressure motor (M107) is turned ON, pressure HP sensor (PS112) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-37 After the holder motor (M106) is turned ON, upper limit PS sensor (PS110) is not turned ON. PI-110 abnormality PI-110 F77-41 After the tray up/down motor /L (M202) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /L (PS209) or tray lower limit snsor /L (PS210) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Conveyance motor (M101) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Cutter motor (M102) Cutter HP sensor (PS106) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Stopper motor (M103) Stopper HP sensor (PS103) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Stopper release motor (M104) Stopper release HP sensor (PS104) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Press motor (M105) Press HP sensor (PS105) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Pusher motor (M107) Pusher HP sensor (PS112) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Holder motor (M106) Upper limit PS sensor (PS110) FNS control board (FNSCB) PI drive board (PIDB) Tray up/down motor /L (M202) Tray upper limit sensor /L (PS209) Tray lower limit sensor /L (PS210) Estimated abnormal parts FNS control board (FNSCB) Folding conveyance motor (M720)
V ERROR CODE LIST
TU-109
5-24
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Classification Abnormality code PI-110 abnormality PI-110 F77-42 Causes After the tray up/down motor / U (M201) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /U (PS204) or tray lower limit sensor /U (PS205) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-43 After the PI conveyance motor (M203) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time. PK-120 PK-120 abnormality F77-44 After the punch shift motor (M802) is turned ON, punch shift HP sensor (PS803) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-47 Communication abnormality between FNS control board (FNSCB) and punch drive board (PKDB) F77-54 After punch motor (M801) is turned ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not turned ON within the specified time. FS-115, FS-215 FS-115, FS-215 abnormality F77-81 After the gate drive motor (M712) is turned ON, gate HP sensor (PS716) is not turned ON within the specified time. F77-91 Communication abnormality when sub-CPU in FNS control board (FNSCB) receives data F77-92 Communication abnormality when the main CPU in FNS control board (FNSCB) receives data. F77-98 When the main swtich (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program of FNS control Board (FNSCB) was detected. F77-99 Abnormality other than those known to control program of FNS control board (FNSCB) was detected. Resulting operation Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts FNS control board (FNSCB) PI drive board (PIDB) Tray up/down motor /U (M201) Tray upper limit sensor /U (PS204) Tray lower limit snsor /U (PS205) FNS control board (FNSCB) PI drive board (PIDB) PIConveyance motor (M203) FNS control board (FNSCB) Punch drive board (PKDB) Punch shift motor (M802) Punch shift HP sensor (PS803) FNS control board (FNSCB) Punch drive board (PKDB)
FNS control board (FNSCB) Punch drive board (PKDB) Punch motor (M801) Punch HP sensor (PS801) FNS control board (FNSCB) Gate drive motor (M712) Gate HP sensor (PS716) FNS control board (FNSCB) Printer control board (PRCB)
5-25
V ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code Main body Communication abnormality E80-01 Causes When the main switch (SW2) is ON, no response is received from the printer control board (PRCB) within the specified time. E80-02 E80-03 ISW abnormality E80-11 Printer control board (PRCB) communication abnormality Operation board communication abnormality When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten range of ISW was detected in the printer control program. E80-21 When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten range of ISW was detected in the GIF control program. E80-30 In the data transfer by ISW, regular header information cannot be received within the specified time. E80-31 In the data transfer by ISW, check sum error or header error was detected in the downloaded data. E80-32 When transferring data by ISW, data cannot be correctly written to flash ROM. E80-40 Engine continued operation without preparing image or process patch for the specified time.
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts Printer control board (PRCB)
Operation board /1 (OB1) Printer control program
VIF control program
Printer cable USB cable PC parallel port PC USB port Printer cable USB cable Program file abnormality Printer cable USB cable Program transferred board Printer control program
V ERROR CODE LIST
5-26
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
2. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION

In the event of following abnormalities, the failed unit can be isolated so that other functions may be temporarily operated. If any abnormality code is issued, press the Auto Reset key and turn OFF and ON the SW2 (auxiliary power switch). The unit subjected to abnormality is isolated in the software system and other functions can be operated. If SW2 is turned OFF or ON without correcting the faulty unit, the abnormality is detected and the abnormality code is indicated again (a function effective only one time). Error code 18-01 18-02 18-03 18-05 13-02 46-40 to 43 77-22, 25, 26 77-31, 37 77-41, 42, 43 77-44, 47, 55 Error Error in paper feed tray /1 up Error in paper feed tray /2 up Error in paper feed tray /3 up Error in LT tray up LT paper feed motor abnormality HDD abnormality Folding drive abnormality Cutting drive abnormality CF tray drive abnormality Punch rocking motor abnormality HDD Folding machine TU-109 PI-110 PK-120 HDD can not be used. Folding mode, stitch-andfold mode, and cutting mode can not be selected. Cover sheet mode can not be selected. Punch mode can not be selected. Unit to be cut off Paper feed tray /1 Paper feed tray /2 Paper feed tray /3 LT tray Remarks Tray can not be selected. Tray can not be selected. Tray can not be selected. Tray can not be selected.
5-27
V ERROR CODE LIST
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
Blank page
V ERROR CODE LIST
5-28
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1 8050 parts layout drawing
A. Switches and sensors (1) Rear of the main body
[11]
[12]
[10]
[9]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

8050fs6600
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS60) Encoder sensor /M1 (PS62) Encoder sensor /C1 (PS64) Encoder sensor /K1 (PS66) Encoder sensor /Y2 (PS61) Encoder sensor /M2 (PS63)
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
Encoder sensor /C2 (PS65) Encoder sensor /K2 (PS67) Waste toner full sensor (PS52) Waste toner door sensor (PS53) Encoder sensor/belt 2 (PS68) Encoder sensor/belt 1 (PS69)
6-1
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (2) Top of the main body
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] DF reset switch (RS1)
[3]
[4] [5] [6]
[2]
APS sensor /S (PS3) Scanner HP sensor (PS1) AAPS timing sensor (PS2)
8050fs6601
Toner supply unit open/close sensor (PS14) APS sensor /L (PS4)
(3) Front of the main body
[3]
[4]
[2] VI DIAGRAMS
[1] [2] Front door open/close sensor (PS18) Front door interlock switch (MS1) [3] [4]
[1]
8050fs6602
Main switch (SW2) Reset switch (SW1)
6-2
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (4) Right side of the main body
[1]
[1] Temp/humidity sensor (TEMP/HUM)
8050fs6603
(5) Front side of the main body
[1]
[1] 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
8050fs6604
6-3
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (6) Write unit
[5] [6] [7]
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[1] [2] [3] [4] Index sensor board /Y (INDX SB Y) Index sensor board /M (INDX SB M) Index sensor board /C (INDX SB C) Index sensor board /K (INDX SB K) [5] [6] [7]
8050fs6605
Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)* Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)* Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)*
* Laser correction HP sensor does not attached to write unit /K. (7) Process unit
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[1] [2] Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) [3] [4]
8050fs6606
Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-4
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (8) Developing unit
[4]
[1] [2]
[3] [2]
[1]
[3] [4]
8050fs6607
Toner density sensor /K (TDS K) Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)
Toner density sensor /M (TDS M) Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)
(9) Image correction unit
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1] [2] Gamma sensor (PS11) Color registration sensor /F (PS8) [3]
8050fs6608
Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
6-5
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (10) Toner supply unit
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] Toner level detection sensor /K (TLD K) Toner level detection sensor /C (TLD C) Toner supply interlock switch (MS2)
[2]
[4] [5] [6]
[1]
8050fs6609
Toner supply door open/close sensor (PS54) Toner level detection sensor /M (TLD M) Toner level detection sensor /Y (TLD Y)
(11) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[4] [5] [6]
[9] [8] [7] [3] [2] [1] [18] [17] [16]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[15] [14] [13]
[12] [11] [10]

[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] 6-6 Paper size VR/1 (VR1) Paper size VR/2 (VR2) Paper size VR/3 (VR3) Paper size /S1 (PS33) Paper size /S2 (PS39) Paper size /S3 (PS45) Paper size /L1 (PS34) Paper size /L2 (PS40) Paper size /L3 (PS46)
8050fs6630
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) Pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) No paper sensor /1 (PS31) No paper sensor /2 (PS37) No paper sensor /3 (PS44) Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) Tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS36) Tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42)
VI DIAGRAMS
[6] [7] [8] [9]
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (12) By-pass feed unit
[4]
[1] [2] Paper size /LBP (PS49) No paper sensor /BP (PS47)
[3]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
Paper size VR/BP (VR4) Paper size /SBP (PS48)
8050fs6610
(13) Vertical conveyance unit
[2]
[1]
8050fs6631
[1]
Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51)
[2]
Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50)
6-7
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (14) ADU
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10] [11]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[1]
ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) ADU reverse sensor (PS21) Registration sensor (PS22)
8050fs6611
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) 2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24) Conveyance lever sensor (PS55) Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)
By-pass conveyance sensor (PS26) Tray upper limit sensor (PS25)
(15) Paper exit section (left side of the main body)
[2]
[1]
8050fs6612
[1]
Paper exit sensor (PS13)
[2]
Paper exit full sensor (PS12)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-8
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (16) Fixing unit
[8] [7]
[1]
[2] [6]
[5] [3]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Thermostat /1 (TS1) Fixing pressure/release sensor (PS16) [5] [6] [7] [8] Thermostat /2 (TS2)
8050fs6632
Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
6-9
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING B. Loads (1) Rear of the main body
[12]
[13]
[14] [15] [16] [17]
[18]
[19] [20] [21] [22]
[23]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [11]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[1]
8050fs6613
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]
[6]
DCPS cooling fan (M42) Developing motor /K (M23) Developing motor /C (M22) Developing motor /M (M21) Scanner motor (M1) Developing motor /Y (M20) Drum cooling fan /2 (M13) Drum cooling fan /1 (M12) Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36) Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37) Transfer belt motor (M18)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) Drum motor /Y (M14) Drum motor /M (M15) Drum motor /C (M16) Drum motor /K (M17) Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10) IP cooling fan (M24) IPB cooling fan (M25) Tray up drive motor /1 (M40) Tray up drive motor /2 (M39) Tray up drive motor /3 (M38) Paper feed motor (M41)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-10
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (2) Top of the main body
[1]
[2]
[1] Scanner cooling fan (M2) [2] Exposure lamp (L1)
8050fs6614
[1]
[1] Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
8050fs6615
6-11
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (4) Right side of the main body
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46) Heater /1 (HTR1) Heater /2 (HTR2) Writing intake fan /2 (M44) [5] [6] [7]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6616
Writing intake fan /1 (M43) Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45) Drum unit fan (M47)
(5) Left side of the main body
[3]
[1] [2] Paper exit fan /F (M28) Paper exit fan /M (M27)
[2]
[1]
[3] Paper exit fan /R (M26)
8050fs6617
VI DIAGRAMS
6-12
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (6) Write unit
[7] [6] [5]

[1] [2] [3] [4] Polygon motor /Y (M3) Polygon motor /M (M4) Polygon motor /C (M5) Polygon motor /K (M6)
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[5] [6] [7] Laser correction motor /Y (M7)* Laser correction motor /M (M8)* Laser correction motor /C (M9)*
8050fs6618
* Laser correction motor does not attached to write unit /K. (7) Process unit
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6619
[1] [2] [3]
Pre-charging lamp /Y (PCL Y) Pre-charging lamp /M (PCL M) Pre-charging lamp /C (PCL C)
[4] [5]
Pre-charging lamp /K (PCL K) Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)
6-13
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (8) Image correction unit
[2]
[1] Gamma shutter solenoid (SD3) [2]
[1]
8050fs6620
Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2)
(9) Toner supply unit
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15) Toner bottle motor (M53) Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17) Toner supply motor /K (M52)
[7] [6] [5]

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[4] [3]
Toner supply motor /C (M51) Toner supply motor /M (M50) Charger intake fan (M48) Toner supply motor /Y (M49) Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)
8050fs6621
VI DIAGRAMS
6-14
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (10) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[7] [8] [9]
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

8050fs6633
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Pick up solenoid /1 (SD7) Pick up solenoid /2 (SD8) Pick up solenoid /3 (SD9) Paper feed clutch /1 (MC7) Paper feed clutch /2 (MC9)
[6] [7] [8] [9]
Paper feed clutch /3 (MC11) Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8) Pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10) Pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12)
(11) Vertical conveyance unit
[1]
[1] Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13)
8050fs6634
6-15
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (12) ADU
[9]
[10] [11] [12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[7]
[6] [5]
[4] [3] [2]

[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[1]
8050fs6622
Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) ADU lock solenoid (SD6) ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) Reverse/exit motor (M33) ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)
ADU reverse motor (M32) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (M34) Registration motor (M30) Loop roller motor (M31) Pick up solenoid /BP (SD5) Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6) Tray up drive motor /BP (M35)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-16
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (13) Fixing unit
[1]
[5] [2]
[3] [4]
8050fs6635
[1] [2] [3]
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Web motor (M54)
[4] [5]
Fixing motor (M29) Fixing lower lamp (L4)
6-17
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING C. PCBs and others (1) Rear of the main body
[17]
[18] [19]
[20]
[21]
[22] [23]
[24]
[9] [10] [11] [12]
[8] [16]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2] [1]
[15]
AC drive board (ACDB) Noise filter (NF) Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1)
[14]
[13]
[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] HDD: option (HD-106) HDD I/F board: option (HDD IFB)
8050fs6623
Extended memory: option (MU-412) Memory board (MB) High voltage unit /1 (HV1) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Scanner drive board (SCDB) DC power supply unit /4:Option (DCPS4) High voltage unit /2 (HV2) Printer control board (PRCB) Fixing heater control board : only in EU (FHCB)
Transformer /LCT (TRNS2) Transformer /main body (TRNS1) DC power supply unit /2 (DCPS2) DC power supply unit /1 (DCPS1) Drum drive board /Y (DRDB Y) Drum drive board /M (DRDB M) Drum drive board /C (DRDB C) Drum drive board /K (DRDB K)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-18
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (2) Top of the main body
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6624
[1] [2]
CCD board (CCDB) Key counter (C (K))
[3]
L1 inverter board (L1 INVB)
[3]
[4]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Black counter (C (BK)) Total counter (C (T)) Operation board /2 (OB2) Operation board /3 (OB3)
[1]
[5] [6] [7] [8] OB inverter board (OB INVB) LCD board (LCDB) Operation board /1 (OB1)
8050fs6625
6-19
VI DIAGRAMS
Touch panel board
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (4) Write unit
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1]
[1] [2] Temp detection board (TDB) (attached to write unit /K only) Laser drive board /Y (LDB Y) [3] [4] [5] Laser drive board /M (LDB M) Laser drive board /C (LDB C) Laser drive board /K (LDB K)
8050fs6626
(5) Process unit
[4]
[1] [2] Drum potential sensor board /K (DRSPSB K) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRSPSB C)
[3]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
8050fs6627
Drum potential sensor board /M (DRSPSB M) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRSPSB Y)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-20
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 (6) Toner supply section
[1]
[1] Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
8050fs6628
(7) ADU
[1]
[1] Conveyance drive board (CVDB)
8050fs6629
6-21
VI DIAGRAMS
1.2
DF-319 parts layout drawing

[18] [2] [7] [15] [1] [3] [11] [10] [9]
[16] [5] [6] [8]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Paper feed motor (M301) Conveyance motor (M302) Reverse/exit motor (M303) Registration clutch (MC301) Registration sensor (PS301) Timing sensor (PS302) Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) No paper sensor (PS304) Reverse sensor (PS305) Paper exit sensor (PS306)
[17]
[4]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
8050fs6031
Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) Tray open/close sensor (PS308) Size sensor /S (PS309) Size sensor /L (PS310) Paper exit solenoid (SD301) Reverse solenoid (SD302) Size VR (VR301) RADF control board (DFCB) Size sensor board (SSB)
[12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19]
VI DIAGRAMS
6-22
1.3
LT-211 parts layout drawing

[13] [14] [15] SW100 SD100 [1]
FRONT
[2] [3] [12] [11] [10] [4]
[9]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
M100
[8]
M101 [16]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
[7]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6700
Front door interlock switch (MS101) Paper mis-centering sensor (PS120) No paper sensor (PS108) Paper feed sensor (PS107) Feed sensor (PS106) Upper limit sensor (PS109) Pre-registration clutch (MC102) Lower limit sensor (PS101)
Remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105) Remaining paper sensor /3 (PS104) Remaining paper sensor /2 (PS103) Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS102) Top cover interlock switch (MS102) Top cover open/close sensor (PS100) Paper feed clutch (MC101) LT drive board (LTDB)
6-23
VI DIAGRAMS
1.4
FS-115/FS-215 parts layout drawing

[26] [27]
[25] [24] [23] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [22]
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] FRONT [15] [14] [13]
8050fs6701
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) Paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) Gate HP sensor (PS716) FNS inlet sensor (PS704) Stapler movement motor (M711) FNS interlock switch (MS701) Clincher rotation motor (M704) Alignment HP sensor/L (PS724) (FS-215 only) Alignment motor/L (M716) (FS-215 only) Folding knife HP sensor (PS722) (FS-215 only) Folding knife motor (M719) (FS-215 only) Stopper motor (M718) (FS-215 only) Clincher rotation HP sensor(PS714) Folding passage sensor (PS726) (FS-215 only)
[15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27]
Stopper HP sensor (PS723) (FS-215 only) Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) Stacker no paper sensor (PS720) Stacker auxiliary solenoid (SD702) Stack auxiliary motor (M722) Alignment HP sensor/U (PS708) Paper exit belt HP sensor (PS709) Stacker inlet motor (M713) Shift HP sensor (PS718) Shift motor (M702) Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) Sub-tray full sensor (PS719) Paper exit opening solenoid (SD704)
VI DIAGRAMS
[13] [14]
6-24
[12] [11]
[13] [14]
[10]
[1] [2]
[9]
[3] [4]
[8] [5] [7] [6]
8050fs6702
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS707) Tray upper limit sensor (PS702) Counter rest sensor (PS715) By-pass gate solenoid (SD705) Tray lower limit sensor (PS703) Tray up/down motor (M703) Folding conveyance motor (M720) (FS-215 only)
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
Relay board (RB) FNS control board (FNSCB) Gate drive motor (M712) FNS conveyance motor (M701) Paper exit opening motor (M708) Sub-tray paper exit motor (M721) Paper exit opening roller motor (M707)
6-25
VI DIAGRAMS
[8] [7] [6]
[5]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) (FS-215 only) Folding full LED (LED729) (FS-215 only) Folding full sensor (PS729) (FS-215 only) Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713)
[3]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6703
Three-folding gate solenoid (SD706) (FS-215 only) Stapler rotation motor (M706) Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711) Alignment motor/U (M705)
[6]
[5]
[4] VI DIAGRAMS
[3] [2] [1]

8050fs6704
[1] [2] [3]
Clincher motor/R (M710)/ clincher motor/F (M715) Clincher HP sensor/R (PS732) / clincher HP sensor/F (PS733) Stapler motor/R (M709) /stapler motor/F (M714) 6-26
[4] [5] [6]
Stapler HP sensor/R (PS730) /stapler HP sensor/F (PS731) Cartridge switch/R (SW701) / cartridge switch/F (SW703) Stapler switch/R (SW702) /stapler switch/F (SW704)
1.5
TU-109 parts layout drawing

[11] [10] [1]
[2]
[3] [9] [8] [4] [6]

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[7]
[5]
8050fs6705
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Upper limit sensor (PS110) DC power unit (DCPS) Lower limit sensor (PS111) Holder motor (M106) Circuit breaker (CBR) Relay 1 (RL1)
Relay 2 (RL28) Coil (COL) Scrap box detection sensor (PS107) Conveyance motor (M101) TU drive board (TUDB)
6-27
VI DIAGRAMS
[13] [12]
[14]
[15]
[16] [1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6706
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Scrap removal fan motor (M108) Scrap full LED (LED101) Scrap full sensor (PS109) Entrance sensor (PS101) Trimmer motor (M102) Trimmer HP sensor (PS106) Press HP sensor (PS105) Press motor (M105)
Front door MS2 (MS2) Paper exit sensor (PS108) Stacker S3 (MS3) Stacker door sensor (PS114) Stacker MS4 (MS4) Stacker full sensor (PS113) Pusher HP sensor(PS112) Pusher motor (M107)
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1] Stopper movement motor(M103) Conveyance sensor (PS102) Stopper release HP sensor (PS104) [4] [5] Stopper release motor (M104) Stopper HP sensor (PS103)
8050fs6707
VI DIAGRAMS
[2] [3]
6-28
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1 8050 connector layout drawing
A. Printer control board
650 (W : 20 pin) 357 (W : 9 pin) 360 (W : 40 pin) 391 (GY : 18 pin) 651 (W : 20 pin) 384 (W : 30 pin)
340 (W : 28 pin)
572 (W : 4 pin) 620 (BN : 7 pin)
700 (W : 26 pin) 376 (W : 28 pin) 564 (W : 2 pin) 309 (W : 36 pin) 573 (W : 3 pin) 353 (BN : 12 pin) 393 (W : 24 pin)
600 (BN : 20 pin) 300 (BN : 18 pin) 303 (W : 2 pin) 302 (W : 6 pin) 500 (BN : 34 pin)
574 (W : 3 pin) 467 (BN : 6 pin)
400 (BN : 32 pin)
2 (N.C.) 4 (N.C.)
1 (N.C.)
414 (B : 32 pin) 459 (W : 10 pin) 151 (GY : 8 pin) 36 (N.C.) 730 (W : 32 pin) 301 (W : 4 pin)
428 (BN : 30 pin)
464 (BN : 19 pin) 736 (W : 24 pin) 37 (N.C.) 442 (W : 34 pin) 150 (GY : 24 pin)
8050fs6033
6-29
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING B. AC drive board
120 (W : 5 pin)
152 (W : 11 pin)
156 (W : 5 pin) 153 (W : 4 pin)
121 (W : 8 pin)
155 (W : 5 pin)
157 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6034
C. CCD drive board
511 (W : 50 pin)
8050fs6035
D. Conveyance drive board

534 (W : 12 pin) 536 (W : 6 pin) 3 (N.C.) 5 (N.C.) 539 (W : 22 pin)
524 (W : 7 pin) 548 (W : 6 pin) 518 (W : 15 pin) 569 (B : 4 pin) 513 (W : 6 pin)
507 (W : 6 pin)
527 (W : 15 pin)
1 (N.C.)
503 (W : 34 pin)
510 (W : 11 pin)
8050fs6036
VI DIAGRAMS
6-30
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 E. DC power unit/1
102 (W : 4 pin) 103 (W : 6 pin) 108 (W : 4 pin) 101 (W : 3 pin) 106 (W : 8 pin) 107 (W : 7 pin) 104 (W : 10 pin) 105 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6037
F.
DC power unit/2
110 (W : 4 pin)
111 (W : 12 pin) 112 (W : 6 pin) 113 (W : 4 pin) 114 (W : 9 pin) 115 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6038
G. DC power unit/3
109 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6100
6-31
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING H. Drum drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K
316,323,330,337 (W : 3 pin)
313,320,327,334 (W : 6 pin)
312,319,326,333 (W : 2 pin)
311,318,325,332 (W : 9 pin)
8050fs6039
I.
Fixing heater control board
158 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6040
J.
High voltage unit/1
731 (W : 8 pin) 732 (W : 8 pin) 735 (W : 3 pin) 733 (W : 8 pin) 734 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6041
VI DIAGRAMS
6-32
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 K. High voltage unit/2
737 (W : 12 pin) 739 (W : 3 pin) 738 (W : 10 pin) 740 (N.C.)

8050fs6042
L.
Image processing board

271 (W : 6 pin)
270 (BK : 60 pin) 260 (W : 68 pin)
253 (BK : 100 pin)
272 (W : 34 pin)
220 (W : 120 pin)
254 (BK : 120 pin)
280 (B : 34 pin)
9 (N.C.) 8 (N.C.)
8050fs6043
6-33
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING M. Index sensor/Y,/M,/C,/K
274,278,282,286 (GY : 5 pin)
8050fs6044
N. L1 inverter board
606 (W : 3 pin)
?? (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6045
O. Laser drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K
275,279,283,287 (W : 12 pin)
8050fs6046
P.
Memory board
141 (W : 40 pin)
142 (W : 20 pin)
8050fs6047
VI DIAGRAMS
6-34
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Q. Overall control board
250 (W : 18 pin) 217 (BN : 50 pin)
258 (N.C.)
13 (N.C.) 251 (W : 16 pin) 270 (W : 60 pin) 12 (N.C.) 252 (W : 4 pin) 9 (N.C.)
257 (BK : 9 pin)
253 (W : 100 pin)
10 (N.C.) 256 (BK : 36 pin)
259 (BK : 4 pin) 254 (W : 120 pin) 11 (N.C.) 6 (N.C.) 7 (N.C.) 255 (BK : 8 pin)
5 (N.C.)
14 (N.C.)
8 (N.C.)
8050fs6048
R. OB inverter board
166 (W : 4 pin)
165 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6049
6-35
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING S. Operation board/1

176 (W : 6 pin)
173 (W : 6 pin)
172 (W : 12 pin)
175 (W : 4 pin) 174 (W : 14 pin)
8050fs6050
T.
Operation board/2
162 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6051
U. Operation board/3
158 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6101
VI DIAGRAMS
6-36
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 V. Scanner drive board
607 (W : 3 pin) 609 (W : 14 pin) 1 (N.C.)
601 (W : 20 pin) 603 (W : 3 pin)
602 (W : 4 pin) 605 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6052
W. Temperature detection board
670 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6053
X. Toner supply drive board

704 (W : 6 pin) 724 (W : 18 pin)
702 (W : 26 pin) 726 (W : 12 pin) 706 (W : 6 pin)
711 (W : 8 pin)
705 (W : 7 pin)
708 (W : 11 pin)
8050fs6054
Y.
Gamma sensor
8050fs6055
6-37
VI DIAGRAMS
558 (W : 5 pin)
2.2
DF-319 connector layout drawing
A. DF drive board
14 (W : 9 pin)
13 (W : 15 pin)
3 (W : 7 pin) 12 (W : 5 pin) 1 (N.C.) 5 (W : 5 pin) 8 (N.C.) 2 (W : 6 pin)
4 (W : 6 pin)
7 (W : 9 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin)
6 (W : 2 pin)
8050fs6102
VI DIAGRAMS
6-38
2.3
LT-211 connector layout drawing

802 (W : 10 pin) 807 (W : 14 pin)
5 (N.C.) 4 (N.C.)
804 (W : 12 pin)
805 (W : 11 pin)
800 (W : 6 pin) 808 (W : 2 pin) 803 (W : 6 pin) 3 (N.C.) 801 (W : 11 pin)
806 (W : 15 pin)
2 (N.C.) 1 (N.C.)
8050fs6103
6-39
VI DIAGRAMS
2.4
FS-115/FS-215 connector layout drawing
A. FNS control board

61 (W : 2 pin) 51 (W : 32 pin) 33 (W : 38 pin)
12 (W : 24 pin) 1 (W : 18 pin) 10 (W : 4 pin) 11 (W : 9 pin) 7 (W: 6 pin) 6 (W : 5 pin) 5 (W : 22 pin) 41 (GY : 30 pin) FS-215 only 62 (W : 40 pin) 8 (W : 8 pin) 52 (W : 6 pin)
43 (W : 8 pin) FS-215 only 42 (W : 5 pin) FS-215 only
9 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only 4 (W : 40 pin) 2 (W : 5 pin) 3 (W : 11 pin)

8050fs6104
B. Relay board
6 (W : 30 pin)
5 (W : 30 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin) 4 (W : 24 pin) FS-215 only 8 (W : 34 pin) 9 (W : 2 pin) FS-215 only 1 (W : 40 pin) 7 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only
2 (W : 22 pin) 3 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only
8050fs6105
VI DIAGRAMS
6-40
2.5
TU-109 connector layout drawing

402 (GY : 28 pin) 404 (GY : 18 pin) 406 (GY : 20 pin)
401 (GY : 40 pin)
403 (W : 5 pin) 405 (W : 4 pin) 408 (W : 3 pin) 407 (W : 2 pin)
409 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6106
6-41
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS
3.1
Item
Time (sec)
TIMING CHART
Paper feed motor (M41) Pick up solenoid /1 (SD7) Paper feed clutch /1 (MC7) Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8)
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) Registration sensor (PS22)
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13) Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5)
3. TIMING CHART
V_TOP
8050 timing chart
Loop roller motor (M31) Register out roller motor (M30) F Fixing motor (M29) R
Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) Paper exit sensor (PS13) Reverse/exit sensor (PS19) ADU reverse sensor (PS21) ADU conveyance (PS20) ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23)
ument of 2 copies, paper feed tray /1 paper feed
A. Full color, life size, ADF single sided original document of 2 sheets, double sided original doc-
6-42
1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor(M34) Reverse/exit motor (M33) F R ADU reverse motor (M32) F R
Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4) ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3)
Drum motor /Y (M14) Drum motor /M (M15) Drum motor /C (M16) Drum motor /K (M17) Transfer belt motor (M18)
Charging /Y Charging /M Charging /C Charging /K Developer bias DC /Y Developer bias DC /M Developer bias DC /C Developer bias DC /K
Developer bias AC /Y Developer bias AC /M Developer bias AC /C Developer biasAC /K 1st transfer /Y 1st transfer /M 1st transfer /C 1st transfer /K
8050fs6324
2nd transfer Separation AC/DC Transfer Drum separation claw solenoid (SD1)
3.2
No paper sensor PS304
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Registration sensor PS301
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Registration clutch MC301
OFF ON
Paper feed motor M301 CW 300mm/s
CW 67mm/s
Stop
CCW 300mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
DF-319 timing chart
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Conveyance motor M302
CW 710mm/s
Stop
A. A4, life size, single-sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/3)
6-43
CCW 138mm/s
CCW 300mm/s CCW 710mm/s
Reverse sensor PS305
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Reverse/exit motor M303
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper exit sensor PS306
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Reverse solenoid SD302
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6310
Paper exit solenoid SD301
OFF ON OFF ON
VI DIAGRAMS
Paper unloaded
TIMING CHART
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Registration clutch MC301 OFF ON Paper feed motor M301 CW 300mm/s
CW 67mm/s
Stop
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Stop
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (2/3)
6-44
CCW 138mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
8050fs6311
OFF ON OFF ON
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 67mm/s
Stop
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Stop
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (3/3)
6-45
CCW 138mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6312
OFF ON OFF ON
VI DIAGRAMS
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 67mm/s
Stop
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Stop
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/4)
6-46
CCW 138mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
8050fs6313
OFF ON OFF ON
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 67mm/s
Stop
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Stop
6-47
CCW 138mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6314
OFF ON OFF ON
VI DIAGRAMS
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 67mm/s
Stop
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Stop
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original documents of 3 sheets (3/4)
6-48
CCW 138mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
8050fs6315
OFF ON OFF ON
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
OFF ON
CW 67mm/s
Stop
Timing sensor PS302
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
Stop
6-49
CCW 138mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CW 710mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s
Stop
CCW 150mm/s
CCW 400mm/s
CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6316
OFF ON OFF ON
VI DIAGRAMS
3.3
TIMING CHART
Time (sec) Item Paper feed motor (M101)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Paper feed clutch (MC101)
LT-211 timing chart
A. A4, single sided, 2-sheet paper feed
Paper feed solenoid (SD100)
Pre-registration clutch (MC102)
6-50 Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003
Paper feed sensor (PS107)
Feed sensor (PS106)
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27)
8050fs6317
Start button ON
3.4
Item
Time (sec)
1 2 3 4
Code
FNS Entrance sensor PS704 670mm/s M701 FNS Conveyance motor 400mm/s
M702
A
PS718
SD704
M707
PS706
PS702
FS-115/215 timing chart
Shift motor Shift HP sensor Paper exit opening solenoid Paper exit roller motor 253mm/s 400mm/s Main tray paper exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor UP Tray up/down motor DOWN
Copy 1 Page 1 Copy 1 Page 2 Copy 2 Page 1
M703
FNS operation start signal ON
A. Sort, A4, document of 2 sheets, 3-copy setting, single sided
6-51
6 7 8 9
Item
Time (sec)
Code
PS704 M701 M702 PS718 SD704 M707 PS706 PS702 M703
FNS Entrance sensor 670mm/s FNS Conveyance motor 400mm/s Shift motor Phift HP sensor Paper exit opening solenoid 253mm/s Paper exit roller motor 400mm/s Main tray paper exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor UP Tray up/down motor DOWN
Copy 3 Page 1 Copy 3 Page 2
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6318
Copy 2 Page 2
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
Code PS704 M701 SD705 PS705 M713 M722 SD702

2 3 4 5 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
M705
A
M711
M714, M715
M709, M710
PS709 PS706 SD704
Time (sec) Item FNS Entrance sensor FNS Conveyance drive motor 670mm/s By-pass gate solenoid Stacker entrance sensor Stacker entrance motor Stack drive motor Stack drive solenoid Close Alignment motor /U Open Stapler movement motor Stapler,clincher motor /F Stapler,clincher motor /R Paper exit belt HP sensor Main tray paper exit sensor Paper exit opening solenoid 950mm/s 660mm/s Paper exit roller motor 280mm/s
M707
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
Tray up/down motor Copy 1 Page 1

26 27 28 29 30
PS707 UP M703 DOWN

Copy 1 Page 2 Copy 1 Page 3 Copy 1 Page 9 Copy 1 Page 10 Copy 1 Page 11 Copy 2 Page 1 Copy 2 Page 2
31 32
B. Flat stapling at 2 points, A4, document of 11 sheets, 2-copy setting
6-52
A
FNS operation start signalON
Copy 2 Page 3 Time (sec)

670mm/s
Copy 2 Page 4 Item
FNS Entrance sensor

FNS conveyance drive motor
Code PS704 M701 SD705 PS705 M713 M722 SD702 By-pass gate solenoid Stacker entrance sensor Stacker entrance motor Stack drive motor Stack drive solenoid Close Alignment motor /U Open M705
Stapler movement motor M711
Stapler,clincher motor /F M714, M715 Stapler,clincher motor /R M709, M710 Paper exit belt HP sensor PS709 Main tray paper exit sensor PS706 Paper exit opening solenoid SD704
950mm/s 660mm/s Paper exit roller motor 280mm/s Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
M707 PS707 UP Tray up/down motor DOWN

Copy 2 Page 9 Copy 2 Page 10 Copy 2 Page 11
8050fs6319
M703
Time (sec)
1 6 8 2 3 4 5 7 9
Item Code FNS Entrance sensor PS704 FNS Conveyance drive motor M701 Stacker Entrance sensor PS705 Stacker 670mm/s entrance motor 500mm/s M713 Alignment HP sensor /U PS708 Alignment Close motor /U Open M705 Alignment HP sensor /L PS724 Alignment motor /L Close M716 Open Stapler motor,clincher motor /F M714, M715 Stapler motor,clincher motor /R M709, M710 PS723 Stopper HP sensor Stopper motor Down M718 Up Folding con670mm/s veyance motor 500mm/s M720 Folding conveyance sensor PS725 Folding knife motor M719 Folding knife HP sensor PS722 Folding passage sensor PS726 Paper exit opening HP sensor PS712 Paper exit opening motor M706
C. Stitch and fold, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
6-53
Copy 1 Page 1
12 13 14 15 11
FNS Operation Open start signal ON
Copy 1 Page 2
Copy 1 Page 3
16 17
10
Time (sec)
Item Code FNS Entrance sensor PS704 FNS Conveyance motor M701 Stacker Entrance sensor PS705 670mm/s Stacker entrance motor M713 500mm/s Alignment HP sensor /U PS708 Close Alignment motor /U M705 Open Alignment HP sensor /L PS724 Close Alignment motor /L M716 Open Stapler motor,clincher motor /F M714, M715 Stapler motor,clincher motor /R M709, M710 Stopper HP sensor PS723 Down Stopper motor M718 Up 400mm/s Folding Conveyance motor M720 800mm/s Folding conveyance sensor PS72 Folding knife motor M719 Folding knife HP sensor PS722 Folding passage sensor PS726 Paper exit opening HP sensor PS712 Paper exit opening HP sensor M708 Copy 2 Page 3
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6320
Copy 2 Page 1
Copy 2 Page 2
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
Item
Time (sec)
0 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14
Code
M707 PS709 PS704 M712
M705
M716
A
PS705
M713
PS726 M719 PS722 M701
M718
Paper exit roller motor Paper exit belt HP sensor FNS Entrance sensor Gate drive motor Close Alignment motor /U Open Close Alignment motor /L Open Stacker Entrance sensor 670mm/s Stacker entrance motor 500mm/s Folding passage sensor Folding knife motor Folding knife HP sensor FNS Conveyance motor Down Stopper motor Up Three-folding gate solenoid Folding Conveyance motor Folding exit sensor
SD706 M720 PS725
D. Three-folding, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
6-54 FNS operation start signal ON

16 17 18 19 20
Time (sec)
Code M707 PS709 PS704 M712 M705 M716 PS705 M713 PS726 M719 PS722 M701 M718 SD706 M720 PS725 Stacker Entrance sensor 670mm/s Stacker entrance motor 500mm/s Folding passage sensor Folding knife motor Folding knife HP sensor FNSConveyance motor Down Stopper motor Up Three-folding gate solenoid Folding Conveyance motor Folding exit sensor Item Paper exit roller motor Paper exit belt HP sensor FNS Entrance sensor Gate drive motor Close Alignment motor /U Open Close Alignment motor /L Open
8050fs6321
3.5 TU-109 timing chart
Time (sec)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
Code
Item
-52
-51
89
90
91
92
93
A. Cutting mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
Folding Conveyance motor M720 (FNS)
Conveyance motor M101 Entrance sensor PS101 Stopper motor M103 Conveyance sensor PS102
6-55 Copy 1 Copy 2
Press motor M105 Cutter motor M102 Stopper clear motor M104
Holder motor M106 Pressure motor M107
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6322
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
B. Through mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
Time (sec) Code Item Folding Conveyance motor M720 (FNS) Conveyance motor M101 Entrance sensor PS101
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
-52
-51
89
90
91
92
93
6-56 Copy 1
Stopper motor M103 Conveyance sensor PS102 Press motor M105 Cutter motor M102
Stopper clear motor M104 Holder motor M106 Pressure motor M107 Paper exit sensor PS108
Copy 2
8050fs6323
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM

4.1 DF-319 Overall Wiring Diagram
1 A
PAPER FEED COVER SENSOR
4
DFCB
9 A
M301 PS303
PAPER FEED MOTOR
NO PAPER SENSOR
PS304
M302
CONVEYANCE MOTOR
REGISTRATION SENSOR
PS301 M303
TIMING SENSOR
PS302
REVERSE/EXIT MOTOR
TRAY OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
PS308
SIZE SENSOR BOARD
D
SIZE SENSOR/L
D
SD302
REVERSE SOLENOID
SSB PS310
SIZE SENSOR/S
PS309 SD301
PAPER EXIT SOLENOID
SIZE VR
VR301 MC301
REGISTRATION CLUTCH
F
REVERSE SENSOR
PS305
PAPER EXIT SENSOR
PS306
PAPER EXIT COVER SENSOR
PS307
Symbol
I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-57
Connector Faston Crimp Relay connector
Symbol DFCB M301 M302 M303 M304 MC301 PS301 PS302 PS303 PS304 PS305 PS306 PS307 PS308 PS309 PS310 SD301 SD302 SSB VR301 RADF control board Paper feed motor Conveyance motor Reverse/exit motor ADF cooling fan Registration clutch Registration sensor Timing sensor
Part name 4-A 7-A 7-B 7-C 7-D 7-F 1-B 1-C 1-A 1-B 1-F 1-G 1-G 1-D 1-E 1-D 7-E 7-D 2-D 1-E
Location
Paper feed cover sensor No paper sensor Reverse sensor Paper exit sensor Paper exit cover sensor Tray open/close sensor Size sensor /S Size sensor /L Paper exit solenoid Reverse solenoid Size sensor bord Size VR
6-58
4.2
I 1
PRCB MAIN BODY ACDB DCPS1 DCPS2
153-4 24VAC(N) 153-3 24VAC(H) 464-10 SOUT(TXD) 464-2 LTRP_SIG 464-1 LTNP_SIG 464-3 LTSO_SIG 464-11 SIN(RXD) 464-7 LTRCL 464-5 LTCCL 111-10 PGND 464-6 LTSSD 464-8 LTSCL 464-9 SGND 464-4 SGND 106-6 SGND 106-8 SGND
LT-211 Overall Wiring Diagram
2
111-7 24V2 106-3 5V2 106-7 12V
3
465-9 465-8 465-7 465-6 465-5 465-4 465-3 465-2 465-1 466-1 466-2 466-3 466-4 466-5 466-6 466-7 466-8 465-11 465-10
Symbol
800-1 5V2
800-2 12V
800-3 24V2
800-4 SGND
800-5 SGND
800-6 PGND
801-3 SGND
801-8 SGND
801-4 LTSCL
801-5 LTRCL
801-7 LTCCL
801-6 LTSSD
801-2 SIN(RXD)
801-9 LTSO_SIG
801-10 LTRP_SIG
801-11 LTNP_SIG
801-1 SOUT(TXD)
Faston Connector Crimp Relay connector
4
814-1 814-2
836-2
836-1 HTR102
835-2
835-1 HTR101
834-2
834-1 HTR100
M100
808-1 DRIVE1 808-2 DRIVE2
UP/DOWN MOTOR
5
818-1 818-2 818-3 819-1
806-15 5V2 806-14 PS 806-13 SGND
PS101 PS102 PS103
819-2 819-3 820-1 820-2 820-3 821-1
806-12 5V2 806-11 PS 806-10 SGND 806-9 5V2 806-8 PS 806-7 SGND 821-2 821-3 822-1 806-6 5V2
802-1 VIDEO 802-2 SGND 802-3 5V2 802-4 -5V 802-5 SGND 802-6 SI 802-7 SGND 802-8 CLOCK 806-5 PS 806-4 SGND 822-2 822-3 806-3 5V2 802-9 LED 802-10 24V2
810-1 810-2 810-3 810-4 810-5 810-6 810-7 810-8
PS120
PAPER MIS-CENTERING SENSOR
PS104
LOWER LIMIT REMAINING REMAINING REMAINING REMAINING SENSOR PAPER PAPER PAPER PAPER SENSOR/1 SENSOR/2 SENSOR/3 SENSOR/4
6 7
810-9 810-10 806-2 PS 806-1 SGND
PS105
PAPER FEED PAPER FEED ASSIST FAN/F ASSIST FAN/R FEED SENSOR
804-1 DW_SW 804-2 SGND 812-3-1 837-6-1 804-3 5V2 803-6 PGND
839-1-5 839-2-4 839-3-3 812-2-2 812-1-3 811-3-1 837-5-2 837-4-3 837-3-4 804-4 PS 839-4-2 803-5 LOCK 803-4 DRIVE 803-3 PGND 839-5-1 804-5 SGND 804-6 5V2 804-7 PS
813-1 813-2
SW100
LTDB
832-1 832-2
PS115
832-3 833-1 833-2 811-2-2 811-1-3 837-2-5 837-1-6 804-8 SGND 803-2 LOCK 803-1 DRIVE 804-9 24V2 804-10 CONT 804-11 24V2 823-1 841-14-1 826-2-1 826-1-2 830-2-1 823-2 823-3 824-1 824-2 824-3 825-1 841-13-2 841-12-3 841-11-4 841-10-5 841-9-6 841-8-7 807-14 SGND 804-12 CONT 830-1-2
FRONT DOOR UPPER COVER PREOPEN/CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE REGISTSENSOR TRAY DOWN SENSOR PAPER FEED RATION SWITCH CLUTCH CLUTCH
M136 M137
PS106
PS100
833-3
MC101 MC102
807-13 PS 807-12 5V2 807-11 SGND 805-1 5V2 805-2 SGND 807-10 PS 807-9 5V2 825-2 841-7-8 807-8 5V2 805-3 LCTMCONT 805-4 LCTM_CLOCK 805-5 LCTM_F/R 815-1 815-2 5V
6-59
PS107
815-3 815-4 815-5 807-7 PS 805-6 LCTM_EM 815-6
S.G. CONT CLK CW/CCW
PAPER FEED MOTOR
PS108
M101
LD
PAPER NO PAPER UPPER PAPER FEED SENSOR LIMIT FEED SENSOR SENSOR SOLENOID
8 9 I
825-3 831-1 831-2 831-3 829-2-1
841-6-9 841-5-10 841-4-11 841-3-12 841-2-13
807-6 SGND 807-5 5V2
805-7 LCTMGAIN 805-8 PGND 805-9 PGND 807-4 PS 807-3 SGND 829-1-2 841-1-14 807-2 CONT 807-1 24V 805-10 24V2 816-1 816-2 817-1 817-2 805-11 24V2
815-7 815-8 815-9
H/L P.G. P.G. 815-10 815-11 24V 24V
PS109 SD100
MS101
MS102
Symbol LT211 M101 M100 M136 M137 MC101 MC102 MS101 MS102 PS120 PS100 PS101 PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 PS106 PS107 PS108 PS109 PS115 SD100 SW100 HTR100 HTR101 HTR102 LTDB LT211 Paper feed motor Up/down motor
Part name 4-D 8-A 5-H 7-H 7-H 7-B 7-B 9-C 9-C 6-A 7-A 5-H 5-H 6-H 6-H 6-H 7-H 8-H 8-H 8-H 7-A 8-H 6-B 5-B 5-B 5-C 4-D
Location
Paper feed assist fan/F Paper feed assist fan/R Paper feed clutch Pre-registration clutch Front door interlock switch Upper cover interlock switch Paper mis-centering sensor Upper cover open/close sensor Lower limit sensor Remaining paper sensor /1 Remaining paper sensor /2 Remaining paper sensor /3 Remaining paper sensor /4 Feed sensor Paper feed sensor No paper sensor Upper limit sensor Front door open/close sensor Paper feed solenoid Tray down switch Heater/1 Heater/2 Heater/3 LT drive board
6-60
4.3
I 1
ALIGNMENT MOTOR/L
M716 PS724
12-A2 5V 12-A8 PS 12-B5 GND
1 2 3 121-1 121-2 121-3 172-1 172-2 172-3 191-4 191-5 191-6
150-1 150-2 150-3 150-4 150-5 150-6
7-A1 24V 7-A2 24V 7-A3 A 7-A4 A 7-A5 B 7-A6 B 8-1 24V 8-2 24V 8-3 A 8-4 A 8-5 B 8-6 B
100-2 100-5 100-1 100-3 100-4 100-6
M701
FNS CONVEYANCE MOTOR
ALIGNMENT HP SENSOR/L
4-A9 5V 4-A8 PS 4-A7 GND
142 3 2 1
PS704
FNS ENTRANCE SENSOR
FOLDING STOPPER MOTOR
M718 PS723 M719

153-1 152-1 152-2 171-1 171-2 171-3 190-1 190-2 190-3
151-2 151-5 151-4 151-6 151-3 151-1
7-A7 24V 7-A8 24V 7-A9 A 7-A10 A 7-A11 B 7-A12 B 4-A6 5V 4-A5 PS 4-A4 GND 7-A13 24V 7-A14 DRIVE 4-A3 5V 4-A2 PS 4-A1 GND 12-A4 5V 12-A10 PS 12-B3 GND 12-B12 B 12-B11 B 12-B10 A 12-B9 A 12-B8 24V 12-B7 24V
4 2 3 1 6 5 105 3 5 4 6 1 2
FOLDING STOPPER HP SENSOR FOLDING KNIFE MOTOR
M712
GATE DRIVE MOTOR
FS-115/215 Overall Wiring Diagram
2
FOLDING KNIFE HP SENSOR
2
GATE HP SENSOR
123-1 123-2 123-3
PS716
PS722
170-1 170-2 170-3
FS-215 ONLY
FOLDING CONVEYANCE MOTOR
M720
153-1 153-7 153-3 153-4 153-6 153-5 153-10 153-11 153-8 153-9 153-2
7-B1 5V 7-B2 BRAKE 7-B3 CONT 7-B4 CLOCK 7-B5 PLL 7-B6 F/R 7-B7 24V 7-B8 24V 7-B9 PGND 7-B10 PGND 7-B11 SGND 7-B13 24V 7-B14 CONT
THREE-FOLDING GATE SOLENOID
SD706 PS725 PS726

175-1 194-2 174-1 174-2 174-3 193-1 193-2 193-3 173-1 173-2 173-3 191-1 191-2 191-3
160-1 160-2
10-1 24V 10-2 DRIVE
102-1 102-2 127-1 127-2 127-3
M702
11-3 5V 11-6 PS 11-9 GND
SHIFT MOTOR
PS718
SHIFT HP SENSOR
FOLDING EXIT SENSOR

4-A12 5V 4-A11 PS 4-A10 GND 4-B3 5V 4-B2 PS 4-B1 GND 4-B6 5V 4-B4 GND 9-2 GND 9-1 PS
3
FOLDING PASSAGE SENSOR FOLDING FULL LED
1-A1 5V
LED729
175-3 194-1
FOLDING FULL SENSOR
PS729
176-3
176-1
CLINCHER MOTOR/R
1-A3 P/S 1-A4 CLOCK 1-A5 F/R 1-A6 LOCK 1-A7 H/L 1-A8 PGND 1-A9 PGND 1-B2 24V 1-B1 24V 8-8 DRIVE 8-7 24V 12-A3 5V 12-A9 PS 12-B4 GND
110
104-1 104-2 NC 104-3 104-4 104-5 104-6 104-7 NC 104-8 104-9 104-10 104-11 101-1 101-2
M707
PAPER EXIT ROLLER MOTOR
M710 PS732 M715 PS733

CLINCHER ROTATION MOTOR
SGND PS 5V DRIVE2 DRIVE2 SGND PS 5V
DRIVE2 DRIVE2
CLINCHER HP SENSOR/R
179-4 179-3 179-2 179-1 179-5 179-6 179-7
5-B12 24V 5-B13 24V 5-B14 M710 DRIVE2 5-B15 M710 DRIVE2 5-B4 SGND 5-B5 PS732 5-B6 5V
1-A1 1-A2 1-A3 1-A4 1-A5 1-A6 1-A7 1-A8 1-A9 1-A10 1-A11 1-A12 1-A13 1-A14 1-A15 1-A16 1-A17 1-A18 1-A19 1-A20 1-B1 1-B2 1-B3 1-B4 1-B5 1-B6 1-B7 1-B8 1-B9 1-B10 1-B11 1-B12 1-B13 1-B14 1-B15 1-B16 1-B17 1-B18 1-B19 1-B20 2-A1 2-A2 2-A3 2-A4 2-A5 2-A6 2-A7 2-A8 2-A9 2-A10 2-A11 2-B1 2-B2 2-B3 2-B4 2-B5 2-B6 2-B7 2-B8 2-B9 2-B10 2-B11 4-A1 24V 4-A2 24V 4-A3 24V 4-A4 24V 4-A5 NC 4-A6 PGND 4-A7 PGND 4-A8 PGND 4-A9 PGND 4-A10 M713 CLOCK 4-A11 M713 RESET 4-A12 M713 CONT 4-A13 M704 A 4-A14 M704 A 4-A15 M704 B 4-A16 M704 B 4-A17 M705 A 4-A18 M705 A 4-A19 M705 B 4-A20 M705 B 4-B1 SG 4-B1 SG 4-B3 SG 4-B4 5V 4-B5 5V 4-B6 5V 4-B7 M711 A 4-B8 M711 A 4-B9 M711 B 4-B10 M711 B 4-B11 M706 A 4-B12 M706 A 4-B13 M706 B 4-B14 M706 B 4-B15 M709 CONT 4-B16 M709 F/R 4-B17 M710 CONT 4-B18 M714 CONT 4-B19 M714 F/R 4-B20 M715 CONT 5-A1 PS705 5-A2 PS708 5-A3 PS709 5-A4 PS711 5-A5 PS713 5-A6 PS714 5-A7 PS720 5-A8 F_CHP 5-A9 R_CHP 5-A10 5-A11 5-B1 5-B2 F_LS 5-B3 F_DHP 5-B4 F_CS 5-B5 F_LST 5-B6 F_CD 5-B7 R_LS 5-B8 R_DHP 5-B9 R_CS 5-B10 R_LST 5-B11 R_CD
M708
122-1 122-2 122-3
PAPER EXIT OPENING MOTOR
PS712
10-3 24V 10-4 DRIVE
PAPER EXIT OPENING HP SENSOR
4
CLINCHER HP SENSOR/F
CLINCHER MOTOR/F
178-4 178-3 178-2 178-1 178-5 178-6 178-7
5-B8 24V 5-B9 24V 5-B10 M715 DRIVE2 5-B11 M715 DRIVE2 5-B1 SGND 5-B2 PS733 5-B3 5V
SD704
PAPER EXIT OPENING SOLENOID
FS-215 ONLY
M704
154-1 154-2 154-5 154-6 154-3 154-4
5-A1 24V 5-A2 24V 5-A3 A 5-A4 A 5-A5 B 5-A6 B
11-1 5V 11-4 PS 11-7 GND
125-1 125-2 125-3
PS706
MAIN TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR
CLINCHER ROTATION HP SENSOR
PS714
177-3 177-2 177-1
5-A15 5V 5-A14 IN 5-A13 SGND
STAPLER MOTOR/R
M709 PS730 SW701 SW702 M714 PS731 SW703 SW704
3-A1 NC 3-A2 3-A3 3-A4 3-A5 3-A6 3-A7 3-A8 3-A9 3-A10 SGND 3-A11 3-A12 3-A13 3-A14 3-B1 3-B2 3-B3 NC 3-B4 3-B5 3-B6 3-B7 3-B8 3-B9 3-B10 3-B11 3-B12 3-B13 3-B14
9-A1 SUBIN5PI 9-A2 SD706 CONT 9-A3 PS722 9-A4 PS723 9-A5 PS724 9-A6 PS725 9-A7 PS726 9-A8 PS729 9-A9 PS730 9-A10 BMSET 9-A11 M716 A 9-A12 M716 A 9-A13 M716 B 9-A14 M716 B 9-B1 M719 DRIVE1 9-B2 M719 DRIVE2 9-B3 SUBOUT1 9-B4 M718 MODE 9-B5 M718 CLOCK 9-B6 M718 RESET 9-B7 M718 F/R 9-B8 M718 CONT1 9-B9 M718 CONT2 9-B10 M720 BRAKE 9-B11 M720 CONT 9-B12 M720 CLOCK 9-B13 M720 PLL 9-B14 M720 F/R
STAPLER HP SENSOR/R CARTRIDGE SWITCH/R STAPLE SWITCH/R
DRIVE1 DRIVE1 DRIVE2 DRIVE2 SGND PS 5V R_CST 5V R_LS 5V
180-11 180-12 180-8 180-9 180-6 180-3 180-5 180-2 180-4 180-1 180-7
8-A1 M709 DRIVE1 8-A2 M709 DRIVE1 8-A3 M709 DRIVE2 8-A4 M709 DRIVE2 8-A5 5V 8-A6 R_LS 8-A7 PS730 8-A8 R_CS 8-A9 R_CST-IN 8-A10 R_CD 8-A11 SGND
2-1 DRIVE-F 2-2 DRIVE-R
106-1 106-2
M703
TRAY UP/DOWN MOTOR
5
STAPLER MOTOR/F STAPLER HP SENSOR/F CARTRIDGE SWITCH/F STAPLE SWITCH/F
DRIVE1 DRIVE1 DRIVE2 DRIVE2 SGND PS 5V F_CST 5V F_LS 5V
2-3 5V 2-4 PS 2-5 GND 3-1 5V 3-4 PS 3-7 GND 3-2 5V 3-5 PS 3-8 GND 3-3 5V 3-6 PS 3-9 GND
130-1 130-2 130-3
PS703
131-1 131-2 131-3
TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR
PS702
132-1 132-2 132-3 133-1 133-2 133-3
TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
181-11 181-12 181-8 181-9 181-6 181-3 181-5 181-2 181-4 181-1 181-7
8-B1 M714 DRIVE1 8-B2 M714 DRIVE1 8-B3 M714 DRIVE2 8-B4 M714 DRIVE2 8-B5 5V 8-B6 F_LS 8-B7 PS731 8-B8 F_CS 8-B9 F_CST-IN 8-B10 F_CD 8-B11 SGND
PS707 PS715
STAPLER ROTATION MOTOR
STAPLER PAPER EXIT UPPER LIMIT SENSOR COUNTER RESET SENSOR
M706
STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR
156-1 156-2 156-5 156-6 156-3 156-4
8-A12 24V 8-A13 24V 8-A14 A 8-A15 A 8-A16 B 8-A17 B
3-10 24V 3-11 DRIVE
111-1 111-2
SD705 PS713
182-3 182-2 182-1
BY-PASS GATE SOLENOID

8-B17 GND 8-B16 PS 8-B15 5V
6
STAPLER MOVEMENT MOTOR
M711
STAPLER MOVEMENT HP SENSOR
155-1 155-2 155-5 155-6 155-3 155-4
5-A7 24V 5-A8 24V 5-A9 A 5-A10 A 5-A11 B 5-A12 B
FNS CB
PS711
ALIGNMENT MOTOR/U
187-1 187-2 187-3
199-3 199-2 199-1
1 2 3
6-B6 5V 6-B5 PS 6-B4 GND
1-B8 B 1-B7 B 1-B6 A 1-B5 A 1-B4 24V 1-B3 24V
103-4 104-3 104-6 104-5 104-2 104-1
M721
SUB-TRAY PAPER EXIT MOTOR
RB
M705
157-1 157-2 157-3 157-4 157-5 157-6
6-A1 24V 6-A2 24V 6-A3 A 6-A4 A 6-A5 B 6-A6 B
12-A1 5V 12-A7 PS 12-B6 GND
1 2 3
141 4 3 2
120-1 120-2 120-3
PS701
SUB-TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR
ALIGNMENT HP SENSOR/U
PS708
STACKER ENTRANCE MOTOR
183-1 183-2 183-3
195-6 195-5 195-4
4 5 6
6-A9 5V 6-A8 PS 6-A7 GND
12-A5 5V 12-A11 PS 12-B2 GND
1 2 3
140 3 2 1
124-1 124-2 124-3
PS719 M713
158-1 158-6 158-3 158-4 158-5 158-6
6-B10 24V 6-B11 24V 6-B12 A 6-B13 A 6-B14 B 6-B15 B
SUB-TRAY FULL SENSOR
6-61
STACKER ENTRANCE SENSOR PAPER EXIT BELT HP SENSOR STACKER NO PAPER SENSOR
PS705 PS709 PS720
186-1 186-2 186-3
198-3 198-2 198-1
1 2 3
6-B3 5V 6-B2 PS 6-B1 GND

184-1 184-2 184-3 185-1 185-2 185-3 195-9 195-8 195-7 195-3 195-2 195-1 1 2 3 7 8 9
6-A12 5V 6-A11 PS 6-A10 GND 6-A15 5V 6-A14 PS 6-A13 GND
6-1 24V-PS 10-1 24V 10-2 N.C. 10-3 DRIVE 10-4 N.C. 10-5 N.C. 10-6 N.C. 10-7 24V 10-8 CONT
29-2 29-1
MS701
FNS INTERLOCK SWITCH
8
113-1 113-2 111-2 111-1
6-2 5V 6-3 SGND 6-4 PGND 6-5 PGND
753-1 753-2 753-3 753-4 753-5 753-6
1-1 24V 1-2 5V 1-3 SGND 1-4 PGND 1-5 PGND 1-6 FGND
MAIN BODY
Symbol
7-1 SRXD 7-2 SGND 7-3 SRTS 7-4 STXD 7-5 SGND 7-6 SCTS
752-1 752-2 752-3 752-4 752-5 752-6
752-6 752-5 752-4 752-3 752-2 752-1
106-1 MTXD 106-2 SGND 106-3 MCTS 106-4 MRXD 106-5 SGND 106-6 MRTS1
M722 SD702
STACKING ASSIST MOTOR
STACKING ASSIST SOLENOID
Symbol FNSCB M701 M702 M703 M704 M705 M706 M707 M708 M709 M710 M711 M712 M713 M714 M715 M716 M718 M719 M720 M721 M722 SD702 SD704 SD705 SD706 MS701 PS701 PS702 PS703 PS704 PS705 PS706 PS707 PS708 PS709 PS711 PS712 PS713 PS714 PS715 PS716 FNS control board
Part name 1-C 1-A 3-A 5-B 4-H 7-H 6-H 3-A 4-A 5-H 4-H 6-H 2-B 7-H 5-H 4-H 1-H 2-H 2-H 2-H 7-A 9-E 9-E 4-B 6-B 3-H 8-A 7-A 5-B 5-B 1-A 7-H 4-B 6-B 7-H 8-H 7-H 4-A 6-H 5-H 6-B 2-A FNS conveyance motor Shift motor Tray up/down motor Clincher rotation motor Alignment motor/U Stapler rotation motor Paper exit roller motor Paper exit opening motor Stapler motor/R Clincher motor/R Stapler movement motor Gate drive motor Stacker entrance motor Stapler motor/F Clincher motor/F Alignment motor/L Folding stopper motor Folding knife motor Folding conveyance motor Sub-tray paper exit motor Stacking assist motor Stacking assist solenoid Paper exit opening solenoid By-pass gate solenoid Three-folding gate solenoid FNS interlock switch Sub-tray paper exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor Tray lower limit sensor FNS entrance sensor Stacker entrance sensor Main tray paper exit sensor Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor Alignment HP sensor/U Paper exit belt HP sensor Stapler movement HP sensor Paper exit opening HP sensor Stapler rotation HP sensor Clincher rotation HP sensor Counter reset sensor Gate HP sensor
Location PS718 PS719 PS720 PS722 PS723 PS724 PS725 PS726 PS729 PS730 PS731 PS732 PS733 LED729 SW701 SW702 SW703 SW704
Symbol Shift HP sensor
Part name 3-B 7-A 8-H 2-H 2-H 1-H 3-H 3-H 3-H 5-H 5-H 4-H 4-H 3-H 5-H 5-H 6-H 6-H Sub-tray full sennsor Stacker no paper sensor Folding knife HP sensor Folding stopper HP sensor Alignment HP sensor/L Folding exit sensor Folding passage sensor Folding full sensor Stapler HP sensor/R Stapler HP sensor/F Clincher HP sensor/R Clincher HP sensor/F Folding full LED Cartridge switch/R Staple switch/R Cartridge switch/F Staple switch/F
Location
6-62
4.4
TU-109 Overall Wiring Diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
Symbol
I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Faston Connector Crimp Relay connector
6-63
Symbol CBR Coil DCPS LED101 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 M106 M107 M108 MS2 MS3 MS4 PS101 PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 PS106 PS107 PS108 PS109 PS110 PS111 PS112 PS113 PS114 RL1 RL2 TUDB Circuit breaker Coil
Part name 2-H 4-H 5-H 2-D 1-D 3-D 3-C 3-C 5-D 7-B 7-B 1-C 3-H 6-D 7-D 2-D 4-D 4-D 4-D 5-D 3-D 2-D 6-D 2-D 6-D 6-D 6-D 5-C 5-C 2-H 2-H 1-E
Location
DC power supply unit Scraps full LED Conveyance motor Trimmer motor Stopper motor Stopper release motor Press motor Holder motor Pusher motor Scraps removal motor Front door MS Stacker MS3 Stacker MS4 Entrance PS Conveyance PS Stopper HP PS Stopper release HP PS Press HP PS Trimmer HP PS Scraps box detection PS Exit PS Scraps full PS Upper limit PS Lower limit PS Pusher PS Stacker full PS Stacker door PS Relay 1 Relay 2 TU drive board
6-64
5.1
I
F/G F/G
623-1-1 623-1B-8B 24V 623-2B-7B 24V PGND PGND 5V 5V SGND SGND DTXD SGND CTS DRXD SGND RTS DSET 623-3B-6B 623-4B-5B 622-3-3 622-4-4 622-1-1 622-2-2 621-7-1 623-9A-1A 623-8A-2A 623-7A-3A 623-6A-4A 623-5A-5A 623-4A-6A 623-3A-7A 623-2A-8A 623-1A-9A 621-6-2 621-5-3 621-4-4 621-3-5 621-2-6 621-1-7 623-8B-1B 623-7B-2B 623-6B-3B 623-5B-4B
5. APPENDIX
8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8)
1
15 16 114 115 134 135 136 137 138 139 ADF DF-319 (OPTION)
2
140 141
601-20 601-19 601-18 601-17 603-2 V 603-3 W 617-9-1 605-1 24V4 605-2 CONT 605-3 PGND 617-8-2 617-7-3 606-1 606-2 606-3 603-1 U
604-7
142 143 144 145

601-16 601-15 601-14 601-13
M1
604-2 604-1
604-6 604-5 604-4 604-3
SCANNER MOTOR
146 147 148 149

601-12 601-11 601-10 601-9
L1
L1 INVB
150 151
EXPOSURE LAMP
3
152 153
601-8 601-7 601-6 601-5
154
274-5 272-17A IDXYJTB
273-17 - 1
609-7 5V2 609-8 PS
617-6-4 617-5-5 609-9 SGND 617-4-6
615-6-1 615-5-2 615-4-3
612-3
155
PS3
612-2 612-1 601-4 601-3 601-2 601-1 617-3-7 609-10 5V2 609-11 PS 609-12 SGND 602-1 5V2 602-2 SGND 602-3 24V2 602-4 PGND 609-1 SGND 609-2 PS 617-2-8 617-1-9 615-3-4 615-2-5 615-1-6 613-3
274-4
273-16 - 2
156
272-16A SGND
274-3 272-15A LDYIDX
273-15 - 3
APS SENSOR/S
157 158
INDEX SB Y
274-2 272-14A SGND 273-14 - 4
159
MU-412 (OPTION)
PS4
274-1
273-13 - 5
160
272-13A LD5V 272-12A LDYJTB
613-2 613-1
SCDB
275-12 273-12 - 6 273-11 - 7 272-11A MPCYLD 272-10A MPCYDI 272-9A MPCYCK 272-8A /ALMYRST 272-7A /LDYALM 272-6A PWMY272-5A PWMY+ 272-4A /LDYENB 272-3A /S/H_Y 272-2A SGND 272-1A LD5V 273-10 - 8 273- 9 - 9 273- 8 - 10 273- 7 - 11 273- 6 - 12 273- 5 - 13 273- 4 - 14 273- 3 - 15 273- 2 - 16 273- 1 - 17 275-11 275-10 275-9 275-8 275-7 275-6 275-5 275-4 275-3 275-2 275-1
APS SENSOR/L
11 12 13 14
614-3-1 614-2-2 609-3 5V2 609-4 SGND 609-5 PS 609-6 5V2 609-13 SIG 609-14 SGND 607-1 CONT 607-2 EM 607-3 PGND 608-3-1 608-2-2 608-1-3 614-1-3
610-3
PS1
610-2 610-1 611-3
SCANNER HP SENSOR
LDB Y
278-5 277-17 - 1 272-17B IDXMJTB 272-16B SGND 272-15B LDMIDX 272-14B SGND 272-13B LD5 272-12B LDMJTB 272-11B MPCMLD 272-10B MPCMDI 272-9B MPCMCK 272-8B /ALMMRST 272-7B /LDMALM 272-6B PWMM272-5B PWMM+ 277- 4 - 14 277- 3 - 15 279-3 279-2 277- 2 - 16 279-1 277- 1 - 17 272-4B /LDMENB 272-3B /S/H_Y 272-2B SGND 272-1B LD5V 277-16 - 2 277-15 - 3 277-14 - 4 277-13 - 5 277-12 - 6 277-11 - 7 277-10 - 8 277- 9 - 9 277- 8 - 10 277- 7 - 11 277- 6 - 12 277- 5 - 13 278-4 278-3 278-2 278-1 279-12 279-11 279-10 279-9 279-8 279-7 279-6 279-5 279-4
4
INDEX SB M LDB M
282-5 282-4 282-3 282-2 282-1 283-12 283-11 283-10 283-9 283-8 281-17 - 1 281-16 - 2 281-15 - 3 281-14 - 4 281-13 - 5 281-12 - 6 281-11 - 7 281-10 - 8 281- 9 - 9 281- 8 - 10 280-17A IDXCJTB 280-16A SGND 280-15A LDCIDX 280-14A SGND 280-13A LD5V 280-12A LDCJTB 280-11A MPCCLD 280-10A MPCCDI 280-9A MPCCCK 280-8A /ALMCRST
PS2
611-2 611-1 616-2 616-1
APS TIMING SENSOR
RS1 M2
RESET SWITCH
SCANNER COOLING FAN
5 6
INDEX SB C LDB C
HDD IFB
CN220(PCi B to B)
269-1 269-2 269-3 269-4
HD-106 (OPTION)
HD -106
266-1 12V 266-2 SGND 266-3 SGND 266-4 5V2
IPB 1/2
131 132 133 130
SCANNER UNIT 1/2
IP-901(OPTION)
7
Appendix-1
283-7 283-6 283-5 283-4 283-3 283-2 283-1
281- 7 - 11 281- 6 - 12 281- 5 - 13 281- 4 - 14 281- 3 - 15 281- 2 - 16 281- 1 - 17
280-7A /LDCALM 280-6A PWMC280-5A PWMC+ 280-4A /LDCENB 280-3A /S/H_C 280-2A SGND 280-1A LD5V
286-5 286-4 286-3 286-2
285-17 - 1 285-16 - 2 285-15 - 3 285-14 - 4
280-17B IDXKJTB 280-16B SGND 280-15B LDKIDX 280-14B SGND
INDEX SB K
8 9
286-1 287-12 287-11 287-10 287-9 287-8 287-7 287-6 287-5 287-4 287-3 287-2 287-1
285-13 - 5 285-12 - 6 285-11 - 7 285-10 - 8 285- 9 - 9 285- 8 - 10 285- 7 - 11 285- 6 - 12 285- 5 - 13 285- 4 - 14 285- 3 - 15 285- 2 - 16 285- 1 - 17
280-13B LD5V 280-12B LDKJTB 280-11B MPCKLD 280-10B MPCKDI 280-9B MPCKCK 280-8B /ALMKRST 280-7B /LDKALM 280-6B PWMK280-5B PWMK+ 280-4B /LDKENB 280-3B /S/H_K 280-2B SGND 280-1B LD5V
LDB K
260-B34 GND 260-B33 N.C 260-B32 WAKEUP260-B31 CPRDY+ 260-B30 CTS260-B29 RXD+ 260-B28 ONLINE260-B27 AC_DOWN+ 260-B26 ENG_SLP260-B25 ENG_SET+ 260-B24 RTS260-B23 TXD+ 260-B22 PSIG0260-B21 GND 260-B20 PSIG1260-B19 PSIG2260-B18 GND 260-B17 PCLK260-B16 PSIG3260-B15 GND 260-B14 PSIG4260-B13 PSIG5260-B12 GND 260-B11 PSIG6260-B10 PSIG7260-B8 SSIG3+ 260-B7 SCLK+ 260-B5 SSIG2+ 260-B4 SSIG1+ 260-B3 GND 260-B2 SSIG0+ 260-B1 GND 260-A34 GND 260-A33 N.C 260-A32 WAKEUP+ 260-A31 CPRDY260-A30 CTS+ 260-A29 RXD260-A28 ONLINE+ 260-A27 AC_DOWN260-A26 ENG_SLP+ 260-A25 ENG_SET260-A24 RTS+ 260-A23 TXD260-A22 PSIG0+ 260-A21 GND 260-A20 PSIG1+ 260-A19 PSIG2+ 260-A18 GND 260-A17 PCLK+ 260-A16 PSIG3+ 260-A15 GND 260-A14 PSIG4+ 260-A13 PSIG5+ 260-A12 GND 260-A11 PSIG6+ 260-A10 PSIG7+ 260-A9 GND 260-A8 SSIG3260-A7 SCLK260-A6 GND 260-A5 SSIG2260-A4 SSIG1260-A3 GND 260-A2 SSIG0260-A1 GND
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol DF-319 HD-106 HDD IFB INDX SB Y INDX SB M INDX SB C INDX SB K IP-901 L1 LDB Y LDB M LDB C LDB K M1 M2 MU-412 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 RS1 L1INVB IPB SCDB
Part name DF-319 (option) HD-106 (option) HDD I/F board INDEX sensor board /Y INDEX sensor board /M INDEX sensor board /C INDEX sensor board /K IP-901 (option) Exposure lamp Laser drive board /Y Laser drive board /M Laser drive board /C Laser drive board /K Scanner motor Scanner cooling fan MU-412 (option) Scanner HP sensor APS timing sensor APS sensor /S APS sensor /L DF Reset switch L1 inverter Image processing board Scanner drive board 1-A 6-D 5-D 3-I 5-I 6-I 8-I 7-D 3-A 4-I 5-I 7-I 8-I 2-A 5-A 3-F 4-A 4-A 3-A 4-A 4-A 3-B 3-F 2-C
Location
Appendix-2
5.2
I 1
271-1 12V 271-2 SGND 271-3 5V2 271-4 SGND 271-5 3.5V 271-6 SGND
10 7 5 6 8 9
IPB 2/2
SCANNER UNIT 2/2
2
161
250-1 250-2 250-3 250-4
CCDB
162 163 164 165

250-5 250-6 250-7 250-8
166
3
167 168 169
250-9 250-10 250-11 250-12
170 171 172 173

250-13 250-14 250-15 250-16
174 175 176 177

250-17 250-18
178
4
OACB
217-50 GND 217-49 AD_12V 217-48 AD_12V 217-47 GND 217-46 AD_5V 217-45 AD_5V 217-44 AD_5V 217-43 AD_5V 217-42 AD_5V 217-41 ADRST 217-40 LVDSCK1+ 217-39 LVDSCK1217-38 GND 217-37 AD_D4+ 217-36 AD_D4217-35 GND 217-34 AD_D3+ 217-33 AD_D3217-32 GND 217-31 LVDSCK0+ 217-30 LVDSCK0217-29 GND 217-28 AD_D2+ 217-27 AD_D2217-26 GND 217-25 AD_D1+ 217-24 AD_D1217-23 GND 217-22 AD_D0+ 217-21 AD_D0217-20 GND 217-19 SDO 217-18 SDI 217-17 /SEN 217-16 SCK 217-15 GND 217-14 LVDSCK217-13 LVDSCK+ 217-12 GND 217-11 RCK217-10 RCK+ 217-9 GND 217-8 TCK217-7 TCK+ 217-6 GND 217-5 BCLAMP 217-4 ACLAMP 217-3 CLAMP 217-2 TG 217-1 GND
551-50 551-49 551-48 551-47 551-46 551-45 551-44 551-43 551-42 551-41 551-40 551-39 551-38 551-37 551-36 551-35 551-34 551-33 551-32 551-31 551-30 551-29 551-28 551-27 551-26 551-25 551-24 551-23 551-22 551-21 551-20 551-19 551-18 551-17 551-16 551-15 551-14 551-13 551-12 551-11 551-10 551-9 551-8 551-7 551-6 551-5 551-4 551-3 551-2 551-1
5
252-1 5V1 252-2 SGND 252-3 REM/1 252-4 AC_OFF
171-1-6 171-2-5 171-3-4 171-4-3 171-5-2 171-6-1
173-1 5V2 173-2 5V2 173-3 SGND 173-4 SGND 173-5 12V 173-6
175-4 175-3 175-2 175-1
Y1CONT X1CONT Y2CONT X2CONT
3 1 2 4
TOUCH PANEL BOARD
4PIN CT6PIN
75 78 77 79 76
170-12-1 251-1 DATA_M 251-2 DATA_OP 251-3 ACK_M 251-4 ACK_OP 251-5 REQ_M 251-6 REQ_OP 170-11-2 170-10-3 170-9-4 170-8-5 170-7-6
174-14
LCD_ADJ
MB
172-12 172-11 172-10 172-9 172-8 172-7 170-6-7 251-7 CARDIN 251-8 CARD_RXD 251-9 CARD_TXD 251-10 WT_LED 251-11 ST_LED 251-12 ST_SIG 251-13 SW_SIG 170-5-8 170-4-9 170-3-10 170-2-11 170-1-12
174-13 174-12 174-11 174-10 174- 9 174- 8
LCD_24V LD3 LD2 LD1 LD0 LCD_24V
LCDB
6 7
14PIN
USB
CT12PIN
172-6 172-5 172-4 172-3 172-2 172-1
174- 7 174- 6 174- 5 174- 4 174- 3 174- 2 174- 1 251-14 SGND 251-15 5V 251-16 SGND 161-3-2 161-4-1 161-2-3 161-1-4
GND 5V CP LP FLM NC DSP_OFF
259-1 VBUS 259-2 D259-3 D+ 259-4 GND
Amphenol 36pin
176-1 176-2 176-3 FT-31 FT-32 176-4 176-5 162-3 162-2 162-1
165-3 5V 165-2 GND 165-1 PWM 158-3 SGND 158-2 LCD_ADJ
OB_INVB
Appendix-3
6PIN
256-1 HT_CLOCK 256-2 CENTD0 256-3 CENTD1 256-4 CENTD2 256-5 CENTD3 256-6 CENTD4 256-7 CENTD5 256-8 CENTD6 256-9 CENTD7 256-10 PR_CLOCK 256-11 PR_BUSY 256-12 ADREQ 256-13 XFLAG 256-14 HT_BUSY 256-15 N.C 256-16 N.C 256-17 N.C 256-18 N.C 256-19 GND 256-20 GND 256-21 GND 256-22 GND 256-23 GND 256-24 GND 256-25 GND 256-26 GND 256-27 GND 256-28 N.C 256-29 N.C 256-30 N.C 256-31 INT_ISWB 256-32 DAVALB 256-33 N.C 256-34 N.C 256-35 N.C 256-36 AC1284
SW2
DB-9
257-1 DCD 257-2 RXD 257-3 TXD 257-4 DTR 257-5 GND 257-6 DSR 257-7 RTS 257-8 CTS 257-9 RI
RJ-45
255-1 TX+ 255-2 TX255-3 RX+ 255-4 GND 255-5 GND 255-6 RX255-7 GND 255-8 GND
176-6
158-1 LCD_24V
8 9 I
OB3
OB2
OB1
MAIN SWITCH
LAN I/F
KRDS I/F (RS-232)
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol SW2 OB INVB LCDB CCDB OB1 OB2 OB3 OACB MB
Part name Main switch OB inverter board LCD board Touch panel board CCD board Operation board /1 Operation board /2 Operation board /3 Overall control board Memory board 8-D 7-A 6-A 5-A 2-A 5-C 8-E 8-A 3-F 6-G
Location
Appendix-4
5.3
PRECHARGING LAMP/Y
24V2 362-1-2 362-2-1 360-2A PCLCONTY 361A-4-7 360-1A 24V2 361A-3-8
PCL Y
137
CONT 620-4 SOUT
I
134
361A-1-10 620-1 SIN
135
361A-2-9
620-2 SGND
136
620-3 RTS
138
24V2
363-1-2 363-2-1 360-4A PCLCONTM 361A-6-5 360-3A 24V2
361A-5-6
620-5 SGND
139
1
620-6 CTS CONT
PRECHARGING LAMP/M
PCL M
140
620-7 DSET 24V2 CONT 364-2-1 361A-8-3 364-1-2 361A-7-4
141
360-5A 24V2
600-1 L1 CONT
142
PRECHARGING LAMP/C
PCL C
360-6A PCLCONTC 600-2 SGND
143
24V2
365-1-2
361A-9-2
600-3 PS4
144
145
PRECHARGING LAMP/K
PCL K
CONT 365-2-1 360-8A PCLCONTK 600-5 PS2 361A-10-1 360-7A 24V2
600-4 PS3
146
600-6 PS1
147
12V TDS_SIG SGND TDS_VREF 360-12A TDSYVREF 600-11 APS2 600-12 APS3 600-13 SCAN_CW 600-14 SCAN_PC 600-15 SGND 600-16 SCANVREF 600-17 SGND 600-18 SCAN_EN 600-19 SGND 600-20 SCAN_CK 360-13A 12V 360-14A TONERM_S 360-15A SGND 360-16A TDSMVREF 360-17A 12V 360-18A TONERC_S 360-19A SGND 360-20A TDSCVREF 360-1B 12V 573-1 5V 573-2 M_TEMP1 573-3 GND 360-2B TONERK_S 360-3B SGND 360-4B TDSKVREF 360-5B 24V2 360-6B SURF_EVY 360-7B SGND 360-8B PGND 12V TDS_SIG SGND TDS_VREF 12V TDS_SIG SGND TDS_VREF 12V TDS_SIG SGND TDS_VREF 24V2 SURFY_EV SGND PGND 372-1 366-8-1 361B-8-13 372-2 366-7-2 361B-7-14 372-3 366-6-3 361B-6-15 372-4 366-5-4 361B-5-16 371-4-1 366-4-5 361B-4-17 371-3-2 366-3-6 361B-3-18 371-1-4 371-2-3 366-2-7 361B-2-19 366-1-8 361B-1-20 370-4-1 361C-12-1 370-3-2 361C-11-2 370-1-4 370-2-3 361C-10-3 361C-9-4 369-4-1 361C-8-5 369-3-2 361C-7-6 369-1-4 369-2-3 361C-6-7 361C-5-8 368-4-1 361C-4-9 360-11A SGND 600-10 APS1 368-3-2 361C-3-10 360-10A TONERY_S 600-9 M2 CONT
368-1-4 361C-1-12 361C-2-11 360-9A 12V 600-7 SGND
148
TONER DENSITY SENSOR/Y
TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K
368-2-3
600-8 M2 EM
149 150 151 152 153 154
PROCESS UNIT
TONER DENSITY SENSOR/M
155
2
TONER DENSITY SENSOR/C TONER DENSITY SENSOR/K
574-1 5V 574-2 M_TEMP2 574-3 GND
156 157 158 159 160
DRPS Y
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/Y
DRPSB Y DRPSB M DRPSB C
3
24V2 SURFM_EV SGND PGND 373-1 367-4-9 361B-12-9 373-2 367-3-10 361B-11-10 373-3 367-2-11 360-11B SGND 360-12B PGND 361B-10-11 373-4 360-9B 24V2 360-10B SURF_EVM 367-1-12 361B-9-12
652-1-2
656-1-15
657-1
17 18
650-13A CONT 650-12A CLOCK 650-11A LOCK
652-2-1
656-2-14 656-3-13 656-4-12 656-5-11 650-10A TEMP.ERROR 656-6-10
657-2 657-3 657-4 657-5 657-6
M3
DRPS M
24V2 SURFC_EV SGND PGND 374-1 367-8-5 361B-16-5 374-2 367-7-6 361B-15-6 374-3 367-6-7 361B-14-7 374-4 367-5-8 361B-13-8 360-13B 24V2 360-15B SGND 360-16B PGND
POLYGON MOTOR/Y
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/M
360-14B SURF_EVC
650-9A 5V2 650-8A PS 650-7A SGND 650-6A B
656-7-9 656-8-8 656-9-7 656-10-6 360-17B 24V2 650-5A B 656-11-5 360-18B SURF_EVK 650-4A A 656-12-4 659-6 659-5 659-3
658-1
PS5
658-2 658-3
DRPS C
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/C
LASER CORRECTION SENSOR/Y
4
24V2 SURFK_EV SGND PGND 477-1 477-2 477-3 477-4 477-5 477-6 475-2-1 475-1-2 375-1 367-12-1 375-2 367-11-2 375-3 367-10-3 375-4 367-9-4
361B-17-4 361B-18-3 361B-19-2 361B-20-1
M7
360-19B SGND 360-20B PGND 361D-8-11 361D-7-12 361D-6-13 361D-5-14 361D-4-15 361D-3-16 361D-2-17 361D-1-18 476-6 476-5 476-4 476-3 476-2 476-1 564-2 DRIVE 564-1 24V2
550-3A A 650-2A 5V2 650-1A 5V2
656-13-3 656-14-2 656-15-1
659-4 659-2 659-1
DRPSB K
DRPS K
LASER CORRECTION MOTOR/Y
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/K
PRCB 1/2
653-1-2
660-1-15
661-1
19 20
650-13B CONT 650-12B CLOCK 650-11B LOCK 650-10B TEMP.ERROR 378-2 377-1A-11A 496-1A-11A 376-1A 24V2 378-1 377-2A-10A 496-2A-10A 376-2A DRIVE 650-9B 5V2
653-2-1
660-2-14 660-3-13 660-4-12 660-5-11 660-6-10 660-7-9
661-2 661-3 661-4 661-5 661-6 662-1
POLYGON MOTOR/M
M4
SD2
PS6
COLOR REGISTRATION SHUTTER SOLENOID

499-1 499-2 499-3 499-4 498-1 498-2 498-3 498-4
SD1
5
DRUM SEPARATION CLAW SOLENOID
650-8B PS 379-4 379-3 379-2 379-1 377-3A-9A 377-4A-8A 377-5A-7A 377-6A-6A 496-3A-9A 496-4A-8A 496-5A-7A 496-6A-6A 650-7B SGND 376-3A CREG1MON 376-4A CREG1LED 376-5A SGND 376-6A 5V2 376-12A N.C 376-13A N.C 650-6B B 650-5B B 650-4B A 550-3B A
660-8-8 660-9-7 660-10-6 660-11-5 660-12-4 660-13-3 663-6 663-5 663-3
662-2 662-3
LASER CORRECTION SENSOR/M
PS8 PS9
COLOR REGISTRATION SENSOR/F

383-1 383-2 383-3 383-4
M8
663-4 381-1 381-2 381-3 381-4 382-4 382-3 382-2 382-1 558-5 558-4 558-3 377-1B-11B 377-2B-10B 377-3B-9B 377-4B-8B 377-5B-7B 377-6B-6B 377-7B-5B 496-1B-11B 496-2B-10B 496-3B-9B 496-4B-8B 496-5B-7B 496-6B-6B 496-7B-5B 376-14A N.C 376-1B CREG2MON 376-2B CREG2LED 376-3B SGND 376-4B 5V2 376-5B DS2_VREF 376-6B DS2_CNT 654-1-2 664-1-15 665-1 650-2B 5V2 650-1B 5V2 660-14-2 660-15-1 663-2 663-1
LASER CORRECTION MOTOR/M
COLOR REGISTRATION SENSOR/R
IMAGE CORRECTION UNIT
6 7
21 22
PS11
GAMMA SENSOR FIXING COOLING FAN/1 PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR PAPER EXIT SENSOR
M5
558-2 558-1 306-2
377-8B-4B 377-9B-3B 377-10B-2B
496-8B-4B 496-9B-3B 496-10B-2B
376-7B SGND 376-8B 12V 376-9B DS2_SIG 376-10B 24V2 651-20 CONT 651-19 CLOCK 651-18 LOCK 377-11B-1B 306-1 496-11B-1B
654-2-1
664-2-14 664-3-13 664-4-12 664-5-11
665-2 665-3 665-4 665-5
POLYGON MOTOR/C
SD3
GAMMA SHUTTER SOLENOID
376-11B DRIVE 376-12B N.C 376-13B N.C 376-14B N.C 491-1-4 491-2-3 384-1A DRIVE 384-2A EM 491-3-2 491-4-1 388-3 388-2 388-1 387-3 387-2 387-1 559-1-2 483-1-6 483-2-5 483-3-4 483-4-3 483-5-2 483-6-1 384-3A H/L 384-4A SGND 384-5A SGND 384-6A PS 384-7A 5V 384-8A SGND 384-9A PS 384-10A 5V 384-11A TCNT_DRIVE2
651-17 TEMP.ERROR 651-16 5V2 651-15 PS 651-14 SGND 651-13 B 651-12 B 651-11 A 551-10 A 651-9 5V2 651-8 5V2
664-6-10 664-7-9 664-8-8 664-9-7 664-10-6
665-6 666-1
PS7
666-2 666-3 667-6
LASER CORRECTION SENSOR/C
M10
664-11-5 664-12-4 664-13-3 664-14-2 664-15-1
667-5 667-3
M9
667-4 667-2 667-1
LASER CORRECTION MOTOR/C
PS12 PS13
Appendix-5
655-1-2
668-1-15
669-1
23 24
BLACK COUNTER
C(BK)
655-2-1 559-2-1 390-1-2 384-12A SHUT_24V 384-13A TCNT_DRIVE1 651-7 CONT
668-2-14 668-3-13 651-6 CLOCK 668-4-12
669-2 669-3 669-4
M6
TOTAL COUNTER
C(T)
POLYGON MOTOR/K
8 9 I
390-2-1
384-14A SHUT_24V 488-1-3 488-2-2 492-1 492-2 487-4 487-3 384-15A 384-1B DRIVE 492-3 488-3-1 492-4 487-2 487-1 489-1-4 489-2-3 384-2B EM
651-5 LOCK 651-4 TEMP.ERROR 651-3 5V2
668-5-11 668-6-10 668-7-9 651-2 KHP_SIG 384-3B H/L 384-4B GND 384-5B DRIVE 384-6B EM 651-1 SGND 668-8-8
669-5 669-6 670-1 670-2
TDB
M12
DRUM COOLING FAN/1
M13
DRUM COOLING FAN/2
PS14
TONER SUPPLY DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
M11
TRANSFER BELT COOLING FAN
668-9-7 668-10-6 668-11-5 489-3-2 489-4-1 490-1-4 490-2-3 490-3-2 490-4-1 389-3 389-2 389-1 668-12-4 384-7B H/L 384-8B SGND 384-9B DRIVE 384-10B EM 668-13-3 668-14-2 668-15-1
670-3
TEMP DETECTION BOARD
384-11B H/L 384-12B SGND 384-13B SGND 384-14B PS 384-15B 5V
APPENDIX
APPENDIX Symbol TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 PCL Y PCL M PCL C PCL K PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 PS11 PS12 PS13 PS14 SD1 SD2 SD3 DRPS Y DRPS M DRPS C DRPS K DRPSB Y DRPSB M DRPSB C DRPSB K TDB PRCB C (T) C (BK) Part name Toner density sensor /Y Toner density sensor /M Toner density sensor /C Toner density sensor /K Polygon motor /Y Polygon motor /M Polygon motor /C Polygon motor /K Laser correction motor /Y Laser correction motor /M Laser correction motor /C Fixing cooling fan /1 Transfer belt cooling fan Drum cooling fan /1
Drum cooling fan /2
Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003 Location 2-H 2-H 2-H 3-H 3-A 5-A 6-A 8-A 4-A 6-A 7-A 7-G 8-H 9-G 9-G 1-H 1-H 1-H 1-H 4-A 5-A 7-A 5-I 6-I 6-H 7-G 7-G 9-G 5-H 5-H 7-H 3-I 3-I 4-I 4-I 3-H 3-H 4-H 4-H 8-A 1-D 8-G 8-G Appendix-6
Pre-charging lamp /Y Pre-charging lamp /M Pre-charging lamp /C Pre-charging lamp /K Laser correction motor /Y Laser correction motor /M Laser correction motor /C Color registration sensor /F Color registration sensor /R Gamma sensor Paper exit full sensor Paper exit sensor Toner supply unit open/close sensor Drum separation claw solenoid Color Registration shutter solenoid Gamma shutter solenoid Drum potential sensor /Y Drum potential sensor /M Drum potential sensor /C Drum potential sensor /K Drum potential sensor board /Y Drum potential sensor board /M Drum potential sensor board /C Drum potential sensor board /K Temp detection board Printer control board Total counter Black counter
5.4
I
317-3 316-1 U 316-2 V 316-3 W 311-9 311-8 311-7 311-6 311-5 311-4 311-3 311-2 311-1 309-9A SGND 302-3 24V2 302-4 PGND 302-5 N.C 318-9 318-8 318-7 318-6 318-5 318-4 318-3 318-2 318-1 309-18A SGND 300-15 P_CTS 300-14 SGND 300-13 PY_IDX 300-12 PM_IDX 309-1B CLOCK 309-2B FH 309-3B ENABLE 309-4B H/L1 309-5B H/L2 309-6B ENA1 309-7B ENA2 309-8B 5V2 309-9B SGND 300-11 PC_IDX 300-10 PK_IDX 300-9 SGND 300-8 P_VTOP 300-7 P_PTOP 300-6 SGND 300-5 REM/4 300-4 S_VV 300-3 EE_VV 300-2 AC_OFF 309-10B CLOCK 309-11B FH 309-12B ENABLE 309-13B H/L1 309-14B H/L2 309-15B ENA1 309-16B ENA2 298-8-2 298-9-1 304-3-4 304-2-5 304-1-6 304-6-1 289-1 289-2 289-3 356-1 356-2 356-3 356-4 356-5 356-6 356-7 356-8 356-9 356-10 356-11 354-7-1 354-6-2 354-5-3 354-4-4 354-3-5 354-2-6 354-1-7 355-4-1 355-3-2 355-2-3 355-1-4 358-1-6 358-2-5 358-3-4 304-5-2 304-4-3 353-10 SGND 353-9 PS 353-8 5V2 353-7 5V2 353-6 SGND 353-5 CONT 353-4 CLOCK 353-3 CW/CCW 353-2 LOCK 353-1 H/L 37-11 5V2 37-10 GND 37-9 24V 37-8 COPV_ENB 37-7 SGND 353-13 SGND 353-12 PS 353-11 5V2 309-17B 5V2 309-18B SGND 300-1 MRL_OFF 35-1 CVM1_SIG 35-2 CVFD_SIG 35-3 CV_SIZE0 35-4 CV_SIZE1 35-5 CV_SIZE2 35-6 CV_SIZE3 35-7 CVUP_SIG 35-8 CPF0 35-9 CPF1 35-10 PGND 331-3 330-1 U 330-2 V 330-3 W 325-9 325-8 325-7 325-6 325-5 325-4 325-3 325-2 325-1 338-3 337-1 U 337-2 V 337-3 W 332-9 332-8 332-7 332-6 332-5 332-4 332-3 332-2 332-1 305-1 305-2 305-3 298-6-4 298-7-3 298-5-5 298-4-6 298-3-7 298-2-8 334-6 SGND 334-5 PS 334-4 5V2 334-3 SGND 334-2 PS 334-1 5V2 298-1-9 333-2 299-1-2 333-1 299-2-1 296-9-1 296-8-2 296-7-3 296-6-4 296-5-5 296-4-6 296-3-7 296-2-8 327-6 SGND 327-5 PS 327-4 5V2 327-3 SGND 327-2 PS 327-1 5V2 296-1-9 326-2 297-1-2 326-1 297-2-1 294-9-1 309-17A 5V2 300-16 P_STS 294-8-2 309-16A ENA2 294-7-3 300-17 P_RTS 309-15A ENA1 294-6-4 300-18 P_CMD 309-14A H/L2 294-5-5 309-13A H/L1 294-4-6 303-2 SGND 309-12A ENABLE 294-3-7 309-11A FH 303-1 5V2 294-2-8 309-10A CLOCK 302-6 N.C 294-1-9 302-2 PGND 324-3 323-1 U 323-2 V 323-3 W 320-6 SGND 320-5 PS 320-4 5V2 320-3 SGND 320-2 PS 320-1 5V2 319-2 295-1-2 319-1 295-2-1 292-9-1 309-8A 5V2 292-8-2 302-1 24V1 309-7A ENA2 292-7-3 309-6A ENA1 292-6-4 301-4 SGND 309-5A H/L2 292-5-5 309-4A H/L1 301-3 SGND 292-4-6 309-3A ENABLE 301-2 12V 292-3-7 309-2A FH 292-2-8 301-1 5V2 309-1A CLOCK 313-6 SGND 313-5 PS 313-4 5V2 313-3 SGND 313-2 PS 313-1 5V2 292-1-9 312-2 293-1-2 312-1 293-2-1
1
28 32
M14
317-2 317-1 315-1 315-2 315-3 314-1 314-2
DRUM MOTOR/Y
DRDB/Y
ENCODER SENSOR/Y1
53 54 56 57 59 60 55 58
PS60 PS61
DCPS1
314-3
ENCODER SENSOR/Y2
27 31
M15
324-2 324-1 322-1 322-2 322-3 321-1 321-2 321-3
DRUM MOTOR/M
2
ENCODER SENSOR/M1
63 64 161
DRDB/M
162
PS62 PS63
26 30
ENCODER SENSOR/M2
163 164 165 166
M16
331-2 331-1 329-1 329-2 329-3 328-1 328-2 328-3
DRUM MOTOR/C
167 168 169
DRDB/C
PS64 PS65
3
ENCODER SENSOR/C2
ENCODER SENSOR/C1
170 171 172 173 174 175 176
25 29
M17
338-2 338-1 336-1 336-2 336-3 335-1 335-2 335-3
DRUM MOTOR/K
177 178
DRDB/K
ENCODER SENSOR/K1
PS66 PS67
COIN VENDOR
CV (PARALLEL)
4
ENCODER SENSOR/K2
PS69 PS68
ENCODER SENSOR/BELT1
CV (SERIAL)
COIN VENDOR
5
TRANSFER BELT MOTOR
1st TRANSFER PRESSURE/RELEASE MOTOR
M18
37-6 OP_RTS 37-5 OP_DSR
52 51 50 49
357-1 A 357-2 A 357-3 B 358-4-3 358-5-2 358-6-1 359-3 359-2 359-1 349-1 349-2 349-3 349-4 349-5 349-6 349-7 349-8 349-9 349-10 349-11 350-1 341-7-1 341-6-2 341-5-3 341-4-4 341-3-5 341-2-6 341-1-7 345-4-1 345-3-2 345-2-3 345-1-4 342-7-1 291-1-3 291-2-2 357-4 B 357-5 24V2 357-6 24V2 357-7 SGND
37-4 OP_SIN 37-3 OP_CTS 37-2 OP_DTR 37-1 OP_SOUT 466-8 466-7
PGND 24VAC 466-6 466-5 466-4 466-3 PGND 24V2 SGND
M19
PRCB 2/2
70 69 72 116 73 74 71 117
6
DEVELOPING MOTOR/Y
12V
PS15
1st TRANSFER HP SENSOR
291-3-1
357-8 PS 357-9 5V2 340-14A 5V2 340-13A SGND 340-12A START/STOP 340-11A CLOCK 340-10A CW/CCW 340-9A LOCK 340-8A H/L
466-2 466-1 464-1 LTNPSIG 464-2 LTPR_SIG 464-3 LTSO_SIG 464-4 SGND 464-5 LTCCLCNT 464-6 LTSSDCNT 465-11-1 465-10-2 465-9-3 465-8-4
SGND 5V2
LCT LT-211 (OPTION)
M20
465-7-5 465-6-6
45 46 47 48
340-7A 5V2
464-7 LTRCLCNT 464-8 LTSCLCNT 464-9 SGND
465-5-7 465-4-8 465-3-9 464-10 SOUT2-2 465-2-10
7
M21
DEVELOPING MOTOR/M
350-2 350-3 350-4 350-5 350-6 350-7 350-8 350-9 350-10 350-11 351-1 351-2 351-3 351-4 351-5
342-6-2 342-5-3 342-4-4 342-3-5 342-2-6 342-1-7 346-4-1 346-3-2 346-2-3 346-1-4 343-7-1 343-6-2 343-5-3 343-4-4 343-3-5
340-6A SGND 340-5A START/STOP 340-4A CLOCK 340-3A CW/CCW 340-2A LOCK 340-1A H/L
464-11 SIN2-2 464-12 DRIVE (24V1) 464-13 STFAN_ER 464-14 H/L
465-1-11 471-9-1 471-8-2 471-7-3 471-6-4 470-4-1 470-3-2 470-2-3
M24
IPB COOLING FAN
41 42 43 44
340-14B 5V2 340-13B SGND 340-12B START/STOP 340-11B CLOCK 340-10B CW/CCW
464-15 PGND
471-5-5 471-4-6 464-16 DRIVE (24V1) 464-17 STFAN_ER 464-18 H/L 464-19 PGND 572-1 N.C 471-3-7 471-2-8 471-1-9
470-1-4 463-4-1 463-3-2 463-2-3 463-1-4
M25
Appendix-7
IP COOLING FAN
M22
8 9 I
351-6
343-2-6
572-2 N.C
DEVELOPING MOTOR/C
351-7 351-8 351-9 351-10 351-11 352-1 352-2 352-3 352-4 352-5 352-6
343-1-7 347-4-1 347-3-2 347-2-3 347-1-4 344-7-1 344-6-2 344-5-3 344-4-4 344-3-5 344-2-6
340-9B LOCK 340-8B H/L
572-3 N.C 572-4 N.C
37 38 39 40
340-7B 5V2 340-6B SGND 340-5B START/STOP 340-4B CLOCK 340-3B CW/CCW 340-2B LOCK 352-7 352-8 352-9 352-10 352-11 344-1-7 348-4-1 348-3-2 348-2-3 348-1-4 340-1B H/L
467-6 RTS 467-5 SGND 467-4 SIN 467-3 CTS 467-2 SGND 467-1 SOUT
468-1-6 468-2-5 468-3-4 468-4-3 468-5-2 468-6-1 469-4 PGND
FNS FS-215 (OPTION) FS-115 (OPTION)
M23
DEVELOPING MOTOR/K
469-1 469-3
24V2
67 65 66 68
33 34 35 36
SGND 469-2 469-5 469-6 5V2
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol PS60 PS61 PS62 PS63 PS64 PS65 PS66 PS67 PS69 PS68 FS-115 FS-215 LT-211 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 PS15 CV CV DRDB /Y DRDB /M DRDB /K DRDB /C
Part name Encoder sensor /Y1 Encoder sensor /Y2 Encoder sensor /M1 Encoder sensor /M2 Encoder sensor /C1 Encoder sensor /C2 Encoder sensor /K1 Encoder sensor /K2 Encoder sensor /BELT1 Encoder sensor /BELT2 FS-115 (option) FS-215 (option) LT-211 (option) Drum motor /Y Drum motor /M Drum motor /C Drum motor /K Transfer belt motor 1st transfer pressure/release motor Developing motor /Y Developing motor /M Developing motor /C Developing motor /K IP cooling fan IPB cooling fan 1st transfer HP sensor Coin vendor (parallel) Coin vendor (serial) Drum drive board /Y Drum drive board /M Drum drive board /C Drum drive board /K 1-I 2-I 2-I 2-I 3-I 3-I 4-I 4-I 4-G 5-G 8-A 8-A 6-A 1-I 2-I 3-I 4-I 5-G 6-G 7-G 7-G 8-G 9-G 7-A 8-A 6-G 4-A 5-A 1-G 2-G 3-G 4-G
Location
Appendix-8
5.5
I
130-1 - 1
96
POWER PLUG
179
130-2 - 2
FT16 AC_H
180
130-3 - 3 146-1
FT17 AC_N
181
Y/G 130-4 - 4
ACDB
1
FT1 FT2
146-2
FT18 AC_N
182
146-2
CBR2
CBR1
146-1 FT18
FT17
97
183
98
184
99
185
FT4
BT-4 BT-2 BT-3 BT-1
FT3
PRCB
101
186
158-4 158-3 158-2 158-1 157-4 5V2 157-3 L2_CONT 157-2 L3_CONT 157-1 SGND
FT5
FT6
130-A1 - A4 130-A2 - A3 130-A3 - A2 130-A4 - A1 130-B1 - B4 130-B2 - B3 130-B3 - B2 130-B4 - B1
100
FHCB
187
131-2 - 2 131-3 - 3
FT19 AC_N
NF
EUROPE ONLY
2
188 189
131-4 - 4 131-1 - 1
FT7
FT8
FT15
190
107
153-1 24V1 153-2 NC
F/G
AC(H)
191
102 69
153-3 24VAC(H) 153-4 24VAC(N) 120-1 120-2 120-3 120-4 120-5
192
103 70
193
104
PRCB
194
105
AC(N)
3
152-11 PGND
195
106
152-10 PGND 152-9 -24VIN
FT9
196
152-8 152-7 152-6 152-5
197 198 199 200 201 202 203

96
152-4 152-3 152-2 152-1
RESET SWITCH
SW1
RL1 24V1
109
121A-1
FT10
RL2 24V1
204
97
121A-2
205
98
4
206
99
121A-3 121A-4
207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214

486-1 486-2 486-3 486-4 485-1 485-2 485-3 485-4 484-1 484-2 484-3 484-4 401-1B-16B 402-1-13 403-1
RL3 24V1
FIXING UNIT
100 101 102 103 104 105 106
140-1 142-1 140-2 142-2 140-3 142-3

121B-2
CH12
121B-3 121B-4
140-4 142-4
215
TRANSFORMER/LCT
TRANSFORMER/MAIN BODY
5
216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245
TRNS2
TRNS1
M26 M27 M28
PAPER EXIT FAN/R
156-5
156-4
156-2
156-1
155-5 H1(N)
155-4 H1(H)
155-2 H1(N)
155-1 H1(H)
PAPER EXIT FAN/M
482-1-12 482-2-11 482-3-10 482-4-9 482-5-8 482-6-7 482-7-6 482-8-5 482-9-4 482-10-3 482-11-2 482-12-1
PAPER EXIT FAN/F
143-1 143-2 141-1 141-2 145-1 145-2 144-1 144-2

AC(N)
101-2 NC
101-1 AC(H)
6 7
PS29
403-2 401-2B-15B 401-3B-14B 401-4B-13B 401-5B-12B 401-6B-11B 401-7B-10B 401-8B-9B 401-9B-8B 401-10B-7B 401-11B-6B 401-12B-5B 401-13B-4B 401-14B-3B 401-15B-2B 401-16B-1B 402-2-12 402-3-11 402-4-10 402-5-9 402-6-8 402-7-7 402-8-6 402-9-5 402-10-4 402-11-3 402-12-2 402-13-1 566-1-2 566-2-1 403-3 404-1 404-2 404-3 405-1 405-2 405-3 406-1 406-2 407-1 407-2 408-1 408-2
PREREGISTRATION SENSOR/1
PS30 PS31 MC7 MC8 SD7

410-1 401-1A-14A 401-2A-13A 401-3A-12A 401-4A-11A
TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/1
102-1 5V1
2 3 4
OACB
102-2 SGND 102-3 REM/1
NO PAPER SENSOR/1
102-4 AC_OFF
HTR2
HTR1
103-1 12V
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/1
103-4 SGND
7
IPB
103-2 5V2
PREREGISTRATION CLUTCH/1 PICK UP SOLENOID/1
103-5 SGND
9 10 53 54 55 56
103-3 3.5V 103-6 SGND 104-1 5V2 104-3 12V 104-6 SGND 104-7 SGND
PRCB
PS32
410-2 410-3 411-1
57
TRAY /1
REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/1
104-4 24V1
58
Appendix-9
104-9 PGND
63
104-2 5V2
246 247 248 249
PS33
401-5A-10A 401-6A-9A 401-7A-8A
411-2 411-3 412-1
64
PAPER SIZE/S1
104-8 SGND
123-2 123-3
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
8 9
PS34
412-2 401-8A-7A
401-9A-6A
412-3
PAPER SIZE/L1 DRDB
123-4
123-1
104-5 24V1
DCPS1 1/2
250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265
123-5 401-10A-5A 401-11A-4A 401-12A-3A 401-13A-2A 401-14A-1A 409-1-5 409-2-4 409-3-3 409-4-2 409-5-1 413-3 413-2 413-1 123-6 123-7
PAPER SIZE VR/1
VR1
123-8 123-9
123-10
104-10 PGND
67
DCPS4
415-1B-16B 415-2B-15B 415-3B-14B 415-4B-13B 415-5B-12B 415-6B-11B 415-7B-10B 415-8B-9B 415-9B-8B 416-1-13 416-2-12 416-3-11 416-4-10 416-5-9 416-6-8 416-7-7 416-8-6 416-9-5 417-1
105-3 SGND
FNS
68 107
105-1 5V2 105-5 24V1
PS35
417-2 417-3 418-1 418-2 418-3 419-1 419-2 419-3
105-6 N.C
84
ACDB CVDB
105-2 5V2
85
132 133
105-4 SGND
TRAY /2 1/2
PS36 PS37
130 131
108-1 5V2 108-2 SGND 108-3 24V1
NO PAPER SENSOR/2
268-1 12V 268-2 GND 268-4 5VIN 268-3 5VOUT 268-6 24V 268-5 GND
108-4 SGND
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol CBR1 CBR2 DCPS1 DCPS4 RL1 RL2 RL3 HTR1 HTR2 M26 M27 M28 MC7 MC8 PS29 PS30 PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 PS35 PS36 PS37 SD7 SW1 TRNS1 TRNS2 VR1 NF ACDB FHCB
Part name Circuit breaker /1 Circuit breaker /2 DC power suply unit /1 DC power suply unit /4 (HD-106) Main relay DCPS2 relay HTR relay Heater /1 Heater /2 Paper exit fan /R Paper exit fan /M Paper exit fan /F Paper feed clutch /1 Pre-registration clutch /1 Pre-registration sensor /1 Tray upper limit sensor /1 No paper sensor /1 Remaining paper sensor /1 Paper size /S1 Paper size /L1 Pre-registration sensor /2 Tray upper limit sensor /2 No paper sensor /2 Pick up solenoid /1 Reset switch Transformer/main body Transformer/LCT Paper size VR /1 Noise filter Power plug AC drive board Fixing heater control board 1-A 1-B 6-A 9-D 4-D 4-D 4-D 6-E 6-E 5-F 5-F 6-F 7-F 7-F 6-F 6-F 6-F 8-F 8-F 8-F 9-F 9-F 9-F 7-F 3-A 5-C 5-C 8-F 2-A 1-B 1-D 2-F
Location
Appendix-10
5.6
I
415-10B-7B 416-10-4 416-11-3 416-12-2 416-13-1 421-2
PREREGISTRATION CLUTCH/2
420-1 420-2 421-1

PAPER FEED CLUTCH/2
266
415-11B-6B 415-12B-5B 415-13B-4B
267 268 269

11
SCDB
MC9 MC10 SD8
1
415-14B-3B 567-1-2 422-1
106-2 5V2 106-5 SGND 106-6 SGND 106-3 5V2 106-8 SGND 106-7 12V 106-1 5V2 106-4 SGND 107-3 5V2 107-6 SGND 107-1 5V2 107-4 SGND 107-5 SGND 107-2 5V2 107-7 12V
270
12
415-15B-2B 567-2-1 422-2
PICK UP SOLENOID/2
TRAY /2 2/2
271
73
415-16B-1B
DCPS1 2/2
272
74
LCT
116
117 114
415-1A-14A
ADF
424-1 424-2
273
415-2A-13A
PS38
274
115
415-3A-12A 415-4A-11A 425-1 424-3
275
86
TSDB
276
PS39
415-5A-10A 425-2
87
277
415-6A-9A 425-3
PAPER SIZE/S2
75
278
415-7A-8A 426-1
76
279
OB1
2
PS40
415-8A-7A 426-2
77
280
415-9A-6A 426-3
PAPER SIZE/L2
78
281
415-10A-5A 423-1-5 427-3
79
282
VR2
415-11A-4A
PAPER SIZE VR/2
423-2-4 423-3-3 423-4-2 423-5-1 427-1
427-2
283
415-12A-3A 415-13A-2A 415-14A-1A
284 285 286

429-1B-16B 430-1-13 430-2-12 430-3-11 430-4-10 430-5-9 430-6-8 430-7-7 430-8-6 430-9-5 430-10-4 430-11-3 430-12-2 430-13-1 568-1-2 436-1 436-2 568-2-1 435-2
431-1 431-2 431-3 432-1 432-2 432-3 433-1 433-2 433-3 434-1 434-2 435-1
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/3 NO PAPER SENSOR/3 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/3
287
429-2B-15B 429-3B-14B 429-4B-13B 429-5B-12B 429-6B-11B 429-7B-10B 429-8B-9B 429-9B-8B 429-10B-7B 429-11B-6B 429-12B-5B 429-13B-4B 429-14B-3B 429-15B-2B 429-16B-1B
PS41
288 289 290

PS42
3
291 292 293
PS43 MC11 MC12 SD9
109
294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302

429-1A-14A 438-1 429-2A-13A 429-3A-12A 429-4A-11A 429-5A-10A 429-6A-9A 429-7A-8A 429-8A-7A 429-9A-6A 429-10A-5A 429-11A-4A 429-12A-3A 429-13A-2A 429-14A-1A 437-1-5 437-2-4 437-3-3 437-4-2 437-5-1 438-2 438-3 439-1 439-2 439-3 440-1 440-2 440-3 441-3 441-2 441-1
110-3 NC
110-2 NC
110-4 AC(N)
110-1 AC(H)
TRAY /3
4
303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334
452-1-8
13
SCDB ADF
111-1 24V2
14 15 16
111-4 PGND 111-2 24V2
PS44 PS45 PS46
111-5 PGND
65
FNS
111-6 PGND
66
111-3 24V2
PAPER SIZE/S2
71
LCT
111-10 PGND
72 88
111-7 24V2 111-8 24V2
PAPER SIZE/L2
89
TSDB
111-9 24V2
90 91
111-11 PGND
5 6 7
335 336 337 338 339 340
111-12 PGND
VR3
444-1 443-1-12 443-2-11 443-3-10 443-4-9 443-5-8 443-6-7 443-7-6 443-8-5 443-9-4 443-10-3 443-11-2 443-12-1 449-1 449-2 444-2 444-3 445-1 445-2 445-3 446-1 446-2 446-3 447-1 447-2 447-3
PAPER SIZE VR/3
127-2
17 19
M3 M4
127-3 127-4 127-6
127-1
112-1 24V2
21 23
127-7 127-8 128-2

NO PAPER SENSOR/BP M5
127-5
112-2 24V2
M38
450-1 450-2 451-1 451-2 453-1 452-2-7 452-3-6 452-4-5 452-5-4 452-6-3 452-7-2 453-2 454-1 454-2 454-3 455-1 455-2
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/3
M20,M21,M22,M23
33 34 37 38 41 42 45 46 35 36 39 40 43 44 47 48
M39 M40 MC13 PS50
INTERMEDIATE CONVEYANCE CLUTCH/1
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SENSOR
BY-PASS TRAY
PS47 VR4 PS48 PS49
18 20
128-3 128-4
PAPER SIZE VR/BP
128-1
112-3 PGND
128-6
22 24
M6
128-7 128-8
PAPER SIZE/SBP
128-5
112-5 PGND
112-4 N.C 112-6 N.C
PAPER SIZE/LBP
126-2 126-3 126-4 126-5 126-6 126-7 126-8 126-9 125-2 125-3 125-4 125-5 125-6 125-7 125-8 125-9
114-1 NC
126-1
113-2 PGND
DCPS2
126-10
113-4 PGND
125-1
113-1 24V2
125-10
113-3 24V2
59
Appendix-11
PRCB
114-2 24V2
PS51
341 342 343
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE DOOR SENSOR
60
452-8-1
455-3
114-6 PGND
92
HV1
114-3 24V2
93 110
114-7 PGND
8
346 349 353
344 345 347 348

110 111 112 113
114-8 PGND
111
M41
114-9 PGND
112 113
114-4 24V2
PAPER FEED MOTOR
M41
114-5 24V2
80 81
115-1 24V2 115-2 24V2
456-1-7 456-2-6 456-3-5 456-4-4 456-5-3 456-6-2 456-7-1 457-1-4 457-2-3 457-3-2 457-4-1 479-1-3
458-1 458-2 458-3 458-4 458-5 458-6 458-7 458-8 458-9 458-10 458-11 460-1
82 83
CVDB
115-3 PGND
350 351 352 354
115-4 PGND
PS52
479-2-2 479-3-1
460-2 460-3 461-1 461-2
WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR
115-6 PGND 115-7 PGND 115-8 PGND
M18
PS53
52 51 95 49 50 94
9
356 357 358 359
WASTE TONER DOOR SENSOR
124-4
121
461-3
124-3
124-1
355
462-1-4 462-2-3 462-3-2 462-4-1
115-5 N.C
124-2 124-6
M42
DCPS COOLING FAN
124-7 124-8
124-5
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol DCPS2 M38 M39 M40 M41 M42 MC9 MC10 MC11 MC12 MC13 PS38 PS39 PS40 PS41 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS45 PS46 PS47 PS48 PS49 PS50 PS51 PS52 PS53 SD8 SD9 VR2 VR3 VR4
Part name DC power suply unit /2 Tray up drive motor /3 Tray up drive motor /2 Tray up drive motor /1 Paper feed motor DCPS cooling fan Paper feed clutch /2 Pre-registration clutch /2 Paper feed clutch /3 Pre-registration clutch /3 Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 Remaining paper sensor /2 Paper size /S2 Paper size /L2 Pre-registration sensor /3 Tray upper limit sensor /3 No paper sensor /3 Remaining paper sensor /3 Paper size /S2 Paper size /L2 No paper sensor /BP Paper size /SBP Paper size /LBP Vertical conveyance sensor Vertical conveyance door sensor Waste toner full sensor Waste toner door sensor Pick up solenoid /2 Pick up solenoid /3 Paper size VR /2 Paper size VR /3 Paper size VR /BP 4-A 7-F 7-F 7-F 8-F 9-F 1-F 1-F 3-F 4-F 7-F 2-F 2-F 2-F 3-F 3-F 3-F 4-F 5-F 5-F 6-F 6-F 6-F 7-F 8-F 9-F 9-F 1-F 4-F 2-F 5-F 6-F
Location
Appendix-12
5.7
I
F/G
528-2-1
179
518-15 24V2 518-14 DRIVE 510-11 5V2
MC1
528-1-2
180
ADU CONVEYANCE CLUTCH/2

510-10 SGND
FT23
FIXING UPPER HEATER LAMP/1
519-2-1
518-13 24V2 510-8 CLOCK
510-9 START/STOP
181
MC2
519-1-2
518-12 DRIVE 510-6 LOCK 510-7 CW/CCW
FT25
FT27
M29
TS1 FIXING UPPER HEATER LAMP/2
L2
FIXING MOTOR
FIXING UNIT
REVERSE/ EXIT ADU REGISTRATION SOLENOID REVERSE/ ADU REVERSE SENSOR EXIT ADU ADU CONVEYANCE SENSOR SENSOR PREADU PRECLUTCH/1 STRATION CONVEYANCE REGISTRATION CLUTCH SENSOR SENSOR
1
FT20
526-1
FT22 FT21
518-11 24V2 510-4 PGND
510-5 H/L
182
SD4
FT26 FT24
526-2
518-10 DRIVE 510-3 PGND 510-2 24V2 518-9 5V2 510-1 24V2 518-8 PS 518-7 SGND 513-6 5V2
L3
FT28
183
520-1 552-3-1 552-2-2 552-1-3 515-1 514-1-6 520-2 520-3
511-1-11 511-2-10 511-3-9 511-4-8 511-5-7 511-6-6 511-7-5 511-8-4 511-9-3 511-10-2 511-11-1 512-1 512-2 512-3 512-4 512-5 512-6 512-7 512-8 512-9 512-10 512-11
184
FIXING TEMPERATURE SENSOR/1
FIXING PRESSURE/ FIXING RELEASE SENSOR EXIT SENSOR
PS19
TH1
132-3-1 132-2-2 132-1-3
185
PS16
522-1 521-6-1
518-6 5V2 518-5 PS 518-4 SGND 513-3 5V2 513-4 SGND 513-5 PS
514-2-5 515-2 515-3 516-1-3 517-1 516-2-2 517-2 517-3 516-3-1 514-3-4 514-4-3 514-5-2 514-6-1
PS20
522-2 521-5-2 521-4-3 521-3-4
518-3 5V2 518-2 PS 518-1 SGND 527-17 24V2 569-1 A 513-1 SGND 513-2 PS
186
522-3
133-2-1
TH3
PS17
523-1 523-2 521-2-5 521-1-6 529-2-1 529-1-2 570-4-1 571-4-1

TS2
FIXING EMPERATURE SENSOR/3
133-1-2
187
PS21
523-3
2
MC3
FT29
527-16 DRIVE 569-2 A 569-3 B 569-4 B
2
188
FIXING LOWER HEATER LAMP
189
FT30
570-3-2 570-2-3 570-1-4 571-1-4 571-2-3
571-3-2
L4
F/G
WEB MOTOR
M54
533-1 530-3-1
527-15 SGND 527-14 PS 527-13 5V2 527-12 5V2
137-1 3191-01P1
190
PS22
533-2 530-2-2 530-1-3 551-3-1 509-1-3 509-2-2 509-3-1 508-4 506-2B 506-1B 508-3 508-2 508-1
507-1 24V2 507-2 24V2 507-3 PGND 507-4 PGND 507-5 5V2 507-6 SGND
533-3 531-1 532-1 532-2 532-3
191 192
118
FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
PS23
531-2 551-2-2
527-11 PS
TH2
PS18
531-3 551-1-3
527-10 SGND
134-3-1 134-2-2 134-1-3
193
119 120
CVDB
118
527-9 5V2 527-8 PS 527-7 SGND
119 120
135-2-1
194
MS1
FRONT DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH
3
549-1 554-3-1
527-6 5V2 527-5 PS 527-4 SGND 527-3 5V2 527-2 PS 527-1 SGND 536-1 24V2 536-2 24V2 536-3 A 536-4 A 536-5 B 536-6 B 534-1 24V2 534-2 24V2 534-3 A 534-4 A 534-5 B 534-6 B 534-7 24V2 534-8 24V2 534-9 A 534-10 A 534-11 B 534-12 B 503-17A DDRV_Txd 503-16A DDRV_Rxd 503-15A SGND 503-14A ADUP_SIG 503-13A ADUH_SIG 503-12A BMAX_SIG 503-11A REG_SIG 503-10A ADUR_SIG 503-9A FEXT_SIG 503-8A FD_OPEN 503-7A HAN1_SIG 503-6A HAN2_SIG 503-5A REV_SIG 503-4A BPNF_SIG 524-1 24V2 524-2 24V2 524-3 A 524-4 A 524-5 B 524-6 B 524-7 N.C 548-6 24V2 548-5 24V2 548-4 A 548-3 A 548-2 B 548-1 B 503-3A FRL_SIG 503-2A 12V 503-1A REG_CONT 503-17B BPSDCONT 503-16B EXSDCONT 503-15B AMC1CONT 503-14B AMC2CONT
REGISTRATION ROLLER 2nd CONVEYANCE MOTOR TRANSFER LEVER HP SENSOR SENSOR
PS24
549-2 554-2-2 554-1-3 549-3 565-1 565-2 565-3
506-2A 506-1A
TH4
135-1-2
151-1 5V2
195 196
80 81
197
151-2 S_GND 151-3 H1_DRIVE
198
PS55 M30
537-2 537-5 537-1 537-3 537-4 537-6
82 83 84 85 121
500-1A 500-2A 500-3A 500-4A 500-5A 500-6A 500-7A 500-8A 500-9A 500-10A 500-11A 500-12A 500-13A 500-14A 500-15A 500-16A 500-17A 500-1B 500-2B 500-3B 500-4B
199
151-4 MRL_DRIVE 151-5 L2_DRIVE 151-6 L3_DRIVE 151-7 L4_DRIVE
200 201 202 203 204 205

150-1A FIXTEMP1 150-2A FIXTEMP1 150-3A FIXTEMP1 150-4A FIXTEMP2 150-5A FIXTEMP2 150-12B FIXTEMP3 150-11B FIXTEMP3 150-10B FIXTEMP3 150-9B FIXTEMP4 150-8B FIXTEMP4 150-7B N.C 151-8 PWRL_DRIVE (REM/2) 150-6A FUSERSET
CONVEYANCE UNIT
M31
LOOP ROLLER MOTOR
4
M32
ADU REVERSE MOTOR
4
206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214
538-2 538-5 538-1 538-3 538-4 538-6 535-3 535-9 535-1 535-5 535-7 535-11 535-2 535-4 535-6 535-8 535-10
215
150-7A PGND 150-8A H/L 150-9A EM 150-10A DRIVE 150-11A PGND 150-12A H/L 150-1B EM 150-2B DRIVE 150-3B PGND 503-13B APCLCONT 503-12B MCL2CONT 503-11B MCL3CONT 503-10B BPCLCONT
5
M33 M34
REVERSE/ EXIT MOTOR 2nd TRANSFER PRESSURE/RELEASE MOTOR
5
216 217 218 219 220
525-2 525-5 525-1 525-3 525-4 525-6
221 222 223
500-5B 500-6B 500-7B 500-8B
224
150-4B H/L 150-5B EM 150-6B DRIVE
225
550-1 550-2 550-3 550-4 550-5 550-6 553-1
226
227
M35
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/BP
6 7
539-B11 2
503-9B START/STOP
500-9B
400-16A 5V2
553-2 546-1 555-6-1
228
539-B10 1
503-8B CLOCK 503-7B CW/CCW 539-B9 5V2 503-6B LOCK
500-10B 500-11B 500-12B
400-15A PS 400-14A SGND 400-13A 5V2
229 230
PRCB(2/2) 1/2
PS25
546-2 546-3 547-1 547-2 547-3 542-1 542-2 542-3
555-5-2 555-4-3 555-3-4 555-2-5 555-1-6 556-3-1 556-2-2 556-1-3 540-2-1
231
539-B8 PS 539-B7 SGND 539-B6 5V2
503-5B H/L 503-4B TR4_CONT 503-3B TR4_CW
500-13B 500-14B 500-15B
400-12A PS 400-11A SGND 400-10A 5V2
232
505-1 505-2 505-3 505-4 505-5 505-6 505-7 505-8 502-1A-17A 502-2A-16A 502-3A-15A 502-4A-14A 502-5A-13A 502-6A-12A 502-7A-11A 502-8A-10A 502-9A-9A 502-10A-8A 502-11A-7A 502-12A-6A 502-13A-5A 502-14A-4A 502-15A-3A 502-16A-2A 502-17A-1A 502-1B-17B 502-2B-16B 502-3B-15B 502-4B-14B 502-5B-13B 502-6B-12B 502-7B-11B 502-8B-10B 502-9B-9B 502-10B-8B 502-11B-7B 502-12B-6B 502-13B-5B 502-14B-4B 502-15B-3B
233
234
PS26
539-B5 PS 539-B4 SGND 539-B3 SGND
503-2B N.C 503-1B N.C
563-2-1 563-1-2
502-16B-2B 502-17B-1B
501-16B-2B 501-17B-1B
500-16B LOCK SD 500-17B 24V
400-9A PS
235
SD6
400-8A SGND 400-7A 24V2
236 237
400-6A DRIVE 539-B2 PS 539-B1 5V2 539-A11 24V2
92
735-1 24V2 735-2 NC 735-3 PGND
ADU LOCK SOLENOID
PS27
238
400-5A 24V2
93
731-1 730-16A CHGYCONT
239
GRID/Y
400-4A DRIVE
MC4 MC5
543-1
540-1-2 541-2-1 541-1-2 557-3-1
240
400-3A 24V2 539-A10 DRIVE 731-2 731-3 539-A9 24V2 539-A8 DRIVE 731-4 731-5 731-6 731-7 539-A7 SGND 731-8 730-15A CHGYDCV 730-14A GYDCV 730-13A CHGY_ER 730-12A DEVEDCY 730-11A DEVEACY 400-2A DRIVE 400-1A N.C 400-16B N.C
241
CHARGER/Y
242
400-15B N.C 730-10A DEVEYDCV 730-9A SGND
GRID/M
243
400-14B 5V2
CHARGER/M
PS28
543-2 543-3
557-2-2 557-1-3 544-2-1
244
400-13B PS 539-A6 PS 539-A5 5V2 732-1 732-2 732-3 539-A4 24V2 732-4 732-5 730-8A CHGMCONT 730-7A CHGMDCV 730-6A GMDCV 730-5A CHGM_ER 730-4A DEVEDCM 400-12B SGND 400-11B 5V2
245 246
PAPER PICK UP INTERMEDIATE SOLENOID/ FEED CONVEYANC CLUTCH/ BP CLUTCH/2 BP INTERMEDIATE CONVEYANC CLUTCH/3 TRAY BY-PASS INTERMEDIATE UPPER CONVEYANCE CONVEYANCE SENSOR LIMIT INTERMEDIATE SENSOR/2 SENSOR/BP CONVEYANCE SENSOR/1
Appendix-13
247
GRID/C
SD5
544-1-2
400-10B PS 539-A3 DRIVE 732-6 732-7 730-3A DEVEACM 730-2A DEVEMDCV 400-9B SGND
248 249
400-8B 5V2
HV1
CHARGER/C
8 9
545-2-1
539-A2 24V2
732-8
730-1A DEVECCLOCK
250
400-7B PS
MC6
545-1-2
539-A1 DRIVE
733-1 733-2
730-16B CHGCCONT 730-15B CHGCDCV
251
400-6B SGND
252
400-5B 3.3V 733-3 733-4 733-5 733-6 733-7 733-8 730-14B GCDCV 730-13B CHGC_ER 730-12B DEVEDCC 730-11B DEVEACC 730-10B DEVECDCV 730-9B SGND 400-4B VR 400-3B SGND 400-2B T1DET(H) 400-1B SGND
GRID/K
253 254 255
DEVELOPING BIAS/Y DEVELOPING BIAS/M DEVELOPING BIAS/C DEVELOPING BIAS/K
CHARGER/K
256
734-1 734-2 734-3 734-4 734-5 734-6 734-7 734-8
730-8B CHGKCONT
257
730-7B CHGKDCV 730-6B GKDCV 730-5B CHGK_ER 730-4B DEVEDCK 730-3B DEVEACK 730-2B DEVEKDCV 730-1B DEVEKCLOCK
414-16A 5V2 414-15A PS 414-14A SGND 414-13A 5V2 414-12A PS 414-11A SGND
258 259 260 262
9
261
F/G
263
414-10A 5V2 414-9A PS 414-8A SGND
264 265
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol TS1 TS2 HV1 L2 L3 L4 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M54 MC1 MC2 MC3 MC4 MC5 MC6 PS16 PS17 PS18 PS19 PS20 PS21 PS22 PS23 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS28 PS55 SD4 SD5 SD6 MS1 TH1 TH2 TH3 TH4 Thermostat /1 Thermostat /2
Part name 1-C 2-C 7-C 1-B 1-B 2-B 1-D 4-H 4-H 4-H 5-H 6-H 6-H 2-D 1-H 1-H 2-I 7-H 7-H 8-H 2-D 2-D 3-D 1-I 2-I 2-I 2-I 3-I 3-I 6-I 7-I 7-I 8-I 3-I 1-H 8-H 7-F 3-D 1-C 3-C 2-C 3-C
Location
Symbol
Part name Developing bias /Y Developing bias /M Developing bias /C Developing bias /K Charger /Y Charger /M Charger /C Charger /K Grid /Y Grid /M Grid /C Grid /K 9-E 9-E 9-E 9-E 7-E 8-E 8-E 8-E 7-E 7-E 8-E 8-E 3-A 1-F
Location
High voltage unit /1 Fixing upper heater lamp /1 Fixing upper heater lamp /2 Fixing lower heater lamp Fixing motor Registration roller motor Loop roller motor ADU reverse motor Reverse/exit motor 2nd transfer pressure/release motor Tray up drive motor /BP Web motor ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU Pre-registration clutch Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 Paper feed clutch /BP Fixing pressure/release sensor Fixing exit sensor Front door open/close sensor Reverse/Exit sensor ADU conveyance sensor ADU reverse sensor Registration sensor ADU Pre-registration sensor 2nd Transfer HP sensor Tray upper limit sensor /BP By-pass conveyance sensor Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 Conveyance lever sensor Reverse/Exit solenoid Pick up solenoid /BP ADU lock solenoid Front door interlock switch Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /2 Fixing temperature sensor /3 Fixing temperature sensor /4
PRCB CVDB
Printer control board Conveyance drive board
Appendix-14
5.8
I
266
414-7A 24V2
267 268
414-6A DRIVE 414-5A 24V2 736-1A TRANSY
737-12
269
1
737-11 736-2A TRANSYI 737-10 736-3A TRANSYER 736-4A TRANSM 736-5A TRANSMI 736-6A TRANSMER 736-7A TRANSC 736-8A TRANSCI 736-9A TRANSCER 736-10A TRANSK 736-11A TRANSKI 736-12A TRANSKER 736-1B N.C 736-2B N.C 738-10 738-9 738-8 736-3B SGND 736-4B GPCONT 736-5B 2ND_CONT 736-6B 2ND_VI 736-7B 2ND_GAIN 736-8B 2ND_ER 736-9B SEPA_CNT 738-3 738-2 738-1 736-10B SEPA_ACI 414-2A DRIVE 414-1A N.C 414-16B N.C 414-15B N.C 414-3A 24V2 414-4A DRIVE
1
270 271
1st TRANSFER/Y
737-8
737-9
272
1st TRANSFER/M
737-6 737-5
737-7
273
414-14B 5V2 414-13B PS 414-12B SGND 414-11B 5V2 414-10B PS 414-9B SGND 414-8B 5V2 414-7B PS 414-6B SGND 414-5B 3.3V 414-4B VR 414-3B SGND 414-2B T2DET(H) 414-1B SGND
274
1st TRANSFER/C
737-4 737-3 737-2 737-1
275 276 277 278
1st TRANSFER/K
279
HV2
2
2nd TRANSFER SEPARATION
738-6 738-5 738-4 738-7
2
280 282 283 284 285 286 281
Symbol
GUIDE PLATE
739-1 24V2 739-2 NC
287
736-11B SEPA_DCI 736-12B SEPA_ER
428-16A 5V2 428-15A PS 428-14A SGND 428-13A 5V2
288 289 290
94
3
F/G
3
291
428-12A PS 739-3 PGND 428-11A SGND
292
95
293
428-10A 5V2
294
428-9A PS
494-4
493-4
391-8B 24V
295
C(K)
494-3 494-1 494-2
493-3 493-1 493-2
428-8A SGND 391-7B KEY_CONT 391-6B PGND 391-5B KEY_SET 391-4B DRIVE 391-3B EM 428-7A 24V2 428-6A DRIVE 428-5A 24V2 428-4A DRIVE
296
KEY COUNTER
297 298 299
300
M36
392-1 392-2 392-3 392-4 495-6 495-4 495-3 495-2 495-1 495-5
FIXING COOLING FAN/3
307-1 307-2 307-3 307-4
391-2B H/L 391-1B PGND 391-9A DRIVE 391-8A FFAN_ER 391-7A H/L 391-6A PGND 391-9B PGND 391-5A PAT4_DRIVE 391-4A PAT3_DRIVE 391-3A PAT2_DRIVE 391-2A PAT1_DRIVE
428-3A 24V2 428-2A DRIVE 428-1A N.C 428-16B N.C 428-15B N.C
301 302
4
710-1-2 710-2-1
TONER SUPPLY INTERLOCK SWITCH
M37
303
428-14B 5V2 428-13B PS 428-12B SGND 428-11B 5V2 428-10B PS 428-9B SGND
304 305 306
INDICATOR LAMP
MS2
713-1 713-2 716-1 716-2 719-1 719-2 722-1 722-2
307 308
741-8-1 741-7-2 741-6-3 741-5-4 741-4-5 741-3-6 741-2-7 741-1-8
309
428-8B 5V2 711-8 24V2 711-7 CONT 711-6 24V2 711-5 CONT 711-4 24V2 724-17 EM 711-3 CONT 711-2 24V2 711-1 CONT 724-16 DRIVE (24V1) 724-15 5V 724-14 TLD_SIG 724-13 SGND 724-12 5V 724-11 TLD_SIG 724-10 SGND 724-9 5V 724-8 TLD_SIG 724-7 SGND 724-6 5V 724-5 TLD_SIG 724-4 SGND 724-3 5V2 724-2 PS 724-1 SGND 706-1 A 706-2 A 706-3 B 706-4 B 706-5 24V2 704-1 5V2 704-2 SGND 704-3 24V2 391-1A 24V 428-7B PS 428-6B SGND 428-5B 3.3V 428-4B VR 724-18 PGND
310 311 312
PRCB(2/2) 2/2
MC14 MC15 MC16 MC17
TONER TONER TONER TONER BOTTLE BOTTLE BOTTLE BOTTLE CLUTCH/Y CLUTCH/M CLUTCH/C CLUTCH/K
5 6
M49
TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/Y
5
313
472-1-3
314
428-3B SGND
394-1-4 472-2-2 472-3-1 712-1 712-2 712-3 715-1 715-2 715-3 718-1 718-2 718-3 721-1 721-2 721-3 725-1 725-2 725-3 394-2-3
315
428-2B T3DET(H) 393-1A DRIVE 393-2A EM 428-1B SGND
CHAGER INTAKE FAN
M48
316
M43 M44 M45
393-3A H/L 393-4A PGND 442-17A N.C
394-3-2 394-4-1 395-1-4 395-2-3 395-3-2 395-4-1 396-1-4 396-2-3 396-3-2 396-4-1 397-1-4 397-2-3
317
393-5A DRIVE 393-6A ER 393-7A H/L 393-8A PGND 393-9A DRIVE 393-10A EM 393-11A H/L 393-12A PGND 393-1B DRIVE 393-2B ER
442-16A 5V2 442-15A PS 442-14A SGND 442-13A 3.3V3 442-12A VR 442-11A SGND 442-10A 5V2 442-9A PS 442-8A SGND 442-7A 5V2
318 319 320 321 322
6
323 324
WRITING WRITING WRITING WRITING DRUM UNIT INTAKE FAN/1 INTAKE FAN/2 EXHAUST FAN/1 EXHAUST FAN/2 FAN
703-1 703-2 703-3
TONER DCPS1 TONER TONER TONER TONER SUPPLY LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL DETECTION DOOR DETECTION DETECTION SENSOR/M DETECTION SENSOR/K OPEN/CLOSE 87 86 SENSOR/Y SENSOR/C SENSOR
TEMP /HUM
DCPS2 88 91 90 89
TEMP/HUMIDITY SENSOR
706-6 24V2 705-1 A 705-2 A 705-3 B 705-4 B 705-5 24V2 705-6 24V2 705-7 N.C 726-1 A 726-2 A 726-3 B 726-4 B 726-5 24V2 726-6 24V2 726-7 A
704-4 24V2 704-5 PGND 704-6 PGND
703-4 703-5 703-6
M50
702-1A 702-2A 702-3A 702-4A 702-5A 702-6A 702-7A 702-8A 702-9A
701-13A-1A 701-12A-2A 701-11A-3A 701-10A-4A 701-9A-5A 701-8A-6A 701-7A-7A 701-6A-8A 701-5A-9A
TLD_Y TLD_M TLD_C TLD_K PS54
TSDB
325 326 327

442-6A PS 393-3B H/L
M46 M47
397-3-2 397-4-1 398-1-3 398-2-2 398-3-1
328
442-5A SGND 393-4B PGND 393-5B DRIVE 393-6B EM 393-7B PGND 393-8B TEMP 393-9B SGND 393-10B HUM 393-11B 5V2 393-12B N.C 700-13A DRV_ERR 700-12A H/L 700-11A TBY_CLOCK 700-10A TBY_EN 700-9A YBCL_DRIVE 700-8A TBY_SIG 700-7A TBM_CLOCK 700-6A TBM_EN 700-5A MBCL_DRIVE 442-17B 24V2 442-16B DRIVE 442-15B 24V2 442-14B DRIVE 442-13B 5V2 442-12B PS 442-11B SGND 442-10B 5V2 442-9B PS 442-8B SGND
329
442-4A 24V2 442-3A DRIVE
330 331
442-2A 24V2 442-1A DRIVE
332 333
399-4 399-3 399-2 399-1
334 335 336
707-1-6 707-2-5 707-3-4 707-4-3 707-5-2 707-6-1

TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/M
337 338 339 340
Appendix-15
341
M51
342
727-1-6 727-2-5 727-3-4 727-4-3 727-5-2 727-6-1

TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/C
343
TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/K
8 9
726-8 A 726-9 B 726-10 B 726-11 24V2 726-12 24V2
702-10A 702-11A 702-12A 702-13A 702-1B 702-2B 708-11 5V2 708-10 SGND 708-9 CONT 708-8 CLOCK 708-7 CW/CCW 708-6 LOCK 708-5 H/L 708-4 PGND 708-3 PGND 708-2 24V2 708-1 24V2 702-3B 702-4B 702-5B 702-6B 702-7B 702-8B 702-9B 702-10B 702-11B 702-12B 702-13B
701-4A-10A 701-3A-11A 701-2A-12A 701-1A-13A 701-13B-1B 701-12B-2B 701-11B-3B 701-10B-4B 701-9B-5B 701-8B-6B 701-7B-7B 701-6B-8B 701-5B-9B 701-4B-10B 701-3B-11B 701-2B-12B 701-1B-13B
442-7B 5V2 700-4A TBM_SIG 700-3A TB_5V_SIG 700-2A SGND 700-1A TBO_SIG 700-13B CHFAN_ER 700-12B CHFAN_ON 700-11B SGND 700-10B TBC_SIG 442-6B SGND 442-5B CONT 442-4B CLOCK 442-3B CW/CCW 442-2B EM 442-1B H/L
344 345 346
M52 M53
TONER BOTTLE MOTOR
347 348
728-1-6 728-2-5 728-3-4 728-4-3 728-5-2 728-6-1
349 350
459-10 5V2 700-9B CBCL_DRIVE 700-8B TBC_EN 700-7B TBC_CLOCK 700-6B TBK_SIG 700-5B KBCL_DRIVE 700-4B TBK_EN 700-3B TBK_CLOCK 700-2B DBLT_CNT 700-1B DBLT_CLOCK 459-9 PS 459-8 SGND 459-7 5V2 459-6 PS 459-5 SGND 459-4 PGND 459-3 H/L 459-2 EM 459-1 DRIVE
351 352 353 354 355
709-1 709-2 709-3 709-4 709-5 709-6 709-7 709-8 709-9 709-10 709-11
356 357 358 359
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Symbol C(K) TEMP/HUM HV2 M36 M37 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48 M49 M50 M51 M52 M53 MC14 MC15 MC16 MC17 PS54 TLD Y TLD M TLD C TLD K MS2 Key counter
Part name 3-D 7-D 1-C 4-D 4-E 5-D 6-D 6-D 6-D 7-D 5-E 7-I 7-I 8-I 8-I 9-H 5-I 5-I 5-I 5-I 6-E 5-E 6-E 6-E 6-E 4-I 4-D 3-F 2-F 2-E 1-F 1-F 2-F 2-E 5-F Temp/Humidity sensor High voltage unit /2 Fixing cooling fan /3 Fixing cooling fan /2 Writing intake fan /1 Writing intake fan /2 Writing exhaust fan /1 Writing exhaust fan /2 Drum unit fan Chager intake fan Toner supply motor /Y Toner supply motor /M Toner supply motor /C Toner supply motor /K Toner bottle motor Toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle clutch /K Toner supply door open/close sensor Toner level detection sensor /Y Toner level detection sensor /M Toner level detection sensor /C Toner level detection sensor /K Toner supply interlock switch Indicator lamp Guide plate Separation 2nd transfer 1st transfer /Y 1st transfer /M 1st transfer /C 1st transfer /K
Location
TSDB
Toner supply drive board
Appendix-16
5.9
Z 1 1
361A-1-10 361A-2-9 24V2 362-1-2 361A-3-8 360-1A 24V2
F/G
PRE-CHARGING LAMP/Y
CONT 362-2-1 361A-4-7 360-2A PCLCONTY 361A-5-6 360-3A 24V2 360-4A PCLCONTM 623-2B-7B 360-5A 24V2 360-6A PCLCONTC 623-4B-5B 360-7A 24V2 622-3-3 623-5B-4B 623-6B-3B 623-7B-2B 623-8B-1B 623-9A-1A DTXD 621-6-2 623-8A-2A SGND 621-5-3 623-7A-3A CTS 621-4-4 623-6A-4A DRXD 621-3-5 623-5A-5A SGND 621-2-6 623-4A-6A RTS 621-1-7 623-3A-7A DSET 623-2A-8A 623-1A-9A 622-4-4 622-1-1 622-2-2 621-7-1 623-3B-6B 623-1B-8B 24V 24V PGND PGND 5V 5V SGND SGND 623-1-1 361A-6-5 361A-7-4 361A-8-3 361A-9-2
PCL Y
F/G
24V2 CONT 24V2 CONT 24V2 365-1-2 364-2-1 364-1-2 363-2-1 363-1-2
PRE-CHARGING LAMP/M
2
PRE-CHARGING LAMP/C
PCL M PCL C
15
PRE-CHARGING LAMP/K
CONT 365-2-1 360-8A PCLCONTK 361A-10-1
PCL K
16
12V 368-1-4 361C-1-12
114
360-9A 12V 360-10A TONERY_S
TONER DENSITY SENSOR/Y

SGND TDS_VREF 12V 369-1-4 361C-5-8 361C-6-7 360-14A TONERM_S 360-15A SGND 360-16A TDSMVREF 620-6 CTS 360-17A 12V 360-18A TONERC_S 360-19A SGND 360-20A TDSCVREF 620-7 DSET 620-5 SGND 620-4 SOUT 361C-7-6 361C-8-5 361C-9-4 361C-10-3 361C-11-2 361C-12-1 360-13A 12V 620-3 RTS 369-2-3 369-3-2 369-4-1 370-1-4 370-2-3 370-3-2 370-4-1 620-2 SGND 368-4-1 361C-4-9 360-12A TDSYVREF 620-1 SIN 368-3-2 361C-3-10 360-11A SGND
TDS Y
115
TDS_SIG SGND TDS_VREF 12V
TDS_SIG
368-2-3 361C-2-11
ADF DF-319 (OPTION)
3
TONER DENSITY SENSOR/M
TDS M
TDS_SIG SGND TDS_VREF
TONER DENSITY SENSOR/C
TDS C
12V 371-1-4 361B-1-20 361B-2-19 361B-3-18 361B-4-17 360-4B TDSKVREF 600-2 SGND 601-19 601-18 601-17 601-16 601-15 601-14 601-13 601-12 601-11 601-10 601-9 601-8 601-7 601-6 601-5 601-4 601-3 601-2 601-1 600-3 PS4 360-5B 24V2 600-4 PS3 600-5 PS2 600-6 PS1 600-7 SGND 600-8 M2 EM 600-9 M2 CONT 600-10 APS1 24V2 SURFM_EV SGND 600-14 SCAN_PC 600-15 SGND 600-16 SCANVREF 600-17 SGND 24V2 SURFC_EV 600-20 SCAN_CK SGND PGND 573-2 M_TEMP1 24V2 SURFK_EV SGND PGND 574-3 GND 477-1 361D-8-11 361D-7-12 652-1-2 657-1 657-2 274-4 274-3 274-2 274-1 275-12 273-12 - 6 273-11 - 7 273-10 - 8 273- 9 - 9 273- 8 - 10 273- 7 - 11 273- 6 - 12 275-5 275-4 275-3 275-2 275-1 273- 5 - 13 273- 4 - 14 273- 3 - 15 273- 2 - 16 273- 1 - 17 273-13 - 5 273-14 - 4 273-15 - 3 273-16 - 2 272-16A SGND 272-15A LDYIDX 272-14A SGND 272-13A LD5V 272-12A LDYJTB 272-11A MPCYLD 272-10A MPCYDI 272-9A MPCYCK 272-8A /ALMYRST 272-7A /LDYALM 272-6A PWMY272-5A PWMY+ 272-4A /LDYENB 272-3A /S/H_Y 272-2A SGND 272-1A LD5V 274-5 273-17 - 1 652-2-1 656-3-13 657-3 657-4 657-5 657-6 656-4-12 656-5-11 650-11A LOCK 564-2 DRIVE 656-6-10 650-10A TEMP.ERROR 564-1 24V2 650-9A 5V2 656-7-9 656-2-14 656-1-15 361D-6-13 361D-5-14 476-3 476-4 272-17A IDXYJTB 476-5 476-6 375-1 361B-20-1 360-20B PGND 367-12-1 574-2 M_TEMP2 375-2 361B-19-2 360-19B SGND 367-11-2 574-1 5V 375-3 361B-18-3 360-18B SURF_EVK 367-10-3 375-4 361B-17-4 360-17B 24V2 573-3 GND 367-9-4 374-1 361B-16-5 360-16B PGND 573-1 5V 367-8-5 374-2 361B-15-6 360-15B SGND 602-1 5V2 602-2 SGND 367-7-6 374-3 361B-14-7 360-14B SURF_EVC 367-6-7 600-19 SGND 374-4 360-13B 24V2 367-5-8 361B-13-8 600-18 SCAN_EN PGND 373-1 360-12B PGND 367-4-9 361B-12-9 373-2 360-11B SGND 367-3-10 361B-11-10 600-13 SCAN_CW 373-3 360-10B SURF_EVM 367-2-11 361B-10-11 600-12 APS3 373-4 360-9B 24V2 600-11 APS2 367-1-12 361B-9-12 360-6B SURF_EVY 360-7B SGND 360-8B PGND 361B-5-16 361B-6-15 361B-7-14 361B-8-13 360-3B SGND 600-1 L1 CONT 601-20 360-2B TONERK_S 360-1B 12V 371-2-3 371-3-2 371-4-1 372-4 372-3 372-2 372-1 366-8-1 366-7-2 366-6-3 366-5-4 366-4-5 366-3-6 366-2-7 366-1-8 TDS_SIG SGND TDS_VREF 24V2 SURFY_EV SGND PGND
4
TONER DENSITY SENSOR/K
TDS K
603-1 U
604-7
M1
603-2 V
604-6 604-5 604-4 604-3 603-3 W 617-9-1 605-1 24V4 605-2 CONT 605-3 PGND 617-8-2 617-7-3 606-1 604-2 604-1
SCANNER MOTOR
DRPS Y
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/Y
L1 INVB
PROCESS UNIT
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/M
DRPSB Y DRPSB M DRPSB C DRPSB K
606-2 606-3
L1
EXPOSURE LAMP
609-7 5V2 609-8 PS 609-9 SGND 609-10 5V2 609-11 PS 609-12 SGND
617-6-4 617-5-5 617-4-6 617-3-7 617-2-8 617-1-9
615-6-1 615-5-2 615-4-3 615-3-4 615-2-5 615-1-6
612-3
DRPS M
PS3
612-2 612-1 613-3 613-2 613-1
APS SENSOR/S
PS4
SCDB
DRPS C
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/C
APS SENSOR/L
6
DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR BOARD/K
609-1 SGND 602-3 24V2 609-2 PS 602-4 PGND 609-3 5V2 609-4 SGND 609-5 PS 609-6 5V2 609-13 SIG 609-14 SGND 607-1 CONT 607-2 EM 607-3 PGND
614-3-1 614-2-2 614-1-3
610-3
13 11 12 14
PS1
610-2 610-1 611-3 611-2 611-1 616-2 616-1 608-3-1 608-2-2 608-1-3
SCANNER HP SENSOR
DRPS K
PS2
APS TIMING SENSOR
7
477-2
RS1
17 18
477-3 477-4
RESET SWITCH
M3
477-5 477-6 475-2-1 475-1-2 361D-1-18 361D-2-17 361D-3-16 476-1 650-12A CLOCK
361D-4-15
476-2
650-13A CONT
M2
INDEX SB Y
POLYGON MOTOR/Y
SCANNER COOLING FAN
MU-412 (OPTION)
SD1
658-1
275-11 275-10 275-9 275-8 275-7 275-6 650-8A PS 656-8-8
DRUM SEPARATION CLAW SOLENOID
PS5
658-2 658-3
659-6 659-5 659-3
LASER CORRECTION SENSOR/Y
8
378-2 376-1A 24V2 376-2A DRIVE 650-6A B 656-11-5 499-1 376-3A CREG1MON 656-12-4 650-4A A 376-4A CREG1LED 499-2 498-2 379-3 377-4A-8A 496-4A-8A 499-3 376-5A SGND 550-3A A 656-14-2 650-2A 5V2 656-15-1 650-1A 5V2 659-1 659-2 376-6A 5V2 499-4 498-4 379-1 377-6A-6A 496-6A-6A 498-1 379-4 377-3A-9A 496-3A-9A 496-5A-7A 656-13-3 659-4 377-5A-7A 650-5A B 656-10-6 650-7A SGND 378-1 377-2A-10A 496-2A-10A 377-1A-11A 496-1A-11A 656-9-7
SD2 LDB Y
379-2
COLOR REGISTRATION SHUTTER SOLENOID
LASER CORRECTION MOTOR/Y
PS8 M7
498-3
COLOR REGISTRATION SENSOR/F
SCANNER UNIT
IMAGE CORRECTION UNIT

653-1-2 661-1 661-2 653-2-1 660-3-13 650-13B CONT 376-12A N.C 660-4-12 650-12B CLOCK 660-5-11 650-11B LOCK 660-6-10 383-1 376-1B CREG2MON 660-7-9 650-9B 5V2 660-8-8 650-8B PS 660-9-7 650-7B SGND 558-5 496-5B-7B 376-5B DS2_VREF 650-6B B 660-11-5 650-5B B 660-12-4 650-4B A 660-13-3 550-3B A 660-14-2 306-2 376-10B 24V2 650-1B 5V2 376-11B DRIVE 376-12B N.C 376-13B N.C 376-14B N.C 491-1-4 384-1A DRIVE 384-2A EM 384-3A H/L 483-1-6 384-5A SGND 384-6A PS 384-7A 5V 384-8A SGND 384-9A PS 384-10A 5V 384-11A TCNT_DRIVE2 384-12A SHUT_24V 384-13A TCNT_DRIVE1 384-14A SHUT_24V 384-15A 488-1-3 492-1 492-2 492-3 488-3-1 489-1-4 489-2-3 489-3-2 384-7B H/L 489-4-1 490-1-4 490-2-3 490-3-2 490-4-1 389-3 389-2 389-1 384-8B SGND 384-9B DRIVE 384-10B EM 384-11B H/L 384-12B SGND 384-13B SGND 384-14B PS 384-15B 5V 293-2-1 312-1 312-2 311-9 311-8 311-7 313-5 PS 313-4 5V2 314-1 314-2 314-3 313-3 SGND 313-2 PS 313-1 5V2 311-6 311-5 311-4 311-3 311-2 311-1 324-3 319-1 323-1 U 323-2 V 324-1 322-1 322-2 322-3 321-1 321-2 321-3 320-3 SGND 320-2 PS 320-1 5V2 320-6 SGND 320-5 PS 320-4 5V2 323-3 W 319-2 318-9 318-8 318-7 318-6 318-5 318-4 318-3 318-2 318-1 331-3 326-1 330-1 U 293-1-2 292-1-9 292-2-8 292-3-7 292-4-6 292-5-5 292-6-4 292-7-3 292-8-2 292-9-1 295-2-1 295-1-2 324-2 294-1-9 294-2-8 294-3-7 294-4-6 294-5-5 294-6-4 294-7-3 294-8-2 294-9-1 297-2-1 331-2 326-2 297-1-2 651-3 5V2 668-8-8 651-2 KHP_SIG 668-9-7 651-1 SGND 668-10-6 668-11-5 668-12-4 668-13-3 668-14-2 668-15-1 317-3 316-1 U 316-2 V 316-3 W 313-6 SGND 492-4 487-1 384-4B GND 384-5B DRIVE 384-6B EM 487-2 384-3B H/L 651-7 CONT 668-4-12 651-6 CLOCK 668-5-11 651-5 LOCK 668-6-10 651-4 TEMP.ERROR 668-7-9 487-3 384-2B EM 487-4 384-1B DRIVE 488-2-2 655-1-2 668-1-15 669-1 655-2-1 668-2-14 668-3-13 669-2 669-3 669-4 669-5 669-6 670-1 651-13 B 664-11-5 651-12 B 664-12-4 651-11 A 664-13-3 551-10 A 664-14-2 651-9 5V2 664-15-1 651-8 5V2 667-1 667-2 667-4 667-3 667-5 483-2-5 483-3-4 483-4-3 483-5-2 483-6-1 559-1-2 384-4A SGND 651-20 CONT 664-4-12 651-19 CLOCK 664-5-11 651-18 LOCK 664-6-10 651-17 TEMP.ERROR 664-7-9 651-16 5V2 664-8-8 651-15 PS 664-9-7 651-14 SGND 664-10-6 667-6 491-2-3 491-3-2 491-4-1 388-3 388-2 388-1 387-3 387-2 387-1 654-1-2 664-1-15 665-1 654-2-1 664-2-14 664-3-13 665-2 665-3 665-4 665-5 665-6 666-1 306-1 377-11B-1B 496-11B-1B 377-10B-2B 496-10B-2B 650-2B 5V2 660-15-1 663-1 663-2 663-4 663-3 663-5 376-6B DS2_CNT 376-7B SGND 376-8B 12V 376-9B DS2_SIG 496-6B-6B 496-7B-5B 496-8B-4B 496-9B-3B 558-4 558-3 558-2 558-1 377-9B-3B 377-8B-4B 377-7B-5B 377-6B-6B 377-5B-7B 660-10-6 663-6 376-2B CREG2LED 376-3B SGND 376-4B 5V2 383-2 383-3 383-4 381-4 382-1 377-4B-8B 496-4B-8B 381-3 382-2 377-3B-9B 496-3B-9B 381-2 382-3 377-2B-10B 496-2B-10B 381-1 382-4 377-1B-11B 496-1B-11B 650-10B TEMP.ERROR 661-6 662-1 661-5 661-4 376-13A N.C 376-14A N.C 661-3 660-2-14 660-1-15
278-5 278-4 278-3 278-2 278-1 279-12 279-11
277-17 - 1 277-16 - 2 277-15 - 3 277-14 - 4 277-13 - 5 277-12 - 6 277-11 - 7
19 20 M4
272-17B IDXMJTB 272-16B SGND 272-15B LDMIDX 272-14B SGND 272-13B LD5 272-12B LDMJTB 272-11B MPCMLD
INDEX SB M
POLYGON MOTOR/M
HDD IFB
CN220(PCi B to B)
HD-106 (OPTION)
LASER CORRECTION SENSOR/M
PS9
10
10
PS6
662-2 662-3
279-10 279-9 279-8 279-7 279-6 279-5
277-10 - 8 277- 9 - 9 277- 8 - 10 277- 7 - 11 277- 6 - 12 277- 5 - 13
272-10B MPCMDI 272-9B MPCMCK 272-8B /ALMMRST 272-7B /LDMALM 272-6B PWMM-
LDB M
PS11
GAMMA SENSOR
LASER CORRECTION MOTOR/M
M8
272-5B PWMM+ 279-4 279-3 279-2 279-1 277- 4 - 14 277- 3 - 15 277- 2 - 16 277- 1 - 17 272-4B /LDMENB 272-3B /S/H_Y 272-2B SGND 272-1B LD5V 269-1 269-2 269-3 282-5 282-4 281-17 - 1 281-16 - 2
COLOR REGISTRATION SENSOR/R
SD3
GAMMA SHUTTER SOLENOID
HD-106
11
11
266-1 12V 266-2 SGND
IPB
266-3 SGND
131 132 133 130
21 22
280-17A IDXCJTB 280-16A SGND
269-4
266-4 5V2 282-3 282-2 282-1 283-12 283-11 281-15 - 3 281-14 - 4 281-13 - 5 281-12 - 6 281-11 - 7
M5
280-15A LDCIDX 280-14A SGND 280-13A LD5V 280-12A LDCJTB 280-11A MPCCLD
POLYGON MOTOR/C
INDEX SB C
M10
M9
BLACK COUNTER
559-2-1 390-1-2
C(BK)
IP-901(OPTION)
13
TOTAL COUNTER
390-2-1
13
C(T)
PS12 PS13
12
PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR PAPER EXIT SENSOR
12
PS7
666-2 666-3
283-10 283-9 283-8 283-7 283-6 283-5 283-4 283-3 283-2 283-1
281-10 - 8 281- 9 - 9 281- 8 - 10 281- 7 - 11 281- 6 - 12 281- 5 - 13 281- 4 - 14 281- 3 - 15 281- 2 - 16 281- 1 - 17
280-10A MPCCDI 280-9A MPCCCK 280-8A /ALMCRST 280-7A /LDCALM 280-6A PWMC280-5A PWMC+ 280-4A /LDCENB 280-3A /S/H_C 280-2A SGND 280-1A LD5V
LASER CORRECTION SENSOR/C
LDB C
LASER CORRECTION MOTOR/C
286-5 286-4
285-17 - 1 285-16 - 2
280-17B IDXKJTB 280-16B SGND
23 24
INDEX SB K
POLYGON MOTOR/K
M12
14
DRUM COOLING FAN/1
M13
DRUM COOLING FAN/2
TONER SUPPLY DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
M11
TRANSFER BELT COOLING FAN
M6
286-3 286-2 286-1 287-12 287-11
285-15 - 3 285-14 - 4 285-13 - 5 285-12 - 6 285-11 - 7
280-15B LDKIDX 280-14B SGND 280-13B LD5V 280-12B LDKJTB 280-11B MPCKLD
14
TDB
670-2 670-3
287-10 287-9 287-8 287-7 287-6 287-5 287-4 287-3 287-2
285-10 - 8 285- 9 - 9 285- 8 - 10 285- 7 - 11 285- 6 - 12 285- 5 - 13 285- 4 - 14 285- 3 - 15 285- 2 - 16
280-10B MPCKDI 280-9B MPCKCK 280-8B /ALMKRST 280-7B /LDKALM 280-6B PWMK280-5B PWMK+ 280-4B /LDKENB 280-3B /S/H_K 280-2B SGND 287-1 285- 1 - 17 280-1B LD5V
LDB K
TEMP DETECTION BOARD
PRCB
PS14
15
15
28 32
M14
317-2 317-1 315-1 315-2 315-3
DRUM MOTOR/Y
309-1A CLOCK 309-2A FH 309-3A ENABLE 309-4A H/L1 309-5A H/L2 309-6A ENA1 309-7A ENA2 309-8A 5V2 309-9A SGND 302-1 24V1 302-2 PGND 302-3 24V2 301-4 SGND 301-1 5V2 301-2 12V 301-3 SGND
271-1 12V 271-2 SGND 271-3 5V2 271-4 SGND 271-5 3.5V 271-6 SGND
DRDB/Y
ENCODER SENSOR/Y1
10 7 5 6 8 9
53 54 56 57 59 60 55 58
PS60 PS61
16
ENCODER SENSOR/Y2
16
DCPS1
27 31
302-4 PGND 302-5 N.C 309-10A CLOCK 309-11A FH 309-12A ENABLE 309-13A H/L1 309-14A H/L2 309-15A ENA1 309-16A ENA2 309-17A 5V2 309-18A SGND 303-2 SGND 300-18 P_CMD 300-17 P_RTS 300-16 P_STS 300-15 P_CTS 300-14 SGND 300-13 PY_IDX 302-6 N.C
M15
DRUM MOTOR/M
63 64
303-1 5V2
260-B34 GND 260-B33 N.C 260-B32 WAKEUP260-B31 CPRDY+ 260-B30 CTS260-B29 RXD+ 260-B28 ONLINE260-B27 AC_DOWN+ 260-B26 ENG_SLP260-B25 ENG_SET+ 260-B24 RTS260-B23 TXD+ 260-B22 PSIG0260-B21 GND 260-B20 PSIG1260-B19 PSIG2260-B18 GND 260-B17 PCLK260-B16 PSIG3260-B15 GND 260-B14 PSIG4260-B13 PSIG5260-B12 GND 260-B11 PSIG6260-B10 PSIG7260-B8 SSIG3+ 260-B7 SCLK+ 260-B5 SSIG2+ 260-B4 SSIG1+ 260-B3 GND 260-B2 SSIG0+ 260-B1 GND 260-A34 GND 260-A33 N.C 260-A32 WAKEUP+ 260-A31 CPRDY260-A30 CTS+ 260-A29 RXD260-A28 ONLINE+ 260-A27 AC_DOWN260-A26 ENG_SLP+ 260-A25 ENG_SET260-A24 RTS+ 260-A23 TXD260-A22 PSIG0+ 260-A21 GND 260-A20 PSIG1+ 260-A19 PSIG2+ 260-A18 GND 260-A17 PCLK+ 260-A16 PSIG3+ 260-A15 GND 260-A14 PSIG4+ 260-A13 PSIG5+ 260-A12 GND 260-A11 PSIG6+ 260-A10 PSIG7+ 260-A9 GND 260-A8 SSIG3260-A7 SCLK260-A6 GND 260-A5 SSIG2260-A4 SSIG1260-A3 GND 260-A2 SSIG0260-A1 GND
CCDB
ENCODER SENSOR/M1
DRDB/M
PS62 PS63
17
ENCODER SENSOR/M2 DRUM MOTOR/C ENCODER SENSOR/C1
17
250-1 250-2 250-3 250-4 250-5 250-6 330-2 V 331-1 329-1 329-2 329-3 328-1 328-2 327-3 SGND 327-6 SGND 327-5 PS 327-4 5V2 330-3 W 296-1-9 325-9 325-8 325-7 325-6 325-5 325-4 325-3 296-2-8 296-3-7 296-4-6 296-5-5 296-6-4 296-7-3 300-12 PM_IDX 309-1B CLOCK 309-2B FH 309-3B ENABLE 309-4B H/L1 309-5B H/L2 309-6B ENA1 309-7B ENA2 300-11 PC_IDX 300-10 PK_IDX 300-9 SGND 300-8 P_VTOP 250-7 250-8 250-9 250-10 250-11
26 30
M16
DRDB/C
PS64 PS65
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
18
ENCODER SENSOR/C2
328-3
327-2 PS 327-1 5V2
300-7 P_PTOP 325-2 325-1 338-3 333-1 337-1 U 296-8-2 296-9-1 299-2-1 338-2 333-2 299-1-2 309-8B 5V2 309-9B SGND 300-6 SGND 300-5 REM/4 300-4 S_VV 300-3 EE_VV
250-12 250-13 250-14 250-15 250-16
25 29
M17
DRUM MOTOR/K
336-1 336-2
337-2 V 338-1 337-3 W 334-6 SGND
332-9 332-8 332-7
298-1-9 298-2-8 298-3-7
300-2 AC_OFF 309-10B CLOCK 309-11B FH 309-12B ENABLE 300-1 MRL_OFF
250-17 250-18
19
ENCODER SENSOR/K1
336-3 335-1 335-2
334-5 PS 334-4 5V2 334-3 SGND
332-6 332-5 332-4 332-3
298-4-6 298-5-5 298-6-4 298-7-3
35-1 CVM1_SIG 309-13B H/L1 309-14B H/L2 309-15B ENA1 309-16B ENA2 35-2 CVFD_SIG 35-3 CV_SIZE0
DRDB/K
334-2 PS 335-3 334-1 5V2
PS66 PS67
ENCODER SENSOR/K2
332-2 332-1 305-1
298-8-2 298-9-1 304-3-4
35-4 CV_SIZE1 309-17B 5V2 309-18B SGND 35-5 CV_SIZE2 35-6 CV_SIZE3 305-2 304-2-5 353-13 SGND 35-7 CVUP_SIG
COIN VENDOR
CV (PARALLEL)
PS69
305-3 289-1
304-1-6 304-6-1
353-12 PS 353-11 5V2
35-8 CPF0 35-9 CPF1 289-2 304-5-2 353-10 SGND 35-10 PGND
217-50 GND 217-49 AD_12V 217-48 AD_12V 217-47 GND 217-46 AD_5V 217-45 AD_5V 217-44 AD_5V 217-43 AD_5V 217-42 AD_5V 217-41 ADRST 217-40 LVDSCK1+ 217-39 LVDSCK1217-38 GND 217-37 AD_D4+ 217-36 AD_D4217-35 GND 217-34 AD_D3+ 217-33 AD_D3217-32 GND 217-31 LVDSCK0+ 217-30 LVDSCK0217-29 GND 217-28 AD_D2+ 217-27 AD_D2217-26 GND 217-25 AD_D1+ 217-24 AD_D1217-23 GND 217-22 AD_D0+ 217-21 AD_D0217-20 GND 217-19 SDO 217-18 SDI 217-17 /SEN 217-16 SCK 217-15 GND 217-14 LVDSCK217-13 LVDSCK+ 217-12 GND 217-11 RCK217-10 RCK+ 217-9 GND 217-8 TCK217-7 TCK+ 217-6 GND 217-5 BCLAMP 217-4 ACLAMP 217-3 CLAMP 217-2 TG 217-1 GND
551-50 551-49 551-48 551-47 551-46 551-45 551-44 551-43 551-42 551-41 551-40 551-39 551-38 551-37 551-36 551-35 551-34 551-33 551-32 551-31 551-30 551-29 551-28 551-27 551-26 551-25 551-24 551-23 551-22 551-21 551-20 551-19 551-18 551-17 551-16 551-15 551-14 551-13 551-12 551-11 551-10 551-9 551-8 551-7 551-6 551-5 551-4 551-3 551-2 551-1
20
PS68
289-3
304-4-3
353-9 PS 353-8 5V2 356-1 356-2 356-3 356-4 356-5 356-6 354-7-1 354-6-2 354-5-3 354-4-4 354-3-5 354-2-6 37-11 5V2 37-10 GND 353-7 5V2 353-6 SGND 353-5 CONT 353-4 CLOCK 353-3 CW/CCW 353-2 LOCK 37-9 24V 37-8 COPV_ENB 37-7 SGND 37-6 OP_RTS
OACB
252-1 5V1
TRANSFER BELT MOTOR
CV (SERIAL)
3 1 2 4
COIN VENDOR
M18
DEVELOPING MOTOR/Y
21
356-7 356-8 356-9 356-10 356-11
354-1-7 355-4-1 355-3-2 355-2-3 355-1-4 358-1-6
252-2 SGND 353-1 H/L 37-5 OP_DSR 252-3 REM/1
171-1-6 173-1 5V2 37-4 OP_SIN 171-2-5
175-4 175-3
Y1CONT X1CONT
52 51 50 49
357-1 A 358-2-5 357-2 A 358-3-4 357-3 B 358-4-3 357-4 B 358-5-2 357-5 24V2 358-6-1 357-6 24V2 359-3 359-2 359-1 349-1 349-2 349-3 349-4 349-5 349-6 349-7 349-8 349-9 349-10 349-11 350-1 350-2 350-3 350-4 350-5 350-6 291-1-3 291-2-2 357-7 SGND 357-8 PS 291-3-1 357-9 5V2 341-7-1 341-6-2 341-5-3 341-4-4 341-3-5 341-2-6 341-1-7 345-4-1 345-3-2 345-2-3 345-1-4 342-7-1 342-6-2 342-5-3 342-4-4 342-3-5 342-2-6
252-4 AC_OFF 37-3 OP_CTS 37-2 OP_DTR 37-1 OP_SOUT 466-8 466-7 PGND 24VAC 466-6 466-5 466-4 466-3 PGND 24V2 SGND 12V
173-2 5V2 171-3-4 173-3 SGND 171-4-3 173-4 SGND 171-5-2 173-5 12V 171-6-1 173-6
175-2 175-1
Y2CONT X2CONT
TOUCH PANEL BOARD
4PIN CT6PIN
75 78 77 79 76
170-12-1 251-1 DATA_M 251-2 DATA_OP 251-3 ACK_M 251-4 ACK_OP 170-11-2 170-10-3 170-9-4
174-14
LCD_ADJ
MB
M19
1st TRANSFER PRESSURE/RELEASE MOTOR
172-12 172-11
174-13 174-12 174-11 172-10 174-10 172-9
LCD_24V LD3 LD2 LD1
LCDB
22
70 69 72 116 73 74 71 117
PS15
1st TRANSFER HP SENSOR
466-2 466-1 340-14A 5V2 340-13A SGND 340-12A START/STOP 340-11A CLOCK 340-10A CW/CCW 340-9A LOCK 340-8A H/L 464-1 LTNPSIG 464-2 LTPR_SIG 464-3 LTSO_SIG 464-4 SGND 464-5 LTCCLCNT 464-6 LTSSDCNT 465-11-1 465-10-2 465-9-3 465-8-4 465-7-5 465-6-6
SGND 5V2
251-5 REQ_M 251-6 REQ_OP
170-8-5 170-7-6
174- 9 172-8 172-7 174- 8 170-6-7 251-7 CARDIN 251-8 CARD_RXD 251-9 CARD_TXD 251-10 WT_LED 251-11 ST_LED 251-12 ST_SIG 170-5-8 170-4-9 170-3-10 170-2-11 170-1-12 174- 7 172-6 172-5 172-4 174- 4 172-3 174- 3 172-2 174- 2 172-1 174- 6 174- 5
LD0 LCD_24V GND
USB
14PIN CT12PIN
259-1 VBUS 259-2 D259-3 D+ 259-4 GND
5V CP LP FLM NC
23
LCT LT-211 (OPTION)
M20 M21
DEVELOPING MOTOR/M
45 46 47 48
340-7A 5V2 340-6A SGND 340-5A START/STOP 340-4A CLOCK 340-3A CW/CCW 350-7 350-8 350-9 350-10 350-11 351-1 351-2 351-3 351-4 351-5 351-6 342-1-7 346-4-1 346-3-2 346-2-3 346-1-4 343-7-1 343-6-2 343-5-3 343-4-4 343-3-5 343-2-6 340-2A LOCK 340-1A H/L
464-7 LTRCLCNT 464-8 LTSCLCNT 464-9 SGND 464-10 SOUT2-2 464-11 SIN2-2
465-5-7 465-4-8 465-3-9 465-2-10 465-1-11 471-9-1 464-12 DRIVE (24V1) 464-13 STFAN_ER 464-14 H/L 471-8-2 471-7-3 471-6-4 470-4-1 470-3-2 470-2-3
174- 1 251-13 SW_SIG 251-14 SGND 251-15 5V 251-16 SGND

161-3-2 161-4-1 161-1-4 161-2-3
DSP_OFF
Amphenol 36pin
24
176-1
165-3 5V
OB_INVB
M24
IPB COOLING FAN
176-2
165-2 GND
41 42 43 44
340-14B 5V2 340-13B SGND 340-12B START/STOP 340-11B CLOCK 340-10B CW/CCW 340-9B LOCK
FT-31
FT-32
464-15 PGND
471-5-5 471-4-6 464-16 DRIVE (24V1) 464-17 STFAN_ER 464-18 H/L 464-19 PGND 572-1 N.C 572-2 N.C 471-3-7 471-2-8 471-1-9
470-1-4 463-4-1 463-3-2 463-2-3 463-1-4
176-3
165-1 PWM
6PIN
176-4
162-3 162-2
158-3 SGND
M25
IP COOLING FAN
176-5
162-1
158-2 LCD_ADJ
256-1 HT_CLOCK 256-2 CENTD0 256-3 CENTD1 256-4 CENTD2 256-5 CENTD3 256-6 CENTD4 256-7 CENTD5 256-8 CENTD6 256-9 CENTD7 256-10 PR_CLOCK 256-11 PR_BUSY 256-12 ADREQ 256-13 XFLAG 256-14 HT_BUSY 256-15 N.C 256-16 N.C 256-17 N.C 256-18 N.C 256-19 GND 256-20 GND 256-21 GND 256-22 GND 256-23 GND 256-24 GND 256-25 GND 256-26 GND 256-27 GND 256-28 N.C 256-29 N.C 256-30 N.C 256-31 INT_ISWB 256-32 DAVALB 256-33 N.C 256-34 N.C 256-35 N.C 256-36 AC1284
SW2
DB-9
RJ-45
176-6
158-1 LCD_24V
OB3
OB2
25
M22
DEVELOPING MOTOR/C
255-1 TX+ 255-2 TX255-3 RX+ 255-4 GND 255-5 GND 255-6 RX255-7 GND 255-8 GND
257-1 DCD 257-2 RXD 257-3 TXD 257-4 DTR 257-5 GND 257-6 DSR 257-7 RTS 257-8 CTS 257-9 RI
351-7 351-8 351-9 351-10 351-11 352-1 352-2 352-3 352-4 352-5 352-6
343-1-7 347-4-1 347-3-2 347-2-3 347-1-4 344-7-1 344-6-2 344-5-3 344-4-4 344-3-5
340-8B H/L
572-3 N.C 572-4 N.C
OB1
37 38 39
467-6 RTS 467-5 SGND
468-1-6 468-2-5
Appendix-17
MAIN SWITCH
LAN I/F
KRDS I/F (RS-232)
40
340-7B 5V2 340-6B SGND 340-5B START/STOP 340-4B CLOCK 340-3B CW/CCW
467-4 SIN 467-3 CTS 467-2 SGND 467-1 SOUT
468-3-4 468-4-3 468-5-2 468-6-1 469-4 PGND
Symbol
FNS FS-215 (OPTION) FS-115 (OPTION)
Connector Faston Relay connector Crimp
26 27
26
M23
DEVELOPING MOTOR/K
344-2-6 352-7 352-8 352-9 352-10 352-11 344-1-7 348-4-1 348-3-2 348-2-3 348-1-4
340-2B LOCK 340-1B H/L
469-1 469-3
24V2
67 65 66 68
33 34 35 36
SGND 469-2 469-5 469-6 5V2
27
Symbol DF-319 PS60 PS61 PS62 PS63 PS64 PS65 PS66 PS67 PS69 PS68 FS-115 FS-215 HD-106 HDD IFB INDX SB Y INDX SB M INDX SB C INDX SB K IP-901 TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K L1 LDB Y LDB M LDB C LDB K LT-211 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 DF-319 (option) Encoder sensor/Y1 Encoder sensor/Y2 Encoder sensor/M1 Encoder sensor/M2 Encoder sensor/C1 Encoder sensor/C2 Encoder sensor/K1 Encoder sensor/K2 Encoder sensor/BELT1 Encoder sensor/BELT2 FS-115 (option) FS-215 (option) HD-106 (option) HDD I/F board INDEX sensor board/Y INDEX sensor board/M INDEX sensor board/C INDEX sensor board/K IP-901 (option) Toner density sensor/Y Toner density sensor/M Toner density sensor/C Toner density sensor/K Exposure lamp Laser drive board/Y Laser drive board/M Laser drive board/C Laser drive board/K LT-211 (option) Scanner motor Scanner cooling fan Polygon motor/Y Polygon motor/M Polygon motor/C Polygon motor/K Laser correction motor/Y
Part name 2-A 16-Y 16-Y 17-Y 17-Y 18-Y 18-Y 19-Y 19-Y 20-V 20-V 25-L 25-L 11-E 10-E 7-L 9-L 11-L 13-L 13-F 3-V 3-V 4-V 4-V 5-B 8-L 10-L 12-L 14-L 22-L 4-B 7-B 7-M 9-M 11-M 13-M 8-M 11-M 13-M 12-V 13-W 14-V 14-V 15-Y
Location M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 MU-412 PCL Y PCL M PCL C PCL K PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 PS11 PS12 PS13 PS14 PS15 SD1 SD2 SD3 DRPS Y DRPS M DRPS C DRPS K DRPSB Y DRPSB M DRPSB C DRPSB K RS1 SW2 TDB
Symbol Drum motor/M Drum motor/C Drum motor/K Transfer belt motor
Part name 16-Y 18-Y 19-Y 20-W 22-V 23-W 24-W 25-W 26-W 24-M 24-M 7-H 2-V 2-V 2-V 2-V 6-B 7-B 5-B 6-B 8-M 10-M 12-M 8-Y 10-Y 10-X 12-V 12-V 15-V 22-V 8-V 8-X 11-X 5-X 5-X 6-X 6-X 5-V 5-V 6-V 6-V 7-B 25-F 14-M
Location L1INVB OB INVB LCDB CCDB OB1 OB2 OB3 OACB MB IPB CV CV SCDB PRCB DRDB/Y DRDB/M DRDB/K DRDB/C C (T) C (BK)
Symbol L1 inverter OB inverter board LCD board Touch panel board CCD board Operation board/1 Operation board/2 Operation board/3 Overall control board Memory board Image processing board Coin vendor(parallel) Coin vendor(serial) Scanner drive board Printer control board Drum drive board/Y Drum drive board/M Drum drive board/C Drum drive board/K Total counter Black counter
Part name 5-C 24-B 22-B 21-B 16-A 21-D 25-F 24-B 17-H 21-J 7-H 19-L 20-L 4-D 2-P 15-U 16-U 19-U 17-U 13-V 13-V
Location
1st transfer pressure/release motor Developing motor/Y Developing motor/M Developing motor/C Developing motor/K IP cooling fan IPB cooling fan MU-412(option) Pre-charging lamp/Y Pre-charging lamp/M Pre-charging lamp/C Pre-charging lamp/K Scanner HP sensor APS timing sensor APS sensor/S APS sensor/L Laser correction motor/Y Laser correction motor/M Laser correction motor/C Color registration sensor/F Color registration sensor/R Gamma sensor Paper exit full sensor Paper exit sensor Toner supply unit open/close sensor 1st transfer HP sensor Drum separation claw solenoid Color Registration shutter solenoid Gamma shutter solenoid Drum potential sensor/Y Drum potential sensor/M Drum potential sensor/C Drum potential sensor/K Drum potential sensor board/Y Drum potential sensor board/M Drum potential sensor board/C Drum potential sensor board/K DF Reset switch Main switch Temp detection board
Laser correction motor/M Laser correction motor/C Fixing cooling fan/1 Transfer belt cooling fan Drum cooling fan/1 Drum cooling fan/2 Drum motor/Y
Appendix-18
Z 1 1
F/G
528-2-1
T
130-1 - 1
96
518-15 24V2 518-14 DRIVE 510-10 SGND FT16 AC_H 510-11 5V2
MC1
528-1-2
ADU CONVEYANCE CLUTCH/2 POWER PLUG
130-2 - 2
FT23
FIXING UPPER HEATER LAMP/1
519-2-1
518-13 24V2 510-8 CLOCK
510-9 START/STOP 510-7 CW/CCW 510-6 LOCK
ACDB
MC2
519-1-2
FT27
FT25
518-12 DRIVE
TS1 FIXING UPPER HEATER LAMP/2
L2
FT17 AC_N
130-3 - 3 146-1 Y/G 146-2

FT18 AC_N
FIXING MOTOR
REVERSE/ EXIT SOLENOID REVERSE/ ADU EXIT CONVEYANCE SENSOR CLUTCH/1
5.10 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/2)
M29
FT20
526-1
FT1
FT2
FT22 FT21
518-11 24V2 510-4 PGND
510-5 H/L
SD4
526-2
518-10 DRIVE 510-3 PGND 510-2 24V2
L3
130-4 - 4
FT28
FT26
FT24
146-2 FT17 FT18
97
520-1 552-3-1
518-9 5V2 510-1 24V2
511-1-11 511-2-10 511-3-9 511-4-8 511-5-7 511-6-6 511-7-5 511-8-4 511-9-3 511-10-2 511-11-1 512-1 512-2 512-3 512-4 512-5 512-6 512-7 512-8 512-9 512-10 512-11
CBR2
CBR1
PS19
98
520-2 552-2-2
518-8 PS
146-1
520-3
552-1-3
FT4
FT3
518-7 SGND
513-6 5V2
514-1-6
515-1
TH1
99
132-3-1 132-2-2 132-1-3 BT-4 BT-2 BT-3 BT-1
PS16
522-1 521-6-1
518-6 5V2 518-5 PS 518-4 SGND 513-3 5V2 513-4 SGND 513-5 PS
514-2-5 515-2 515-3 516-1-3 517-1

158-4 157-1 SGND 157-2 L3_CONT 157-3 L2_CONT 157-4 5V2 158-3 158-2 158-1
PRCB
PS20
522-2 521-5-2 521-4-3 514-4-3 522-3 514-3-4
FIXING PRESSURE/ FIXING RELEASE EXIT SENSOR SENSOR
FIXING UNIT
ADU CONVEYANCE SENSOR
EUROPE ONLY
3
101
133-2-1
TH3
FT5
FT6
PS17
523-1 521-3-4
518-3 5V2 518-2 PS 518-1 SGND 527-17 24V2 569-1 A 513-1 SGND 513-2 PS
514-5-2 516-2-2 517-2 517-3 516-3-1 514-6-1
FIXING EMPERATURE SENSOR/3
FHCB
PS21
100
523-2 521-2-5 521-1-6 523-3
ADU REVERSE SENSOR
133-1-2 131-2 - 2
NF
529-2-1 529-1-2 570-4-1 571-4-1

TS2
FIXING LOWER HEATER LAMP
MC3
FT29 FT30
527-16 DRIVE 569-2 A
ADU PRESTRATION CLUTCH
570-3-2 570-2-3 570-1-4

153-1 24V1 153-2 NC
571-3-2 571-2-3 571-1-4
L4
FT19 AC_N
131-3 - 3 131-4 - 4 131-1 - 1
FT7
FT8
WEB MOTOR
M54
137-1 3191-01P1
533-1 530-3-1
F/G
527-15 SGND
569-3 B
107
FT15
PS22
533-2 530-2-2
REGISTRATION SENSOR
AC(H)
4
F/G
527-14 PS 527-13 5V2 569-4 B
533-3 530-1-3
102 69
153-3 24VAC(H) 153-4 24VAC(N)
531-1 551-3-1
527-12 5V2
103 70
PS23
531-2 551-2-2
527-11 PS
TH2
134-3-1 134-2-2 134-1-3
104
531-3 551-1-3
527-10 SGND 527-9 5V2 527-8 PS
120-1 120-2 120-3 120-4 120-5
ADU PREREGISTRATION SENSOR
PRCB
118
AC(N)
119
135-2-1
105
120
527-7 SGND
549-1
527-6 5V2
554-3-1 554-2-2
527-5 PS
549-2
509-1-3
152-10 PGND 152-9 -24VIN 151-1 5V2 151-2 S_GND 151-3 H1_DRIVE 151-4 MRL_DRIVE 151-5 L2_DRIVE 151-6 L3_DRIVE 151-7 L4_DRIVE 151-8 PWRL_DRIVE (REM/2) 152-8 152-7 152-6 152-5 152-4 152-3 152-2 152-1
532-1 532-2 532-3 506-2B 506-1B
TH4
135-1-2

152-11 PGND
106
118
FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
PS24
REGISTRATION ROLLER 2nd CONVEYANCE MOTOR TRANSFER LEVER HP SENSOR SENSOR
FT9
PS18
549-3
527-4 SGND
554-1-3 509-3-1 508-4 508-3
509-2-2
119 120
565-1
527-3 5V2 527-2 PS
RESET SWITCH
PS55
565-2 565-3
SW1
MS1
527-1 SGND 536-1 24V2 536-2 24V2 536-3 A 536-4 A
FRONT DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH
508-2 506-2A 506-1A 508-1
RL1 24V1
109
121A-1
FT10
M30
80
536-5 B 507-1 24V2 536-6 B
PRCB(2/2)
6
81
507-2 24V2
537-2 537-5 537-1 537-3 537-4 537-6
121A-2
96
RL2 24V1
82
534-1 24V2 507-3 PGND 507-4 PGND 507-5 5V2 507-6 SGND 150-3A FIXTEMP1 150-2A FIXTEMP1 150-1A FIXTEMP1 534-2 24V2
150-6A FUSERSET
97
83
534-3 A
121A-3
98
84
M31
534-4 A
CVDB
LOOP ROLLER MOTOR
85
534-5 B 534-6 B
121A-4
99 100
RL3 24V1
121
150-4A FIXTEMP2 150-5A FIXTEMP2
534-7 24V2 534-8 24V2 534-9 A 503-17A DDRV_Txd 500-1A 500-2A 500-3A 500-4A 500-5A 500-6A 500-7A 500-8A 500-9A 500-10A 500-11A 500-12A 500-13A 500-14A 500-15A 500-16A 500-17A 500-1B 500-2B 500-3B 500-4B 500-5B 500-6B 500-7B 500-8B 500-9B 500-10B 500-11B 500-12B 500-13B 500-14B 400-5A 24V2 500-15B 400-4A DRIVE 500-16B LOCK SD 400-3A 24V2 500-17B 24V 400-2A DRIVE 735-1 24V2 735-2 NC 735-3 PGND 731-1 731-2 731-3 731-4 731-5 539-A4 24V2 539-A3 DRIVE 731-6 731-7 731-8 732-1 732-2 732-3 732-4 732-5 732-6 732-7 732-8 733-1 733-2 733-3 733-4 733-5 733-6 733-7 733-8 400-1A N.C 400-16A 5V2 400-15A PS 400-14A SGND 400-13A 5V2 400-12A PS 400-11A SGND 400-10A 5V2 400-9A PS 400-8A SGND 400-7A 24V2 400-6A DRIVE 150-9A EM 150-10A DRIVE 150-11A PGND 150-12A H/L 150-1B EM 150-2B DRIVE 150-3B PGND 150-4B H/L 150-5B EM 150-6B DRIVE 150-8A H/L 150-7A PGND 150-7B N.C 150-8B FIXTEMP4 150-9B FIXTEMP4 150-10B FIXTEMP3 150-11B FIXTEMP3 503-16A DDRV_Rxd 503-15A SGND 503-14A ADUP_SIG 503-13A ADUH_SIG 503-12A BMAX_SIG 503-11A REG_SIG 524-1 24V2 524-2 24V2 524-3 A 503-8A FD_OPEN 503-7A HAN1_SIG 503-6A HAN2_SIG 503-5A REV_SIG 503-4A BPNF_SIG 503-3A FRL_SIG 503-2A 12V 503-1A REG_CONT 503-17B BPSDCONT 503-16B EXSDCONT 539-B11 2 503-15B AMC1CONT 503-14B AMC2CONT 503-13B APCLCONT 539-B9 5V2 503-12B MCL2CONT 503-11B MCL3CONT 503-10B BPCLCONT 503-9B START/STOP 503-8B CLOCK 503-7B CW/CCW 503-6B LOCK 503-5B H/L 503-4B TR4_CONT 503-3B TR4_CW 503-2B N.C 539-B8 PS 539-B7 SGND 539-B6 5V2 539-B5 PS 539-B4 SGND 539-B3 SGND 539-B2 PS 539-B1 5V2 539-A11 24V2 539-A10 DRIVE 503-1B N.C 539-B10 1 524-4 A 524-5 B 524-6 B 524-7 N.C 548-6 24V2 548-5 24V2 548-4 A 548-3 A 548-2 B 548-1 B 503-9A FEXT_SIG 503-10A ADUR_SIG 534-10 A 534-11 B 534-12 B 150-12B FIXTEMP3
101 102
FIXING UNIT
140-1 142-1 140-2 142-2 140-3 142-3
M32
ADU REVERSE MOTOR
CONVEYANCE UNIT
103 104
538-2 538-5 538-1 538-3 538-4 538-6 535-3 535-9 535-1 535-5 535-7 535-11 535-2 535-4 535-6 535-8 535-10 486-1 486-2 486-3 486-4 485-1 485-2 485-3 485-4 484-1 484-2 484-3 484-4
121B-2
CH12
121B-3
105 106
121B-4
140-4 142-4
M26
PAPER EXIT FAN/R
156-5
156-4
156-2
156-1
155-5 H1(N)
155-4 H1(H)
155-2 H1(N)
155-1 H1(H)
TRNS2
TRNS1
M33
TRANSFORMER/LCT
TRANSFORMER/MAIN BODY
REVERSE/ EXIT MOTOR
525-2 525-5 525-1 525-3 525-4 525-6
M27
PAPER EXIT FAN/M
M34
M28
550-1 550-2 550-3 550-4 550-5 550-6 553-1 553-2 555-6-1 555-5-2 555-4-3 555-3-4 555-2-5 555-1-6 556-3-1 556-2-2 556-1-3 540-2-1 540-1-2
482-1-12 482-2-11 482-3-10 482-4-9 482-5-8 482-6-7 482-7-6 482-8-5 482-9-4 482-10-3 482-11-2 482-12-1
401-1B-16B 401-2B-15B 401-3B-14B 401-4B-13B 401-5B-12B 401-6B-11B 401-7B-10B 401-8B-9B 401-9B-8B 401-10B-7B 401-11B-6B 401-12B-5B 401-13B-4B 401-14B-3B 401-15B-2B 401-16B-1B 402-1-13 402-2-12 402-3-11 402-4-10 402-5-9 402-6-8 402-7-7 402-8-6 402-9-5 402-10-4 402-11-3 402-12-2 402-13-1 566-1-2 566-2-1
PAPER EXIT FAN/F
143-1 143-2 141-1 141-2 145-1 145-2 144-1 144-2
101-2 NC
AC(N)
101-1 AC(H)
PICK UP PAPER INTERMEDIATE TRAY UP SOLENOID/ FEED CONVEYANC DRIVE BP CLUTCH/ CLUTCH/2 MOTOR/BP BP INTERMEDIATE 2nd TRANSFER CONVEYANC PRESSURE/RELEASE CLUTCH/3 MOTOR TRAY BY-PASS INTERMEDIATE UPPER CONVEYANCE CONVEYANCE LIMIT SENSOR SENSOR/2 SENSOR/BP INTERMEDIATE
9
546-1 546-2
M35
403-1
PS29
403-2 403-3 404-1 404-2 404-3 405-1 405-2 405-3 406-1 406-2 407-1 407-2 408-1 408-2
PS25
546-3
PS30
102-1 5V1
547-1
102-2 SGND
OACB
547-2
102-3 REM/1
PS26
547-3
NO PAPER SENSOR/1
102-4 AC_OFF
HTR2
HTR1
PS31 MC7 MC8 SD7
10
542-1 542-2
10
5 6 7
103-1 12V
PS27
542-3
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/1
103-4 SGND 103-2 5V2
IPB
CONVEYANCE SENSOR/1
505-1 505-2 505-3 505-4 505-5 505-6 505-7 505-8 502-1A-17A 502-2A-16A 502-3A-15A 502-4A-14A 502-5A-13A 502-6A-12A 502-7A-11A 502-8A-10A 502-9A-9A 502-10A-8A 502-11A-7A 502-12A-6A 502-13A-5A 502-14A-4A 502-15A-3A 502-16A-2A 502-17A-1A 502-1B-17B 502-2B-16B 502-3B-15B 502-4B-14B 502-5B-13B 502-6B-12B 502-7B-11B 502-8B-10B 502-9B-9B 502-10B-8B 502-11B-7B 502-12B-6B 502-13B-5B 502-14B-4B 502-15B-3B 563-2-1 563-1-2 502-16B-2B 502-17B-1B 501-16B-2B 501-17B-1B
103-5 SGND
MC4 SD6
541-2-1
539-A9 24V2 539-A8 DRIVE
103-3 3.5V
10 53
103-6 SGND 104-1 5V2
54
92
MC5
541-1-2 557-3-1
539-A7 SGND 539-A6 PS 539-A5 5V2
104-3 12V 400-16B N.C
ADU LOCK SOLENOID
TRAY /1
11
543-1 557-2-2 557-1-3 544-2-1 544-1-2 545-2-1
539-A2 24V2 539-A1 DRIVE
11
55
104-6 SGND
93
730-16A CHGYCONT 730-15A CHGYDCV 730-14A GYDCV 730-13A CHGY_ER 730-12A DEVEDCY 730-11A DEVEACY 730-10A DEVEYDCV 730-9A SGND 730-8A CHGMCONT 730-7A CHGMDCV 730-6A GMDCV 730-5A CHGM_ER 730-4A DEVEDCM 730-3A DEVEACM 730-2A DEVEMDCV 730-1A DEVECCLOCK
400-15B N.C 400-14B 5V2 400-13B PS 400-12B SGND 400-11B 5V2 400-10B PS 400-9B SGND 400-8B 5V2 400-7B PS 400-6B SGND 400-5B 3.3V 400-4B VR 400-3B SGND 400-2B T1DET(H) 730-16B CHGCCONT 730-15B CHGCDCV 730-14B GCDCV 730-13B CHGC_ER 730-12B DEVEDCC 730-11B DEVEACC 730-10B DEVECDCV 730-9B SGND 734-1 734-2 734-3 734-4 734-5 734-6 730-8B CHGKCONT 730-7B CHGKDCV 730-6B GKDCV 730-5B CHGK_ER 414-10A 5V2 730-4B DEVEDCK 414-15A PS 414-14A SGND 414-13A 5V2 414-12A PS 414-11A SGND 414-16A 5V2 400-1B SGND
56
PRCB
GRID/Y
CHARGER/Y
PS28 SD5
GRID/M
543-2
401-1A-14A 401-2A-13A 401-3A-12A 401-4A-11A 401-5A-10A 401-6A-9A 401-7A-8A 401-8A-7A 401-9A-6A 401-10A-5A 401-11A-4A 401-12A-3A 401-13A-2A 401-14A-1A 409-1-5 409-2-4 409-3-3 409-4-2 409-5-1
410-1 410-2 410-3 411-1 411-2 411-3 412-1 412-2 412-3 413-3 413-2 413-1
104-7 SGND
57 58
104-4 24V1
PS32
543-3
104-9 PGND
PS33
PAPER SIZE/S1
123-2 123-3 123-4 123-5

PAPER SIZE/L1 DRDB
63 64
123-1
104-2 5V2 104-8 SGND
104-5 24V1
CHARGER/M
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
DCPS1
MC6
PS34
12
545-1-2
GRID/C CHARGER/C GRID/K DEVELOPING BIAS/Y DEVELOPING BIAS/M DEVELOPING BIAS/C DEVELOPING BIAS/K CHARGER/K
12
123-6 123-7
VR1
PAPER SIZE VR/1
123-8 123-9
123-10
104-10 PGND
67
HV1
DCPS4
415-1B-16B 415-2B-15B 415-3B-14B 415-4B-13B 415-5B-12B 415-6B-11B 415-7B-10B
414-9A PS 730-3B DEVEACK 734-7 734-8 730-2B DEVEKDCV 730-1B DEVEKCLOCK 414-7A 24V2 414-8A SGND
105-3 SGND
FNS
68 107
105-1 5V2 105-5 24V1
ACDB
416-1-13 416-2-12 416-3-11 416-4-10 416-5-9 416-6-8 416-7-7 415-8B-9B 415-9B-8B 415-10B-7B 416-8-6 416-9-5 416-10-4
417-1
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
710-1-2 710-2-1
TONER SUPPLY INTERLOCK SWITCH 1st TRANSFER/Y 1st TRANSFER/M 1st TRANSFER/C 1st TRANSFER/K 2nd TRANSFER SEPARATION GUIDE PLATE
13
105-6 N.C
PS35
417-2 417-3 418-1 418-2 418-3 419-1 419-2 419-3 420-1
84
CVDB
105-2 5V2
85
132 133
105-4 SGND 108-1 5V2
130 131
PS36
108-2 SGND 108-3 24V1
NO PAPER SENSOR/2
268-1 12V 268-2 GND 268-4 5VIN 268-3 5VOUT 268-6 24V 268-5 GND
108-4 SGND
11
SCDB
106-2 5V2
14
12
106-5 SGND
PS37 MC9 MC10 SD8
F/G
737-12 737-11 737-10 737-9 737-8 737-7 737-6 737-5 737-4 737-3 737-2 737-1 736-1A TRANSY 736-2A TRANSYI 736-3A TRANSYER 736-4A TRANSM 736-5A TRANSMI 736-6A TRANSMER 736-7A TRANSC 736-8A TRANSCI 736-9A TRANSCER 736-10A TRANSK 736-11A TRANSKI 736-12A TRANSKER 736-1B N.C 736-2B N.C 738-10 738-9 738-8 738-7 738-6 738-5 738-4 738-3 738-2 738-1
414-6A DRIVE 414-5A 24V2 414-4A DRIVE 414-3A 24V2 414-2A DRIVE 414-1A N.C 414-16B N.C 414-15B N.C 414-14B 5V2 414-13B PS 414-12B SGND 414-11B 5V2 414-10B PS 414-9B SGND 414-8B 5V2 414-7B PS 736-3B SGND 736-4B GPCONT 736-5B 2ND_CONT 414-4B VR 736-6B 2ND_VI 414-3B SGND 736-7B 2ND_GAIN 414-2B T2DET(H) 736-8B 2ND_ER 414-1B SGND 736-9B SEPA_CNT 736-10B SEPA_ACI 736-11B SEPA_DCI 736-12B SEPA_ER 428-16A 5V2 428-15A PS 428-14A SGND 739-1 24V2 739-2 NC 428-13A 5V2 414-6B SGND 414-5B 3.3V
415-11B-6B 415-12B-5B 415-13B-4B 415-14B-3B 415-15B-2B 415-16B-1B
416-11-3 416-12-2 416-13-1 567-1-2 567-2-1
420-2 421-1 421-2 422-1 422-2
73
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/2 LCT
106-6 SGND
74 116
106-3 5V2
106-8 SGND
117 114
ADF TSDB
106-7 12V 106-1 5V2
115 86 87
106-4 SGND 107-3 5V2
15
107-6 SGND
415-1A-14A 415-2A-13A 415-3A-12A 415-4A-11A 415-5A-10A 415-6A-9A 415-7A-8A 415-8A-7A 415-9A-6A 415-10A-5A 415-11A-4A 415-12A-3A 415-13A-2A 415-14A-1A 423-1-5 423-2-4 423-3-3 423-4-2 423-5-1
424-1
75
107-1 5V2
PS38
424-2 424-3 425-1 425-2 425-3 426-1 426-2 426-3 427-3 427-2 427-1
76
107-4 SGND
77
OB1
TRAY /2
PAPER SIZE/S2
107-5 SGND
78 79
107-2 5V2
PS39
107-7 12V
HV2
PS40 VR2
PAPER SIZE/L2
16
PAPER SIZE VR/2
429-1B-16B 429-2B-15B 429-3B-14B 429-4B-13B
430-1-13 430-2-12 430-3-11 430-4-10
431-1 431-2 431-3 432-1
17
PS41
94 95
428-12A PS
429-5B-12B
430-5-9
432-2
PS42
F/G
392-1 392-2 392-3 392-4 495-6 495-4 495-3 495-2 495-1 713-1 495-5
KEY COUNTER
739-3 PGND
428-11A SGND 428-10A 5V2 428-9A PS 428-8A SGND
429-6B-11B 429-7B-10B 429-8B-9B 429-9B-8B 494-4 493-4

428-7A 24V2 391-8B 24V
430-6-8 430-7-7 430-8-6 430-9-5 429-10B-7B 494-3 494-1 494-2 493-3 493-1 493-2
428-6A DRIVE
432-3 433-1 433-2 433-3 430-10-4 429-11B-6B 430-11-3 434-1 434-2
NO PAPER SENSOR/3
109
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/3
18
PS43 MC11 MC12 SD9
C(K)
391-7B KEY_CONT 428-5A 24V2 391-6B PGND 391-5B KEY_SET 391-4B DRIVE 391-3B EM 391-2B H/L 391-1B PGND 391-9A DRIVE 391-8A FFAN_ER 428-13B PS 391-7A H/L 428-12B SGND 391-6A PGND 428-11B 5V2 391-9B PGND 391-5A PAT4_DRIVE 391-4A PAT3_DRIVE 391-3A PAT2_DRIVE 391-2A PAT1_DRIVE 428-10B PS 428-9B SGND 428-4A DRIVE 428-3A 24V2 428-2A DRIVE
429-12B-5B 429-13B-4B 429-14B-3B 429-15B-2B 429-16B-1B

428-1A N.C 428-16B N.C 428-15B N.C 428-14B 5V2
430-12-2 430-13-1 568-1-2 568-2-1
435-1 435-2 436-1 436-2
110-3 NC
110-2 NC
110-4 AC(N)
110-1 AC(H)
M36
TRAY /3
307-1 307-2 307-3 307-4
429-1A-14A 429-2A-13A 429-3A-12A 429-4A-11A 429-5A-10A 429-6A-9A 429-7A-8A

428-8B 5V2 428-7B PS
438-1 438-2 438-3 439-1 439-2 439-3 440-1
19
13 14
SCDB
111-1 24V2
PS44
M37
111-4 PGND
15
ADF
111-2 24V2
16
111-5 PGND
PS45
PAPER SIZE/S2
65
FNS
111-6 PGND
66 71
111-3 24V2
INDICATOR LAMP
MS2
741-8-1
711-8 24V2
LCT
429-8A-7A
428-6B SGND
440-2 429-9A-6A 440-3
111-10 PGND
PS46
PAPER SIZE/L2
72 88
111-7 24V2
TONER TONER TONER TONER BOTTLE BOTTLE BOTTLE BOTTLE CLUTCH/Y CLUTCH/M CLUTCH/C CLUTCH/K
20 21 22 23 24 25
20
391-1A 24V
428-5B 3.3V
429-10A-5A 713-2 716-1 716-2 719-1 719-2 722-1 722-2
437-1-5
441-3
TSDB
111-8 24V2
89
VR3
741-7-2 741-6-3 741-5-4 741-4-5 741-3-6 741-2-7 741-1-8
90
711-7 CONT 711-6 24V2 711-5 CONT 711-4 24V2 724-17 EM 711-3 CONT 711-2 24V2 711-1 CONT 724-16 DRIVE (24V1) 724-15 5V 724-14 TLD_SIG 724-13 SGND 724-12 5V 724-11 TLD_SIG 724-10 SGND 724-9 5V 724-8 TLD_SIG 724-7 SGND 724-6 5V 724-5 TLD_SIG 724-4 SGND 724-3 5V2 724-2 PS 724-1 SGND 706-1 A 706-2 A 706-3 B 706-4 B 706-5 24V2 706-6 24V2 705-1 A 705-2 A 705-3 B 705-4 B 705-5 24V2 705-6 24V2 705-7 N.C 702-4A 726-1 A 726-2 A 726-3 B 726-4 B 726-5 24V2 726-6 24V2 726-7 A 726-8 A 726-9 B 726-10 B 726-11 24V2 726-12 24V2 702-13A 702-1B 702-2B 708-11 5V2 708-10 SGND 708-9 CONT 708-8 CLOCK 708-7 CW/CCW 708-6 LOCK 708-5 H/L 708-4 PGND 708-3 PGND 708-2 24V2 708-1 24V2 702-3B 702-4B 702-5B 702-6B 702-7B 702-8B 702-10A 702-11A 702-12A 702-8A 702-9A 702-5A 702-6A 702-7A 702-1A 702-2A 702-3A 704-1 5V2 704-2 SGND 704-3 24V2 704-4 24V2 704-5 PGND 704-6 PGND
428-4B VR 428-3B SGND 428-2B T3DET(H) 724-18 PGND
429-11A-4A 429-12A-3A 429-13A-2A 472-1-3

428-1B SGND
437-2-4 437-3-3 437-4-2 429-14A-1A 394-1-4 472-2-2 472-3-1 712-1 712-2 712-3 715-1 715-2 715-3 718-1 718-2 718-3 721-1 721-2 721-3 725-1 725-2 725-3 394-2-3
393-1A DRIVE 393-2A EM
441-2 441-1 437-5-1
111-9 24V2
PAPER SIZE VR/3
111-11 PGND
127-2
91
111-12 PGND
17 19
M3
127-3
127-1
112-1 24V2
CHAGER INTAKE FAN
M48
442-17A N.C 442-16A 5V2
127-4 443-1-12 444-1 127-6

M4
M43
21 23
WRITING INTAKE FAN/1
PS47
MC14 MC15 MC16 MC17 M49 M50 M51 M52

TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/K TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/C TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/Y TONER SUPPLY MOTOR/M
394-3-2 394-4-1 395-1-4 395-2-3 395-3-2 395-4-1 396-1-4 396-2-3 396-3-2 396-4-1 397-1-4 397-2-3 397-3-2 397-4-1
393-3A H/L 393-4A PGND 393-5A DRIVE 393-6A ER 393-7A H/L 393-8A PGND 393-9A DRIVE 393-10A EM 393-11A H/L 393-12A PGND 393-1B DRIVE 393-2B ER 393-3B H/L 393-4B PGND
442-15A PS 442-14A SGND 442-13A 3.3V3 442-12A VR 442-11A SGND 442-10A 5V2 442-9A PS 442-8A SGND 442-7A 5V2 442-6A PS 442-5A SGND
443-2-11 443-3-10 443-4-9 443-5-8
444-2 444-3 445-1
NO PAPER SENSOR/BP
127-7 127-8 128-2

M5
127-5
112-2 24V2
21
18 20
VR4
445-2 445-3 443-6-7 443-7-6 443-8-5 443-9-4 446-1
M44 M45
WRITING EXHAUST FAN/1
PAPER SIZE VR/BP
128-3 128-4 128-6

M6
WRITING INTAKE FAN/2
128-1
112-3 PGND
22 24
PS48
446-2 446-3 443-10-3 443-11-2 443-12-1 447-1 447-2 447-3
PAPER SIZE/SBP
128-7 128-8
128-5
112-5 PGND
PAPER SIZE/LBP
112-4 N.C 112-6 N.C
PS49
22
BY-PASS TRAY
TLD_Y TLD_M TLD_C TLD_K
M46
126-2 126-3
442-4A 24V2
WRITING EXHAUST FAN/2
449-1
126-4
126-1
113-2 PGND
M38
449-2 398-1-3 398-2-2
393-5B DRIVE 393-6B EM 442-3A DRIVE
DCPS2
PS54
703-1 703-2 703-3 703-4 703-5 703-6 701-13A-1A 701-12A-2A 701-11A-3A 701-10A-4A 701-9A-5A 701-8A-6A 701-7A-7A 701-6A-8A 701-5A-9A 701-4A-10A 701-3A-11A 701-2A-12A 701-1A-13A 701-13B-1B 701-12B-2B 701-11B-3B 701-10B-4B 701-9B-5B 701-8B-6B
126-5 126-6 450-1

442-2A 24V2
M47
126-7
M39
450-2
DRUM UNIT FAN
398-3-1
393-7B PGND
442-1A DRIVE
126-8
126-10
86 89
113-4 PGND
87
23
393-8B TEMP 393-9B SGND 393-10B HUM 393-11B 5V2 442-17B 24V2 442-16B DRIVE
126-9 451-1 125-2
M40
451-2
TEMP /HUM
M20,M21,M22,M23
TONER TONER TONER TONER TONER SUPPLY DCPS1 DCPS2 LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL DOOR DETECTION LEVEL DETECTION DETECTION SENSOR/M DETECTION SENSOR/K OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR/Y SENSOR/C SENSOR 88 91
TSDB
399-4 399-3 399-2 399-1

TEMP/ HUMIDITY SENSOR
125-3
393-12B N.C 700-13A DRV_ERR 700-12A H/L 700-11A TBY_CLOCK 700-10A TBY_EN 700-9A YBCL_DRIVE 700-8A TBY_SIG 700-7A TBM_CLOCK 700-6A TBM_EN 700-5A MBCL_DRIVE 700-4A TBM_SIG 700-3A TB_5V_SIG 700-2A SGND 700-1A TBO_SIG 700-13B CHFAN_ER 700-12B CHFAN_ON 700-11B SGND 700-10B TBC_SIG 700-9B CBCL_DRIVE 700-8B TBC_EN
442-15B 24V2 442-14B DRIVE 442-13B 5V2 442-12B PS 442-11B SGND 442-10B 5V2 442-9B PS 442-8B SGND 442-7B 5V2 442-6B SGND 442-5B CONT 442-4B CLOCK 442-3B CW/CCW 442-2B EM 442-1B H/L
452-1-8 452-2-7 452-3-6 452-4-5 452-5-4 452-6-3 452-7-2 452-8-1
125-4 453-1 453-2 454-1 454-2 454-3 455-1 455-2 455-3

INTERMEDIATE CONVEYANCE CLUTCH/1
125-1
90
113-1 24V2
125-5 125-6 125-7

VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SENSOR
707-1-6 707-2-5 707-3-4 707-4-3 707-5-2 707-6-1
33 34 37 38 41 42 45 46 35 36 39 40 43 44 47 48
MC13 PS50 PS51
125-8 125-9
125-10
113-3 24V2
24
114-1 NC
PRCB
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE DOOR SENSOR
59 60
114-2 24V2 114-6 PGND
727-1-6 727-2-5 727-3-4 727-4-3 727-5-2 727-6-1
92
HV1 M41
114-3 24V2
93 110 111 112
114-7 PGND 114-8 PGND 114-9 PGND
M41
114-4 24V2
113
728-1-6 728-2-5 728-3-4 728-4-3 728-5-2 728-6-1
114-5 24V2
PAPER FEED MOTOR
110 111 112
25
80
456-1-7 456-2-6 456-3-5 456-4-4 456-5-3 456-6-2 456-7-1 457-1-4 457-2-3 457-3-2 457-4-1
Appendix-19
458-1 458-2 458-3 458-4 458-5 458-6 458-7 458-8 458-9 458-10 458-11
115-1 24V2
113
81 82
CVDB
115-2 24V2 459-10 5V2 459-9 PS 459-8 SGND
479-1-3 479-2-2 479-3-1
460-1 460-2 460-3
115-3 PGND
83
PS52
461-1
WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR
115-4 PGND 115-6 PGND
M53
701-7B-7B 701-6B-8B
700-7B TBC_CLOCK 700-6B TBK_SIG
459-7 5V2 459-6 PS
115-7 PGND
Symbol
461-2
M18
PS53
461-3
WASTE TONER DOOR SENSOR
115-8 PGND 702-9B 702-10B 702-11B 702-12B 702-13B
701-5B-9B
TONER BOTTLE MOTOR
52 51 95 49 50 94
Connector Faston Relay connector Crimp
26 27
26
700-5B KBCL_DRIVE
459-5 SGND
124-4
121
709-1 709-2 709-3 709-4 709-5 709-6 709-7 709-8 709-9 709-10 709-11
701-4B-10B 701-3B-11B 701-2B-12B 701-1B-13B
124-3
700-4B TBK_EN 700-3B TBK_CLOCK 700-2B DBLT_CNT 700-1B DBLT_CLOCK 459-4 PGND 459-3 H/L 459-2 EM 459-1 DRIVE
124-1 462-1-4 124-2 462-2-3 462-3-2 462-4-1 124-6

DCPS COOLING FAN
115-5 N.C
M42
I
124-7 124-8
124-5
27
Symbol C (K) CBR1 CBR2 DCPS1 DCPS2 DCPS4 RL1 RL2 RL3 HTR1 HTR2 TS1 TS2 TEMP/HUM HV1 HV2 L2 L3 L4 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48 M49 M50 M51 Key counter Circuit breaker/1 Circuit breaker/2 DC power suply unit/1 DC power suply unit/2
Part name 18-P 2-B 2-D 9-B 18-B 13-G 6-F 6-G 7-G 9-G 9-G 2-O 4-O 23-P 11-P 14-P 2-N 2-N 4-N 8-H 8-H 9-H 2-Q 6-Y 6-Y 7-Y 8-Y 9-Y 9-Y 19-P 19-Q 22-I 23-I 23-I 25-I 26-I 21-P 21-P 22-P 22-P 23-P 21-R 23-X 23-X 24-X
Location M52 M53 M54 MC1 MC2 MC3 MC4 MC5 MC6 MC7 MC8 MC9 MC10 MC11 MC12 MC13 MC14 MC15 MC16 MC17 PS16 PS17 PS18 PS19 PS20 PS21 PS22 PS23 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS28 PS29 PS30 PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 PS35 PS36 PS37 PS38 PS39 PS40
Symbol Toner supply motor/K Toner bottle motor Web motor
Part name 25-X 26-W 4-Q 2-Y 2-Y 4-Y 10-X 11-X 12-X 10-I 10-I 14-I 14-I 18-I 18-I 23-I 20-X 20-X 21-X 21-X 3-Q 3-Q 5-R 3-Y 3-Y 3-Y 4-Y 4-Y 5-Y 9-Y 10-Y 10-Y 11-Y 9-I 9-I 10-I 11-I 12-I 12-I 13-I 13-I 14-I 15-I 15-I 16-I
Location PS41 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS45 PS46 PS47 PS48 PS49 PS50 PS51 PS52 PS53 PS54 PS55 TLD Y TLD M TLD C TLD K SD4 SD5 SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SW1 MS1 MS2 TH1 TH2 TH3 TH4 TRNS1 TRNS2 VR1 VR2 VR3 VR4
Symbol Pre-registration sensor/3
Part name 17-I 17-I 18-I 19-I 19-I 20-I 21-I 21-I 22-I 24-I 24-I 25-I 26-I 22-Q 5-Y 21-Q 21-Q 22-Q 22-Q 2-Y 12-X 11-T 11-I 15-I 18-I 5-B 6-R 19-X 3-O 4-O 3-O 5-O 8-D 8-E 12-I 16-I 20-I 21-I 19-Q 17-T 16-T 16-S 15-T 15-T 15-T Tray upper limit sensor/3 No paper sensor/3 Remaining paper sensor/3 Paper size/S2 Paper size/L2 No paper sensor/BP Paper size/SBP Paper size/LBP Vertical conveyance sensor Vertical conveyance door sensor Waste toner full sensor Waste toner door sensor Toner supply door open/close sensor Conveyance lever sensor Toner level detection sensor/Y Toner level detection sensor/M Toner level detection sensor/C Toner level detection sensor/K Reverse/Exit solenoid Pick up solenoid/BP ADU lock solenoid Pick up solenoid/1 Pick up solenoid/2 Pick up solenoid/3 Reset switch Front door interlock switch Toner supply interlock switch Fixing temperature sensor/1 Fixing temperature sensor/2 Fixing temperature sensor/3 Fixing temperature sensor/4 Transformer/main body Transformer/LCT Paper size VR/1 Paper size VR/2 Paper size VR/3 Paper size VR/BP Indicator lamp Guide plate Separation 2nd transfer 1st transfer/Y 1st transfer/M 1st transfer/C
Location
Symbol 1st transfer/K Developing bias/Y Developing bias/M Developing bias/C Developing bias/K Charger/Y Charger/M Charger/C Charger/K Grid/Y Grid/M Grid/C Grid/K TSDB NF ACDB FHCB PRCB CVDB
Part name 16-S 13-S 14-S 14-S 14-S 11-T 12-T 12-T 13-T 11-S 12-S 12-S 13-S 20-S 3-B 2-C 2-F 3-H 5-K 2-U
Location
ADU conveyance clutch/2 ADU conveyance clutch/1 ADU Pre-registration clutch Intermediate conveyance clutch/2 Intermediate conveyance clutch/3 Paper feed clutch/BP Paper feed clutch/1 Pre-registration clutch/1 Paper feed clutch/2 Pre-registration clutch/2 Paper feed clutch/3 Pre-registration clutch/3 Intermediate conveyance clutch/1 Toner bottle clutch/Y Toner bottle clutch/M Toner bottle clutch/C Toner bottle clutch/K Fixing pressure/release sensor Fixing exit sensor Front door open/close sensor Reverse/Exit sensor ADU conveyance sensor ADU reverse sensor Registration sensor ADU Pre-registration sensor 2nd Transfer HP sensor Tray upper limit sensor/BP By-pass conveyance sensor Intermediate conveyance sensor/1 Intermediate conveyance sensor/2 Pre-registration sensor/1 Tray upper limit sensor/1 No paper sensor/1 Remaining paper sensor/1 Paper size/S1 Paper size/L1 Pre-registration sensor/2 Tray upper limit sensor/2 No paper sensor/2 Remaining paper sensor/2 Paper size/S2 Paper size/L2
DC power suply unit/4 (HD-106) Main relay DCPS2 relay HTR relay Heater/1 Heater/2 Thermostat/1 Thermostat/2 Temp/Humidity sensor High voltage unit/1 High voltage unit/2 Fixing upper heater lamp/1 Fixing upper heater lamp/2 Fixing lower heater lamp Paper exit fan/R Paper exit fan/M Paper exit fan/F Fixing motor Registration roller motor Loop roller motor ADU reverse motor Reverse/exit motor 2nd transfer pressure/release motor Tray up drive motor/BP Fixing cooling fan/3 Fixing cooling fan/2 Tray up drive motor/3 Tray up drive motor/2 Tray up drive motor/1 Paper feed motor DCPS cooling fan Writing intake fan/1 Writing intake fan/2 Writing exhaust fan/1 Writing exhaust fan/2 Drum unit fan Chager intake fan Toner supply motor/Y Toner supply motor/M Toner supply motor/C
Toner supply drive board Noise filter Power plug AC drive board Fixing heater control board Printer control board Conveyance drive board
Appendix-20

Konica 8050 SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Konica 8050 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Return to SubMenu

Jul. 2003 Ver. 1.0

PRINTED IN JAPAN N65AF1110

Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003

SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13

PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Change setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45

6.13 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

V ERROR CODE LIST

IV JAM CODE LIST

3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS FOR 8050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003

Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6

IV JAM CODE LIST

7.6 7.7 7.8

V ERROR CODE LIST

7.9 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4

8.5 9.1 9.2

9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129

Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Internet ISW using Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 iii

V ERROR CODE LIST

IV JAM CODE LIST

Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

2.6.2 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.8 2.8.1

Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4

IV JAM CODE LIST

V ERROR CODE LIST

3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

IV JAM CODE LIST

ERROR CODE LIST

1. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 2. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003

2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

5.10 8050 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-19

V ERROR CODE LIST

IV JAM CODE LIST

TU-109 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55

V ERROR CODE LIST

IV JAM CODE LIST

II SERVICE TOOL I ADJUSTMENT

Konica 8050 Field Service Ver.1.0 Jul. 2003

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

Do not touch with wet hand

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by Konica

Using parts not specified by Konica

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

WARNING: Wall Outlet

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

WARNING: Ground Lead

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

WARNING: Ground Lead

WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place